Umts Guide

CP13 - Introduction to UMTS

CP13 - Introduction to UMTSTRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Copyrights

The Motorola products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memoriesor other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyright computer programs,including the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyright computer program. Accordingly, any copyright Motorola computerprograms contained in the Motorola products described in this document may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the expresswritten permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication,estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the rights that arise by operationof law in the sale of a product.

Restrictions

The software described in this document is the property of Motorola. It is furnished under a license agreement and may be used and/ordisclosed only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. Software and documentation are copyright materials. Making unauthorizedcopies is prohibited by law. No part of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrievalsystem, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola.

Accuracy

While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola assumes no liability resulting from anyinaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from the use of the information obtained herein. Motorola reserves the right to make changesto any products described herein to improve reliability, function, or design, and reserves the right to revise this document and to makechanges from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Motorola does not assumeany liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patentrights of others.

Trademarks

Motorola and the Motorola logo are registered trademarks of Motorola Inc.

Intelligence Everywhere, M-Cell and Taskfinder are trademarks of Motorola Inc.

All other brands and corporate names are trademarks of their respective owners.

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002 CP13 - Introduction to UMTSTRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED

Contents■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■

■

■

■

CP13 - Introduction to UMTSGeneral information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2ETSI standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Feature references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Cross references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Data encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Text conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Special key sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Reporting safety issues. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Warnings and cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Definition of Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Example and format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Failure to comply with warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Definition of Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Example and format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

General warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Specific warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Potentially hazardous voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Electric shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7RF radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Laser radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Lifting equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Parts substitution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Battery supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Lithium batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

General cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Caution labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Specific cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Fibre optics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Static discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Devices sensitive to static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Special handling techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Chapter 1: IntroductionObjectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3UMTS Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4IMT-2000 Roadmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6IMT-2000 Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Research and Proposal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Proposals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Standardisation (1998) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

3GPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-123GPP2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Harmonisation (1999). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14


i

Contents CP13 - Introduction to UMTS

CDMA-2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Multi-carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Direct-Sequence (DS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Permitted Carrier Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16CDMA2000 Evolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Spreading Rate 3 (SR3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18cdma2000 1x Evolution - Data Only (1xEV-DO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18cdma2000 1x Evolution - Data and Voice (1xEV-DV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20FDD Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20UTRA TDD Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

World-wide Spectrum Allocation for IMT-2000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24WARC 92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24WARC 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

European Frequency Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26Licence Allocation in the UK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28

Chapter 2: Network ArchitectureObjectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3UMTS Domains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Domain split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4User equipment Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Mobile equipment Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4USIM Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Infrastructure Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Access Network Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Core Network Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Serving Network Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Home Network Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Transit Network Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

UMTS Architecture - Release 1999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8The Core Network (CN) Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

CS Domain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8PS Domain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Entities Common to the CS and PS domains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

The Access Network (AN) Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10The Base Station System (BSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10The Radio Network System (RNS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

The Mobile Station (MS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10UMTS Network - Release 1999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Entities of the CN-CS Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12The Mobile Services Switching Centre (MSC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12The Gateway MSC (GMSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12The Visitor Location Register (VLR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Entities Common to the CS and PS Domains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14The Home Location Register (HLR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14The Authentication Centre (AuC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14The Equipment Identity Register (EIR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16UTRAN Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Functions related to overall system access control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Radio channel ciphering and deciphering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Functions related to mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Functions related to radio resource management and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Functions related to broadcast and multicast services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Radio network Controller (RNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Controlling Radio Network Controller (CRNC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Serving Radio Network Controller (SRNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Drift Radio Network Controller (DRNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

ii CP13 - Introduction to UMTSTRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

CP13 - Introduction to UMTS Contents

Node B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24Wideband Digital Modem (WDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24The Wideband Transceiver (WBX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24Linear Power Amplifier (LPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

User Equipment (UE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26Introduction to User Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26UE Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28Integrated Circuit (IC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28Terminal Equipment (TE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30Mobile Equipment (ME). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

TAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30MT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

MT Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32Mandatory Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32Additional Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

Network Evolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34Product evolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Using IP options on the open interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34Separation of bearer and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34Adding Iu-CS and MSC functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36Adding access independent multimedia overlay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

Application Servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

Chapter 3: Network ServicesObjectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Classification of Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Teleservices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Bearer Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Supplementary services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Multimedia services: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Service Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Description of Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Information Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Connection oriented / connectionless services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Traffic type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Traffic characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Point-to-Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Uni-Directional Point-to-Multipoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Information Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Maximum transfer delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Delay variation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Bit Error Ratio (BER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Data rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Supported Bit Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Quality of Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Conversational Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Interactive class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Streaming Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Background Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

QoS Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Maximum bitrate (kbps). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Guaranteed bitrate (kbps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Delivery order (y/n) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Maximum SDU size (octets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16SDU format information (bits) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16SDU error ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Residual bit error ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Delivery of erroneous SDUs (y/n/-) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Transfer delay (ms). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16


iii


Traffic handling priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Allocation/Retention Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

The Security Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18Security and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

User authentication: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Network authentication: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Confidentiality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Data integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Mobile equipment identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Authentication and Key Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Distribution of authentication data from HE to SN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Authentication and Key Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Ciphering Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24F8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24F9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Generation of Authentication Vectors/Tokens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26SQN and RAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Authentication Key Management Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Algorithms f1 -f5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26AUTN and AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

USIM Authentication Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Retrieval of SQN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Computation of X-MAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Verification of SQN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Computation of CK and IK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28User Authentication Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Access Link Data Integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30Data integrity protection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30Input parameters to the integrity algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

COUNT-I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30IK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30FRESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30MESSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Ciphering of User/Signalling Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32Input parameters to the cipher algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

COUNT-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32CK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32BEARER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Chapter 4: UMTS ProtocolsObjectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Introduction to UMTS Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Access Stratum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Non-Access Stratum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

General Protocol Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6Horizontal Layers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6Vertical Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Control Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6User Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6Transport Network Control Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6Transport Network User Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

IuCS Protocol Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8Control Plane Protocol Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8Transport Network Control Plane Protocol Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8User Plane Protocol Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

IuPS Protocol Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

iv CP13 - Introduction to UMTSTRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Control Plane Protocol Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10Transport Network Control Plane Protocol Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10User Plane Protocol Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Iub Protocol Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12Control Plane Protocol Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12Transport Network Control Plane Protocol Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12User Plane Protocol Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Iur Protocol Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14Control Plane Protocol Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14Transport Network Control Plane Protocol Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14User Plane Protocol Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Radio Interface Protocol Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16RRC Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Broadcast of information provided by the non-access stratum (Core Network) . . . . . . . . . 4-18Broadcast of information related to the access stratum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18Establishment, re-establishment, maintenance and release of an RRC connection between theUE and UTRAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18Establishment, reconfiguration and release of Radio Bearers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18Assignment, reconfiguration and release of radio resources for the RRC connection . . . . . 4-18RRC connection mobility functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18Paging/notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20Routing of higher layer PDUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20Control of requested QoS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20UE measurement reporting and control of the reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20Outer loop power control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20Control of ciphering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22Arbitration of radio resources on uplink DCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22Initial cell selection and re-selection in idle mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22Integrity protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22Allocation of radio resources for CBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22Configuration for CBS discontinuous reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

RLC Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24MAC Layer Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Mapping between logical and Transport channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26Transport format selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26MAC Multiplexing Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26Dynamic Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26Identification of UEs on Common Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26MUX/DEMUX of PDUs into Transport Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26Traffic Volume Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28Dynamic Transport Channel Type Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28Ciphering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28Access Service Class Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Protocol Stacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30User Plane Protocol Stack (Dedicated Channels CS-Domain). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Iu UP Frame Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30Dedicated Channel Frame Protocol (DCH FP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32Control Plane Protocol Stack (UE-CN SIGNALLING, Dedicated Channels, CS-Domain &PS-Domain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

RANAP Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34SCCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34MTP3-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34SAAL-NNI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

Control Plane Protocol Stack (UE-CN Signalling, Shared Channels, CS-Domain) . . . . . . . 4-36RACH/FACH Frame Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

User Plane Protocol Stack (Dedicated Channels, PS-Domain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38GPRS Tunnelling Protocol, User Plane (GTP-U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38Path Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38


v


Chapter 5: Data Flow and Terrestrial InterfacesObjectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Terrestrial Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4ATM Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Virtual Channels and Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Use of Virtual Channels and Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Virtual Channel Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Virtual Channel Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Virtual Path Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Virtual Path Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Virtual Path and Virtual Connection Switching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12ATM Adaptation Layers (AALs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14The ATM Adaptation Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Convergence Sub-Layer (CS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Segmentation and Reassembly (SAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

ATM Adaptation Layer 2 (AAL2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18CPCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20E1/T1 Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Logical Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22T1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

ATM Cell to E1 Cell Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24E1 Link Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30SDH Drop and Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Network Simplification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32Survivability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32Software Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32Bandwidth on Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Principles of SDH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34Typical UMTS Transport Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

Daisy Chaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36Circuit Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36ATM Protection Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

Chapter 6: W-CDMA TheoryObjectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Multiple Access Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

W-CDMA Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Re-Use of Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Re-Use of Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10Spectral Efficiency (GSM and UMTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12Direct Spread (DS)-CDMA Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

Spreading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16De-spreading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18Orthogonal Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

Channelisation Code Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20De-spreading Other Users Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22Processing Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24Exercise 1 - Spreading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26

vi CP13 - Introduction to UMTSTRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26Exercise 2 - Spreading/Despreading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28Exercise 3 - Spreading/Despreading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30Scrambling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32Scrambling Codes vs Channelisaton Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34Short Codes vs Long Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36Scrambling and Summation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38De-Scrambling and Data Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40Multi-path Radio Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42

Inter-symbol Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42Signal Fade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42

Matched Filter Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44The Rake Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46

Chapter 7: The Physical LayerObjectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Physical Layer Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4QPSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Structure of Transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Downlink Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Uplink Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Channel Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Channels on the Air Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Logical Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

Control Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Paging Control Channel (PCCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Common Control Channel (CCCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Dedicated Control Channel (DCCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

Traffic Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Dedicated Traffic Channel (DTCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Common Traffic Channel (CTCH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

Transport Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16Random Access Channel (RACH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16Forward Access Channel (FACH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16Broadcast Channel (BCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16Paging Channel (PCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16Dedicated Channel (DCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

Physical Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18Common Physical Channels (CPCHs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

Channel Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20Physical signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

Generic Frame Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22Radio Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22System Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22Timeslot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22

Synchronisation Channel (SCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24The Primary SCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24The Secondary SCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24Modulation Symbol "a" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24

Synchronisation (Cell Search) Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26Step 1: Slot synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26Step 2: Frame synchronisation and code-group identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26Step 3: Scrambling-code identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26Synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

Common Pilot Channel (CPICH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30Primary Common Pilot Channel (P-CPICH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30Secondary Common Pilot Channel (S-CPICH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30

P-CCPCH Frame Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32


vii


SCH and P-CCPCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34Paging Indicator Channel (PICH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

PICH Channel Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36Discontinuous Reception (DRX) on the PICH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

DRX Cycle length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38Paging Occasion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38Paging Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

Secondary Common Control Physical Channel (S-CCPCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40Secondary CCPCH Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41

Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42Structure of the PRACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42Random Access Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42PRACH Pre-amble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42Structure of the random-access transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43Structure of PRACH Message Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44

Acquisition Indicator Channel (AICH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46Relationship Between PRACH and AICH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48Downlink Dedicated Physical Channels (DL-DPCH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50

DL-DPCH Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50Downlink Slot Formation in Case of Multi-Code Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52

Uplink Dedicated Physical channels (UL-DPCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54Downlink Flow Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56Uplink Flow Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58

Radio Frame Equalisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58Rate Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58DTX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58

Chapter 8: Radio Resource Management FunctionsObjectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Radio Resource Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4UE RRC States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Idle Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Connected Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Cell DCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Cell FACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Cell PCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8URA PCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

RRC State Change Support via Iur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Physical Layer Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

UE Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10CPICH RSCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10SIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10UTRA carrier RSSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10GSM carrier RSSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10CPICH Ec/No . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10Transport channel BLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10UE transmitted power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10UE Rx-Tx time difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10The Observed time difference to GSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

UTRA Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12RSSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12SIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Transmitted carrier power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Transmitted code power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Transport channel BER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Physical channel BER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Round Trip Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12PRACH Propagation delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Acknowledged PRACH preambles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

viii CP13 - Introduction to UMTSTRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Compressed Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14Compressed mode by puncturing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14Compressed mode by reducing the spreading factor by 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14Compressed mode by higher layer scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Cell Selection/Re-selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16Cell Re-selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Macro Diversity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18Handover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Handover Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20Handover Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Soft and Softer Handover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22S-RNS Relocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26

Open Loop Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26Closed Loop using the Inner Loop method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26Closed Loop using the Outer Loop method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26Site Selection Diversity Power Control (SSDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26

Open Loop Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28Closed Loop Power Control (Inner Loop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30Closed Loop Power Control (Outer Loop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32Multi-Cell Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34Site Select Diversity Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36Space Time Transmit Diversity (STTD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38Closed Loop Mode Transmit diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40Admission Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42

Call Admission Control (CAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42System Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42

Load Congestion Control (LCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44Detailed Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44

Cell Breathing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46Detailed Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46

Hierarchical Cell Structure — Layered Cell Traffic Absorption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48

Chapter 9: HSDPA OverviewObjectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3HSDPA (High Speed Downlink Packet Access) for WCDMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Feature Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Compatibility with Release ‘99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Demand for Packet Switched Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

HSDPA Targets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Higher Data Rates for Streaming-, Interactive- and Background Services . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Consideration of UE Processing Time and Memory Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Higher Spectrum Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Small Changes to existing Techniques and Architectures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Efficient Resource Sharing in Downlink among Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

HSDPA Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Modulation Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Higher Throughput Rates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8AMC (Adaptive Modulation and Coding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Hybrid ARQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Transmission and Retransmission Scheduling in NodeB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

QPSK versus 16-QAM Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10QPSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1016–QAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Maximum Throughput Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12UMTS Rel’. 99 / Rel. 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12HSDPA – Rel. 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Important Changes for HSDPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14New 2 ms Subframe for HSDPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14


ix


New Physical Channels and Transport Channel with HSDPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14No Fast Power Control and variable Spreading Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14New UE Capabilities / Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14New MAC-hs in NodeB and UE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14Impact on NBAP and Frame Protocol Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

New Channels with HSDPA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Transport Channel: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

HS-DSCH (High Speed Downlink Shared Channel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Physical Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

High Speed Shared Control Channel (HS-SCCH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16High Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel (HS-PDSCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Uplink Dedicated Control Channel Associated with HS-DSCH Transmission (UplinkHS-DPCCH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Future Enhancements of HSDPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Beamforming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Transmit Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18MIMO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Preview to HSUPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Total available Transmission Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Much larger Dynamic of the UL Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20UL does not suffer from Channelization Code Shortage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Fast Power Control cannot be abandoned in UL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Chapter 10: Annexe AObjectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Paging for a UE in Idle Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Paging for the UE in RRC Connected Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6RRC Connection Establishment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8RRC DCH Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10RA Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12SRNC Relocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Chapter 11: GlossaryGlossary of technical terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

A Interface - AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3B Interface - Byte. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7C - CW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11D Interface - DYNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19E - EXEC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24F Interface - Full Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27G Interface - GWY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31H Interface - Hyperframe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33I - IWU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-35k - KW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-40L1 - LV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-40M - MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-43NACK - nW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-49O - Overlap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-52PA - PXPDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-54QA- Quiesent mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-61R - RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-61S7- SYSGEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-67T -TxBPF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-76U - UUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-82V - VTX host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-84W - WWW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-86X - X Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-87ZC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-87

x CP13 - Introduction to UMTSTRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

About This Manual Version 1 Rev 0

CP13 - Introduction to UMTS■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■

■

■

■


1

Version 1 Rev 0 General information

General information

Important notice

• Motorola disclaims all liability whatsoever, implied or express, for any risk of damage, loss orreduction in system performance arising directly or indirectly out of the failure of the customer,or any one acting on the customers behalf, to abide by the instructions, system parametersor recommendations made in Motorola Customer Product Documentation.

• If this manual was obtained when attending a Motorola training course, it will not be updated oramended by Motorola. It is intended for TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY. If it was supplied undernormal operational circumstances, to support a major software release, then corrections will besupplied automatically by Motorola in the form of General Manual Revisions (GMRs).

PurposeMotorola Technical Training manuals are intended to support the delivery of Technical Training onlyand are not intended to replace the use of Motorola Customer Product Documentation.

WARNING Failure to comply with Motorola’s operation, installation andmaintenance instructions may, in exceptional circumstances,lead to serious injury or death.

These manuals are not intended to replace the system and equipment training offered by Motorola,although they can be used to supplement and enhance the knowledge gained through such training.

ETSI standardsThe standards in the table below able are protected by copyright and are the property ofthe European Telecommunications Standards Institue (ETSI).

ETSI specification number

GSM 02.60 GSM 04.10 GSM 08.08

GSM 03.60 GSM 04.11 GSM 08.16

GSM 03.64 GSM 04.12 GSM 08.18

GSM 04.01 GSM 04.13 GSM 08.51

GSM 04.02 GSM 04.60 GSM 08.52

GSM 04.03 GSM 04.64 GSM 08.54

GSM 04.04 GSM 04.65 GSM 08.56

GSM 04.05 GSM 08.01 GSM 08.58

GSM 04.06 GSM 08.02 GSM 09.18

GSM 04.07 GSM 08.04 GSM 09.60

GSM 04.08 GSM 08.06

Figures from the above cited technical specifications standards are used, in this training manual,with the permission of ETSI. Further use, modification, or redistribution is strictly prohibited. ETSIstandards are available from http://pda.etsi.org/pda/ and http://etsi.org/eds/

2 CP13 - Introduction to UMTSTRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

General information Version 1 Rev 0

General information

Feature referencesMost of the manuals in the set, of which this manual is part, are revised to accommodate featuresreleased at Motorola General System Releases (GSRn) or GPRS Support Node (GSNn) releases. Inthese manuals, new and amended features are tagged to help users to assess the impact on installednetworks. The tags are the appropriate Motorola Roadmap DataBase (RDB) numbers or Researchand Development Prioritization (RDP) numbers. The tags include index references which are listedin the manual Index. The Index includes the entry feature which is followed by a list of the RDB orRDP numbers for the released features, with page references and hot links in electronic copy.

The tags have the format: {nnnn} or {nnnnn}

Where: is:

{nnnn} the RDB number

{nnnnn} the RDP number

The tags are positioned in text as follows:

Table 1

New and amended feature information Tag position in text

New sentence/s or new or amended text. Immediately before the affected text.

Complete new blocks of text as follows:

• Full sections under a main heading

• Full paragraphs under subheadings

Immediately after the headings as follows:

• Main heading

• Subheading

New or amended complete Figures andTables

After the Figure or Table number andbefore the title text.

Warning, Caution and Note boxes. Immediately before the affected text in thebox.

General command syntax, operator inputor displays (in special fonts).

On a separate line immediately above theaffected item.

For a list of Roadmap numbers and the RDB or RDP numbers of the features included in thissoftware release, refer to the manualSystem Information: GSM Overview (68P02901W01), orto the manual System Information: GPRS Overview (68P02903W01).

Cross referencesThroughout this manual, references are made to external publications, chapter numbersand section names. The references to external publications are shown in italics, chapterand section name cross references are emphasised blue in text.

This manual is divided into uniquely identified and numbered chapters that, in turn, aredivided into sections. Sections are not numbered, but are individually named at the topof each page???, and are listed in the table of contents.


3

Version 1 Rev 0 General information

General information

Data encryptionIn order to avoid electronic eavesdropping, data passing between certain elements in the GSMand GPRS network is encrypted. In order to comply with the export and import requirements ofparticular countries, this encryption occurs at different levels as individually standardised, or may notbe present at all in some parts of the network in which it is normally implemented. The manual set,of which this manual is a part, covers encryption as if fully implemented. Because the rules differ inindividual countries, limitations on the encryption included in the particular software being delivered,are covered in the Release Notes that accompany the individual software release.

Text conventionsThe following conventions are used in the Motorola cellular infrastructure manuals to representkeyboard input text, screen output text and special key sequences.

Input

Characters typed in at the keyboard are shown like this.

OutputMessages, prompts, file listings, directories, utilities, and environmentalvariables that appear on the screen are shown like this.

Special key sequences

Special key sequences are represented as follows:

CTRL-c Press the Control and c keys at the same time.

ALT-f Press the Alt and f keys at the same time.

¦ Press the pipe symbol key.

CR or RETURN Press the Return key.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Reporting safety issues Version 1 Rev 0

Reporting safety issuesWhenever a safety issue arises, carry out the following procedure in all instances. Ensurethat all site personnel are familiar with this procedure.

ProcedureWhenever a safety issue arises:

Safety issue reporting

1 Make the equipment concerned safe, for example by removing power.

2 Make no further attempt to adjust or rectify the equipment.

3 Report the problem directly to the Customer Network Resolution Centre,Swindon +44 (0)1793 565444 or China +86 10 88417733 (telephone) andfollow up with a written report by fax, Swindon +44 (0)1793 430987 or China+86 10 68423633 (fax).

4 Collect evidence from the equipment under the guidance of the CustomerNetwork Resolution Centre.


5

Version 1 Rev 0 Warnings and cautions

Warnings and cautionsThe following describes how warnings and cautions are used in this manual andin all manuals of this Motorola manual set.

WarningsA definition and example follow below:

Definition of Warning

A warning is used to alert the reader to possible hazards that could cause loss of life, physicalinjury, or ill health. This includes hazards introduced during maintenance, for example, the useof adhesives and solvents, as well as those inherent in the equipment.

Example and format

WARNING Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or data in/out connectors. Laserradiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminatedfibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.

Failure to comply with warningsObserve all warnings during all phases of operation, installation and maintenance of the equipmentdescribed in the Motorola manuals. Failure to comply with these warnings, or with specificwarnings elsewhere in the Motorola manuals, or on the equipment itself, violates safetystandards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment. Motorola assumesno liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.

CautionsA definition and example follow below:

Definition of Caution

A caution means that there is a possibility of damage to systems, software or individual items ofequipment within a system. However, this presents no danger to personnel.

Example and format

CAUTION Do not use test equipment that is beyond its due calibration date;arrange for calibration to be carried out.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

General warnings Version 1 Rev 0

General warningsObserve the following specific warnings during all phases of operation, installation andmaintenance of the equipment described in the Motorola manuals:

• Potentially hazardous voltage.• Electric shock.• RF radiation.• Laser radiation.• Heavy equipment.• Parts substitution.• Battery supplies.• Lithium batteries,

Failure to comply with these warnings, or with specific warnings elsewhere in the Motorola manuals,violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment. Motorolaassumes no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.

Warning labelsWarnings particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned on the equipment. Personnelworking with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with any warning labels fitted to theequipment. Warning labels must not be removed, painted over or obscured in any way.

Specific warningsSpecific warnings used throughout the GSM manual set are shown below, and willbe incorporated into procedures as applicable.

These must be observed by all personnel at all times when working with the equipment, as must anyother warnings given in text, in the illustrations and on the equipment. Potentially hazardous voltage

Potentially hazardous voltage

WARNING This equipment operates from a potentially hazardous voltageof 230 V ac single phase or 415 V ac three phase supply. Toachieve isolation of the equipment from the ac supply, the acinput isolator must be set to off and locked.

When working with electrical equipment, reference must be made to the Electricity at Work Regulations1989 (UK), or to the relevant electricity at work legislation for the country in which the equipment is used.

NOTE Motorola GSM equipment does not utilise high voltages.

Electric shock

WARNING Do not touch the victim with your bare hands until theelectric circuit is broken.

Switch off. If this is not possible, protect yourself with dry insulatingmaterial and pull or push the victim clear of the conductor.

ALWAYS send for trained first aid or medical assistance IMMEDIATELY.

In cases of low voltage electric shock (including public supply voltages), serious injuries and evendeath, may result. Direct electrical contact can stun a casualty causing breathing, and even theheart, to stop. It can also cause skin burns at the points of entry and exit of the current.

In the event of an electric shock it may be necessary to carry out artificial respiration. ALWAYSsend for trained first aid or medical assistance IMMEDIATELY.


7

Version 1 Rev 0 General warnings

General warningsIf the casualty is also suffering from burns, flood the affected area with cold water tocool, until trained first aid or medical assistance arrives.

RF radiation

WARNING High RF potentials and electromagnetic fields are present in thisequipment when in operation. Ensure that all transmitters are switchedoff when any antenna connections have to be changed. Do not keytransmitters connected to unterminated cavities or feeders.

Relevant standards (USA and EC), to which regard should be paid when working with RF equipment are:

• ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposureto Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz

• CENELEC 95 ENV 50166-2, Human Exposure to Electromagnetic FieldsHigh Frequency (10 kHz to 300 GHz).

Laser radiation

WARNING Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or optical data in/out connectors.Laser radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors orunterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.

Lifting equipment

WARNING When dismantling heavy assemblies, or removing or replacingequipment, a competent responsible person must ensure thatadequate lifting facilities are available. Where provided, liftingframes must be used for these operations.

When dismantling heavy assemblies, or removing or replacing equipment, the competent responsibleperson must ensure that adequate lifting facilities are available. Where provided, lifting framesmust be used for these operations. When equipments have to be manhandled, reference mustbe made to the Manual Handling of Loads Regulations 1992 (UK) or to the relevant manualhandling of loads legislation for the country in which the equipment is used.

Parts substitution

WARNING Do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modificationof equipment, because of the danger of introducing additional hazards.Contact Motorola if in doubt to ensure that safety features are maintained.

Battery supplies

WARNING Do not wear earth straps when working with standby battery supplies.

Lithium batteries

WARNING Lithium batteries, if subjected to mistreatment, may burst andignite. Defective lithium batteries must not be removed orreplaced. Any boards containing defective lithium batteries mustbe returned to Motorola for repair.

Contact your local Motorola office for how to return defective lithium batteries.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

General cautions Version 1 Rev 0

General cautionsObserve the following cautions during operation, installation and maintenance of the equipmentdescribed in the Motorola manuals. Failure to comply with these cautions or with specific cautionselsewhere in the Motorola manuals may result in damage to the equipment. Motorola assumesno liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.

Caution labelsPersonnel working with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with any caution labels fittedto the equipment. Caution labels must not be removed, painted over or obscured in any way.

Specific cautionsCautions particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned within the text of this manual.These must be observed by all personnel at all times when working with the equipment, as mustany other cautions given in text, on the illustrations and on the equipment.

Fibre optics

CAUTION Fibre optic cables must not be bent in a radius of less than 30 mm.

Static discharge

CAUTION Motorola equipment contains CMOS devices. These metal oxidesemiconductor (MOS) devices are susceptible to damage fromelectrostatic charge. See the section Devices sensitive to static inthe preface of this manual for further information.


9

Version 1 Rev 0 Devices sensitive to static

Devices sensitive to staticCertain metal oxide semiconductor (MOS) devices embody in their design a thin layer ofinsulation that is susceptible to damage from electrostatic charge. Such a charge appliedto the leads of the device could cause irreparable damage.

These charges can be built up on nylon overalls, by friction, by pushing the hands into highinsulation packing material or by use of unearthed soldering irons.

MOS devices are normally despatched from the manufacturers with the leads shorted together,for example, by metal foil eyelets, wire strapping, or by inserting the leads into conductive plasticfoam. Provided the leads are shorted it is safe to handle the device.

Special handling techniquesIn the event of one of these devices having to be replaced, observe the followingprecautions when handling the replacement:

• Always wear an earth strap which must be connected to the electrostaticpoint (ESP) on the equipment.

• Leave the short circuit on the leads until the last moment. It may be necessary to replacethe conductive foam by a piece of wire to enable the device to be fitted.

• Do not wear outer clothing made of nylon or similar man made material. A cotton overall is preferable.• If possible work on an earthed metal surface or anti-static mat. Wipe insulated plastic

work surfaces with an anti-static cloth before starting the operation.• All metal tools should be used and when not in use they should be placed on an earthed surface.• Take care when removing components connected to electrostatic sensitive devices.

These components may be providing protection to the device.

When mounted onto printed circuit boards (PCBs), MOS devices are normally less susceptibleto electrostatic damage. However PCBs should be handled with care, preferably by their edgesand not by their tracks and pins, they should be transferred directly from their packing to theequipment (or the other way around) and never left exposed on the workbench.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Introduction Version 1 Rev 0

Chapter 1

Introduction


1-1

Version 1 Rev 0 Introduction

This page intentionally left blank.

1-2 CP13 - Introduction to UMTSTRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED

©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Objectives Version 1 Rev 0

ObjectivesOn completion of this chapter the student should be able to:

• State the services UMTS aims to provide.• State the IMT-2000 objectives• Describe the evolution of UMTS from 2G systems.• Describe the UMTS operating modes.• State the frequency allocations for UMTS.


1-3

Version 1 Rev 0 UMTS Services

UMTS ServicesUMTS is expected to deliver voice, graphics, video and other broadband information direct to theuser, regardless of location, network or terminal. These fully personal communication serviceswill provide terminal and service mobility on fixed and mobile networks, taking advantage ofthe convergence of existing and future fixed and mobile networks and the potential synergiesthat can be derived from such convergence. The key benefits that UMTS promises includeimprovements in quality and security, incorporating broadband and networked multimediaservices, flexibility in service creation and ubiquitous service portability.

Networked multimedia includes services such as pay-TV; video and audio-on-demand;interactive entertainment; educational and information services; and communicationservices such as video-telephony and fast, large file transfer.

UMTS services are also likely to be used by other sectors, including systems with limitedmobility (e.g. in areas with low population density), and in private/corporate markets, rangingfrom home use to wireless PBXs, emergency and cordless systems.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

UMTS Services Version 1 Rev 0

UMTS Services

Voice·

Graphics·Internet·Conferencing·Video·Text·


1-5

Version 1 Rev 0 IMT-2000 Roadmap

IMT-2000 RoadmapThe diagram opposite points out the possible routes to 3G. On one extreme we see the route taken by3GPP culminating in the adoption of W-CDMA. Centre stage we see the route chosen by the UWC136 supporters. UWC 136 will be built on TDMA technology by enhancing its modulation techniquesto meet ITUs requirements for IMT2000. Far right we see the route chosen for 3GPP2 which hasits origins in the IS95 standards known as CDMAOne culminating in CDMA 2000.

The three different systems are:

1. UMTS W-CDMA

2. UWC-136

3. CDMA2000

Which have been designed by three separate organisations;

1. 3GPP

2. UWCC

3. 3GPP2

GSM Global Systems for Mobile Communication

ETSI European telecommunication Standard Institute

GPRS General Packet Radio Service

EDGE Enhanced Data rates for Global Evolution

UWCC Universal Wireless Communication Committee

TIA Telecommunication Industry Association

3GPP Third Generation Partnership Project

UWC Universal Wireless Communications

3GPP2 Third Generation Partnership Project 2


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

IMT-2000 Roadmap Version 1 Rev 0

IMT-2000 Roadmap

GSMTDMA

(IS - 136)IS-95A

GPRS

EDGE

IS-95B

W-CDMA

3GPP

UWC-136

UWCC

cdma2000

3GPP2

CDG

TIA

UWCC

T1

GSMAssociation

ETSI

3G

2.5G

2G


1-7

Version 1 Rev 0 IMT-2000 Objectives

IMT-2000 ObjectivesThe objectives of IMT-2000 are to encourage global service provision and convergence of the many,essentially competing, wired and wireless access technologies currently in use. IMT-2000 aims to bea global standard that provides the flexibility required by existing operators to seamlessly evolvetheir networks towards the needs of their subscribers in the future. In doing IMT-2000 it expectedto reduce the "telecommunications gap", by offering cost effective access to telecommunicationsfacilities to the billions of people who do not currently have a phone.

IMT-2000 incorporates many current radio access technologies, including both terrestrial andsatellite components. Fixed and mobile access, on both public and private networks

Will offer a much wider range of services and types of terminals than any of thepreceding radio access technologies.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

IMT-2000 Objectives Version 1 Rev 0

IMT-2000 Objectives

Global service capabilities

Terrestrial and satellite components

Flexible/seamless service

Wider range of services/terminals

Fixed/Mobile and Public/Private

Improved operational efficiencies

·

····

·Reduce the "Telecommunications gap"·


1-9

Version 1 Rev 0 Research and Proposal

Research and ProposalHaving laid down the basic framework of requirements, the ITU invited research activities to identifya suitable radio access scheme to fulfil the IMT-2000 aims and objectives. Most of this researchactivity was undertaken by standards development organisations and industry in Europe, TheUnited States, Japan and Korea. Many different radio access technologies (both terrestrial andsatellite), and multiple access methodologies were considered, with the majority being based uponCode Division Multiple Access (CDMA) and Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA).

ProposalsAt the June 1998 deadline, ITU had received a total of 16-proposals, all of which would meet orexceed the basic aims and objectives of IMT-2000. The proposals included 10 terrestrial and sixsatellite based radio access technologies. Of the terrestrial options, only 2 were TDMA based,with the remainder proposing CDMA; either narrow band, wideband or multi-carrier.

The main European contender was Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA), although now generallyaccepted as translating to "UMTS" Terrestrial Radio Access. UTRA proposed a wide band, DirectSpread CDMA (DS-CDMA) and includes a combination CDMA/TDMA mode. UTRA was designedto be backward compatible with existing GSM Mobile Application Part (MAP) core network.

Another dominant proposal was also based on DS-CDMA, but called for the use of multiplenarrow band carriers in the down link and is hence referred to as Multi Carrier CDMA(MC-CDMA). The MC schema make the re-use of existing IS-95 and PCS frequencies for3G more feasible. This, along with the fact that a ANSI-41 core was specified, make theproposal more attractive to current IS-95 operators in the US and Asia.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Research and Proposal Version 1 Rev 0

Research and Proposal

EuropeW-CDMAW-TDMATDMA/CDMAOFDMAODMA

Japan

W-CDMAW-TDMAOFDMA

USAW-CDMAS N/AW-TDMAMC-CDMAWIMS W-CDMAWP-CDMA

Korea

W-CDMA(Asynch)W-CDMA(Synch)

June 199810 Terrestrialproposals to ITU8 x CDMA2 x TDMA


1-11

Version 1 Rev 0 Standardisation (1998)

Standardisation (1998)At the close of the research and proposal phase in June 1998, ten suitable terrestrial radioaccess technologies had been proposed. Each proposal naturally tended to favour compatibilitywith the existing 2G systems in the proposing bodies region, and ITU accepted this need for"Flexible/Seamless" migration. However, it became evident that although many technicalaspects of the proposals were similar, allowing each region to independently define itsown specifications would, in addition to being a waste of resources, mean that equipmentcompatibility on a global basis would be very difficult to achieve.

ITU therefore started initiatives to achieve further standardisation. From these initiatives two forumswere created, the Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) and 3GPP2

3GPPThe Standards Development Organisations (SDOs) involved in the creation of 3GPP were, Associationof Radio Industries and Businesses (ARIB) from Japan, the European Telecommunications StandardsInstitute (ETSI), The Telecommunications Technology Association (TTA) of Korea and T1P1 for theUSA. The partners agreed to joint efforts for the standardisation of W-CDMA based on the UTRAProposal. Later during 1999, The China Wireless Telecommunications Standards Group (CWTS) alsojoined 3GPP. As well as the SDOs, manufacturers and operators also have membership of 3GPP,along with industry interest groups such as the GSM association, UMTS forum, Global Mobile SuppliersAssociation, Ipv6 Forum and the Universal Wireless Communications Consortium (UWCC).

3GPP2Work done by Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) and TTA was merged to form3GPP2, focused on the development of CDMA2000, a multi-carrier solution. This activity isrunning in parallel with the 3GPP project, with participation from ARIB, TelecommunicationsTechnology Committee (TTC) and CWTS as member organisations.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Standardisation (1998) Version 1 Rev 0

Standardisation (1998)

T1P1 TTA

ETSIARIB/TTC

CWTS

3rd GenerationPartnership Project

(3GPP)

Standardisation for acommon W-CDMA Specification

3rd GenerationPartnership Project 2

(3GPP2)

Standardisation for a common MC-CDMA Specification

TTA

TIAARIB/TTC

CCSA


1-13

Version 1 Rev 0 Harmonisation (1999)

Harmonisation (1999)During the spring of 1999 several operators and manufacturers met to seek further convergenceof the CDMA based 3G solutions (UTRA W-CDMA and CDMA2000). As a result of thesemeetings, the Operators Harmonisation Group (OHG) was founded and agreed to adopt a"Harmonised" global 3G CDMA standard consisting of three modes:

1. A direct spread wide band CDMA, Known as UTRA Frequency Division Duplex (FDD).2. A wideband CDMA/TDMA option, known as UTRA Time Division Duplex (TDD).3. A multi-carrier CDMA option, known as CDMA2000 (or 1X/3X).

The main technical impacts of the harmonisation activities were as follows:

1. The change of the UTRA FDD and TDD Chip rate from 4.096 Mcps to 3.84 Mcps.2. The inclusion of a common pilot channel for UTRA FDD.3. A requirement for ALL core networks to support all radio access technologies.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Harmonisation (1999) Version 1 Rev 0

Harmonisation (1999)Manufacturers and operators agreed to adopt aHarmonized global 3rd generation standard consistingof three modes:

Multi Carrier CDMADirect Spread CDMA (UTRA FDD)Time Division Duplex (UTRA TDD)

Main Technical Impacts:

– All core networks to support all air I/F alternatives

– Change of UTRA FDD & TDD Chip Rates from4.096 Mcps to 3.84 Mcps

– Inclusion of a common pilot for UTRA FDD


1-15

Version 1 Rev 0 CDMA-2000

CDMA-2000CDMA-2000, the 3G system promoted by 3GPP2, is based upon the IMT-2000 proposal knownas Multicarrier CDMA (MC-CDMA). 3GPP2 has specified an air interface system that is backwardcompatible with existing IS-95 systems. This approach being necessary because in NorthAmerica, IS-95 networks already use the frequency spectrum allocated for 3G. CDMA-2000 musttherefore coexist with the older systems on the same radio frequency bands.

For CDMA-2000, the carrier composition can be different in downlink and uplink (known asForward and Reverse links respectively for this system). Carrier composition is determined by theSpreading Rate employed. Two Spreading Rates are currently defined by 3GPP2.

• Spreading Rate 1 (SR1) - SR1 is often refered to as "1X". In this mode, both forward and reverselinks use a single, Direct-Sequence spread carrier, with a chip rate of 1.2288 Mcps. Allowingfor the required "Guard Bands" this requires a RF carrier Bandwidth of 1.25 MHz.

• Spreading Rate 3 (SR3) - SR3 is often referred to as "3X". A SR3 Forward CDMAChannel uses 3-Direct-Sequence spread carriers (i.e. Multi-Carrier), each with a chip rateof 1.2288 Mcps and a bandwidth of 1.25 Mhz. A SR3 Reverse CDMA channel uses asingle Direct-Sequence spread carrier with a chip rate of 3.6964 Mcps

Multi-carrierIn Multi-carrier configurations, multiple (up to 12) narrow band (1.25 MHz) carriers can be usedto provide a single composite forward radio link. Early deployments of CDMA-2000 will, asdescribed above, utilise three such carriers and is referred to as "3X" mode.

As these carriers have the same bandwidth as IS-95, they can be used in overlay mode withIS-95. This is possible because CDMA-2000 spreading codes can be chosen to be orthogonalwith the code in IS-95, thus minimising inter-system interference. Close timing synchronisationwithin and between different systems is also essential for this type of operation.

Direct-Sequence (DS)In the Direct-Sequence configuration, the whole available link bandwidth is allocated to onedirect spread narrow band (SR1) or wideband (SR3) carrier.

CDMA-2000 does not use time synchronisation on the uplink and therefore cannot use codes thatare orthogonal with IS-95. Thus, when using SR3, splitting the reverse link carrier into severalnarrow band components, as with the forward Llnk, yields no benefits.

Permitted Carrier Combinations

• Foward Link - DS SR1. Reverse Link - DS SR1 (Currently Deployed as 1X)• Forward Link - MC SR3. Reverse Link - DS SR1 (Future 3X Evolution Path)• Forward Link - MC SR3. Reverse Link - DS SR3 (Future 3X Evolution Path)


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

CDMA-2000 Version 1 Rev 0

CDMA-2000

Direct Sequence

Configuration

(SR1)

Direct Sequence

Configuration

(SR3)

Multi-Carrier

Configuration

(SR3)

1.25 Mhz


1-17

Version 1 Rev 0 CDMA-2000

CDMA-2000

CDMA2000 Evolutioncdma2000 systems, based upon 3GPP2 Spreading Rate 1 standards, commonly known as "cdma2001x" are currently being deployed throughout North America and Asia. These systems provide apacket data service, offering an average user data rate of 144 kbps. In addition, when comparedwith IS-95 A/B, a 50% increase in voice capacity is obtained. This system uses a single 1.25 MHzbandwidth carrier pair and, is capable of co-existing with IS-95 on the same radio spectrum.

However, cdma2000 1x alone, cannot provide the IMT-2000 objective of ISDN H12 channelequivalence, this being data services at 2.048 Mbps. To obtain this rate, further evolutionis required. Three evolution options are available, as follows:

Spreading Rate 3 (SR3)

The original 3GPP2 specifications included standards for a SR3 service, commonly referred to as"cdma2000 3x". As previously described, this mode uses multiple narrow (1.25 MHz) band channels inthe forward direction and, a single wideband (5 MHz) Direct Sequence carrier in the reverse direction,to achieve the require data bandwidth. The requirements for large spectrum allocations and theinability to coexist with IS-95 systems, makes this option the least attractive to operators.

cdma2000 1x Evolution - Data Only (1xEV-DO)

Technical innovations since the 3GPP2 specifications were originally drafted, have led to a numbersof options being proposed to enhance the SR1 or cdma2000 1x system. The first of these is knownas "1xEV-DO". This system provides a standalone packet data service, offering maximum datarates of 2450 kbps, with a user data throughput of 600kbps being a practical figure. A 1.25MHzcarrier pair is required to provide this service. Concurrent voice services may be offered by theoperator using IS-95 A/B or cdma2000 1x, using separate radio spectrum allocations.

cdma2000 1x Evolution - Data and Voice (1xEV-DV)

By using sophisticated Modulation techniques, "1XEV-DV" provides a method of obtaining both voiceand high speed data, including real time data services, using a single 1.25 Mhz carrier pair. Thissystem is 100% backward compatible with both cdma2000 1X and IS-95 A/B systems.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

CDMA-2000 Version 1 Rev 0

CDMA-2000

IS-95 A/B

Cdma2000 (1x)

Cdma2000 (3x) cdma2000(1xEV-DO)

Cdma2000(1xEV-DV)

IS-95 A/B

Cdma2000 (1x)

Cdma2000 (3x) cdma2000(1xEV-DO)

Cdma2000(1xEV-DV)


1-19

Version 1 Rev 0 UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA)

UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA)3GPP is the organisation that develops specifications for a 3G system based on the UMTSTerrestrial Radio Access (UTRA) radio interface, which is primarily designed to operate withan enhanced GSM core network. The UTRA system provides for two operating modes,Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) and Time Division Duplex (TDD)

FDD ModeIn the FDD mode of operation, uplink and downlink transmissions use separate radio carriers in differentsub-bands of the IMT-2000 spectrum allocation. These "paired" radio carriers must be separated by aminimum of 130 MHz. Each radio carrier is allocated a bandwidth of 5 MHz, in each direction.

The 5 MHz of bandwidth of each radio carrier is shared among multiple users. Individual users areseparated using Channelisation Codes, which give a unique signature to that user. The exact codeassigned to a user, determines how much of the shared bandwidth resource that user is allocated.

The number of users that can be accommodated on a radio carrier is dependent upon the resourcerequirements of those users. The higher the data rate of a user, the greater the bandwidthrequired to transport that data, therefore the lower the number of users that can be supported.The theoretical maximum number of users per carrier is 512, this being limited by the number ofavailable Channelisation Codes. In practice this figure will be much lower.

Because separate uplink and downlink radio frequencies are used both network, and user cantransmit and receive simultaneously, allowing full duplex operation. However, in addition tothe transfer of user data the radio interface must support certain Layer 1 control procedures(e.g. power control). These procedures must be performed at regular intervals, and to definethese intervals a radio frame and timeslot structure is defined. Each carrier is divided into 10ms radio frames and each frame is further divided into 15 timeslots.

It should be noted that unlike GSM, where Mobile Stations are allowed to transmit andreceive in set timeslots, UMTS User Equipments operating in FDD mode can transmitand receive in every timeslot, during every radio frame.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA) Version 1 Rev 0

UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA)UTRA FDD Mode

10 ms

TS0 TS14

190 MHz

10 ms

TS0 TS14

10 ms

TS0 TS14

10 ms

TS0 TS14


1-21

Version 1 Rev 0 UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA)

UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA)

UTRA TDD ModeThe TDD UTRA mode differs from the FDD mode in that both uplink and downlink transmissionsuse the same 5 MHz bandwidth carrier, providing a service without the requirement for "paired"radio carriers. Future allocations of radio spectrum to UMTS may not permit the use of pairedbands as radio spectrum becomes a more scarce commodity. Since uplink and downlink sharethe same frequency, the links must be segregated using the time domain

The physical structure of the TDD radio interface is similar to that of UTRA FDD, in that a 10ms frame, divided into 15 timeslots is used. The 15 timeslots can be dynamically allocatedbetween uplink and downlink directions, thus the capacity of the links can be different.This capability makes TDD well suited to asymmetric services.

With such a flexibility, the TDD mode can be adapted to different configurations of uplink/downlinktimeslot usage. However, in any configuration at least one timeslot has to be allocated for thedownlink and at least one time slot allocated for the uplink. In either direction, A given usermay be allocated resources within a single timeslot or multiple timeslots.

Within each timeslot, the data part of each physical channel is defined using a uniquechannelisation code. In the downlink, 16 codes are used per time slot. Multiple parallelphysical channels can be used to support higher data rates for a single user. The 16 codesin each timeslot may be also be shared by multiple users.

In the uplink direction either 1, 2, 4 8, or 16 codes may be used, with each code againdefining an individual physical channel. A user may use a maximum of two physicalchannels per timeslot simultaneously. The larger the number of codes that are used,the lower will be the data rate supported by each code.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA) Version 1 Rev 0

UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA)

10 ms

10 ms

10 ms

10 ms

OR

OR

OR

(Examples Only)

10 ms

10 ms

10 ms

10 ms

OR

OR

OR

10 ms

10 ms

10 ms

10 ms

OR

OR

OR

(Examples Only)


1-23

Version 1 Rev 0 World-wide Spectrum Allocation for IMT-2000

World-wide Spectrum Allocation for IMT-2000

WARC 92The allocation of frequencies per region after the World Administration Radio Conference(WARC 92) meeting has been varied. IMT-2000 recognised the frequencies to be 1885MHzto 2025MHz in the lower and 2110MHz to 2200MHz in the upper band. Each band has beensub-divided into Mobile Satellite Service (MSS) and Terrestrial IMT-2000 parts.

Not all countries are able to utilise the full ITU spectrum allocation as existing serviceshave already been allocated frequencies in these bands. Therefore there are some regionalvariations, as can bee seen from the diagram opposite.

• Europe has used part of the band for DECT - which has very low penetration. It also has GSM1800 at the lower edge. The band is also split in FDD and TDD bands.

• China has left the band clear and will start IMT-2000 activities soon. This will besplit into Wireless Local Loop (WLL) and Mobile.

• Japan has developed with Korea the DoCoMo system which is pre release99 and will launch Q4 2000/Q1 2001.

• In North America most of the IMT-2000 spectrum has already been allocated to second-generationPCS networks, deployed on 5-MHz sub-bands. This makes CDMA-2000 and EDGE themost attractive option to operators in this region, as these systems are backward compatiblewith IS-95B and IS-136, and can co-exist in the same spectrum

WARC 2000More recently the WARC 2000 meeting, held in Istanbul, has allocated a further 519 MHz of radiospectrum for 3G services. Again not all regions will be able to make full use of this spectrum.

The frequency bands added are:

806 MHz - 960 MHz

1710 MHz - 1885 MHz

2500 MHz - 2690 MHz


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

World-wide Spectrum Allocation for IMT-2000 Version 1 Rev 0

World-wide Spectrum Allocation for IMT-2000

A D B FE CA D B FE C

ITU Allocations

Europe

China

JapanKorea (w/o PHS)

NorthAmerica

1850 1900 1950 2000 2050 2100 2150 2200 2250 Mhz

MSS =Mobile Satellite

Services

MDS =Multipoint Service/

Mobile Data Service

1850 1900 1950 2000 2050 2100 2150 2200 2250 Mhz

IMT 2000 MSS

1885 1900 1980 2010 2025

UMTS MSS

1880

IMT 2000 MSS

WLL WLL

GSM1800

DECTGSM1800

IMT 2000 MSS

1893 1919

PHS

MSSPCS

1990

IMT 2000 MSS

2110 2170 2200

UMTS MSS

IMT 2000 MSS

IMT 2000 MSS

MSSMDS

Reserve

2160


1-25

Version 1 Rev 0 European Frequency Allocations

European Frequency AllocationsWhen studying the frequency allocation for Europe more closely we can see the following.

It is split into two frequency bands:

• Lower 1900MHz - 2025MHz• Upper 2110MHz - 2200MHz

Owing to the asymmetric nature of the frequency allocation, frequencies have beenallocated into paired and unpaired bands.

The frequency range 1920 - 1980 MHz and 2110 - 2170 MHz are available to operators aspaired bands, these support UTRA Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) and are best suitedto symmetric services such as telephony. A minimum frequency separation of 190 MHzhas been specified between transmit and receive frequencies.

In the lower band, 1900 - 1920 MHz and 2010 - 2025MHz are available as unpairedbands. These can support UTRA Time Division Duplex (TDD), which is best suitedto asymmetrical services such as the internet.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

European Frequency Allocations Version 1 Rev 0

European Frequency Allocations

GSM1800

DECT

TD

D

Uplink 12 x 5 MHz

1805

1920

1980

2010

2020

2025

1900

1880

SP

A

MS

S

FD

D

TD

D20MHz 60MHz 30MHz

MS

S

FD

D

2200

2110

2170

Downlink 12 x 5 MHz 6 x 5 MHz

140MHz

190MHz between up-link and down-link

60MHz 30MHz

90MHz


1-27

Version 1 Rev 0 Licence Allocation in the UK

Licence Allocation in the UKIn the UK the spectrum was divided into five licenses. The four incumbent operators were successfulin obtaining a license each, which left one for a new entrant. License A, which is considered asthe most desirable spectral package, was set aside for this new entrant.

A - Hutchison 3G

B - Vodaphone

C - One2One

D - BT Cellnet

E - Orange

Some of the issues that should be considered in the frequency allocations are:

• Guard bands provide a reduced noise floor• Lower frequencies travel further, I.e. less cells• Three frequencies allows greater use of multimedia services• Trade-offs between FDD and TDD spectrum


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Licence Allocation in the UK Version 1 Rev 0

Licence Allocation in the UK

D E C A

Unpaired carriers

1900 MHz 1920 MHz

1902.4 MHz 1922.8 MHz

0.4 MHzguard band

14.6 MHzLicence A

10.0 MHzLicence C

14.8 MHzLicence B

10.0 MHzLicence E

10.0 MHzLicence D 1980 MHz

0.3 MHzguard band

1977.2 MHz

2110 MHz

2112.8 MHz

14.6 MHzLicence A

10.0 MHzLicence C

14.8 MHzLicence B

10.0 MHzLicence E

10.0 MHzLicence D 2170 MHz

0.3 MHzguard band

2167.2 MHz

0.3 MHzguard band


1-29

Version 1 Rev 0 Licence Allocation in the UK



©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Network Architecture Version 1 Rev 0

Chapter 2

Network Architecture


2-1

Version 1 Rev 0 Network Architecture



©MOTOROLA LTD.2002



• Name and state the purpose of the UMTS Domains• Describe the architecture of a UMTS network.• Describe the purpose of the major network components.• Describe the options for evolution to future releases.


2-3

Version 1 Rev 0 UMTS Domains

UMTS Domains

Domain splitA basic architectural split is between the user equipment (terminals) and the infrastructure. This resultsin two domains: the User Equipment Domain and the Infrastructure domain. User equipment is theequipment used by the user to access UMTS services. User equipment has a radio interface to theinfrastructure. The infrastructure consists of the physical nodes which perform the various functionsrequired to terminate the radio interface and to support the telecommunication services requirementsof the users. The infrastructure is a shared resource that provides services to all authorised endusers within its coverage area. The reference point between the user equipment domain and theinfrastructure domain is termed the "Uu" reference point (UMTS radio interface).

User equipment DomainThis domain encompasses a variety of equipment types with different levels of functionality.These equipment types are referred to as user equipment (terminals), and they may also becompatible with one or more existing access (fixed or radio) interfaces e.g. dual mode UMTS-GSMuser equipment. The user equipment may include a removable smart card that may be usedin different user equipment types. The user equipment is further sub-divided in to the MobileEquipment Domain (ME) and the User Services Identity Module Domain (USIM). The referencepoint between the ME and the USIM is termed the "Cu" reference point.

Mobile equipment DomainThe Mobile Equipment performs radio transmission and contains applications. The mobile equipmentmay be further sub-divided into several entities, e.g. the one which performs the radio transmissionand related functions, Mobile Termination, (MT), and the one which contains the end-to-endapplication or (e.g. laptop connected to a mobile phone), Terminal Equipment, (TE).

USIM DomainThe USIM contains data and procedures which unambiguously and securely identify itself. Thesefunctions are typically embedded in a standalone smart card. This device is associated to a givenuser, and as such allows to identify this user regardless of the ME he uses.

Infrastructure DomainThe Infrastructure domain is further split into the Access Network Domain, which is characterized bybeing in direct contact with the User Equipment and the Core Network Domain. This split is intendedto simplify/assist the process of de-coupling access related functionality from non-access relatedfunctionality and is in line with the modular principle adopted for the UMTS. The Access NetworkDomain comprises roughly the functions specific to the access technique, while the functions in the Corenetwork domain may potentially be used with information flows using any access technique. This splitallows for different approaches for the Core Network Domain, each approach specifying distinct typesof Core Networks which can be connected to the Access Network Domain, as well as different accesstechniques, each type of Access Network connected to th Core Network Domain. The reference pointbetween the access network domain and the core network domain is termed the "lu" reference point.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

UMTS Domains Version 1 Rev 0

UMTS Domains

HomeNetworkDomain

TransitNetworkDomain

ServingNetworkDomain

CoreNetworkDomain

AccessNetworkDomain

MobileEquipment

Domain

USIMDomain

InfrastructureDomain

User EquipmentDomain

Iu [Yu]Uu

[Zu]

CuSIM

CARD


2-5

Version 1 Rev 0 UMTS Domains

UMTS Domains

Access Network DomainThe Access Network Domain consists of the physical entities which manage the resources of theaccess network and provides the user with a mechanism to access the core network domain.

Core Network DomainThe Core Network Domain consists of the physical entities which provide support for the networkfeatures and telecommunication services. The support provided includes functionality such as themanagement of user location information, control of network features and services, the transfer(switching and transmission) mechanisms for signalling and for user generated information.

The core network domain is sub-divided into the Serving Network Domain, the Home NetworkDomain and the Transit Network Domain. The reference point between the serving network domainand the home network domain is termed the [Zu] reference point. The reference point between theserving network domain and the transit network domain is termed the [Yu] reference point.

Serving Network DomainThe serving network domain is the part of the core network domain to which the access networkdomain that provides the user’s access is connected. It represents the core network functions thatare local to the user’s access point and thus their location changes when the user moves. Theserving network domain is responsible for routing calls and transport user data/information fromsource to destination. It has the ability to interact with the home domain to cater for user specificdata/services and with the transit domain for non-user specific data/services purposes.

Home Network DomainThe home network domain represents the core network functions that are conducted at a permanentlocation regardless of the location of the user’s access point. The USIM is related by subscription tothe home network domain. The home network domain therefore contains at least permanently userspecific data and is responsible for management of subscription information. It may also handlehome specific services, potentially not offered by the serving network domain.

Transit Network DomainThe transit network domain is the core network part located on the communication path between theserving network domain and the remote party. If, for a given call, the remote party is located inside thesame network as the originating UE, then no particular instance of the transit domain is activated.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

UMTS Domains Version 1 Rev 0

UMTS Domains

HomeNetworkDomain

TransitNetworkDomain

ServingNetworkDomain

CoreNetworkDomain

AccessNetworkDomain

MobileEquipment

Domain

USIMDomain

InfrastructureDomain

User EquipmentDomain

Iu [Yu]Uu

[Zu]

CuSIM

CARD


2-7

Version 1 Rev 0 UMTS Architecture - Release 1999

UMTS Architecture - Release 1999The diagram opposite illustrates the basic configuration of a Public Land Mobile Network(PLMN) supporting UMTS and GSM/GPRS. This architecture is as defined in Release1999 of the 3GPP (Dec 02) specifications (TS23.002)

The Core Network (CN) EntitiesThe CN is constituted of a Circuit Switched (CS) domain and a Packet Switched (PS)domain. These two domains differ by the way they support user traffic, as explainedbelow. These two domains are overlapping, i.e. they contain some common entities. APLMN can implement only one domain or both domains.

CS Domain

The CS domain refers to the set of all the CN entities offering "CS type of connection" for usertraffic as well as all the entities supporting the related signalling. A "CS type of connection" is aconnection for which dedicated network resources are allocated at the connection establishmentand released at the connection release. The entities specific to the CS domain are:

• MSC - The Mobile-services Switching Centre• GMSC - Gateway Mobile Service Switching Centre• VLR - Visitor Location Register

PS Domain

The PS domain refers to the set of all the CN entities offering "PS type of connection"for user traffic as well as all the entities supporting the related signalling. A "PS type ofconnection" transports the user information using autonomous concatenation of bits calledpackets: each packet can be routed independently from the previous one. The entitiesspecific to the PS domain are the GPRS specific entities, i.e.

• SGSN - Serving GPRS Support Node• GGSN - Gateway GPRS Support Node

Entities Common to the CS and PS domains

The following entities are common provide common functions to the CS and PS Domains:

• HLR - The Home Location Register• AUC - Authentication Centre• EIR - Equipment Identity Register


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

UMTS Architecture - Release 1999 Version 1 Rev 0

UMTS Architecture - Release 1999

GMSC GGSNAuC

HLR

EIR

SGSNVLR

MSC

VLR

MSC

SIM

ME

USIM

Um Um

CN

BSC

BTS BTS

BSC

BTS BTS

RNC

Node B Node B

RNC

Node B Node B

H Gc

GrD

C

Gi

Gs

GfFG

E

Gp

GnPSTN PSTN

Abis

GbBSS

Abislublub

RNSRNSBSS

SIM-ME I/f

or

MS

Cu

Uu

IuPSIuCSIuPS IuCS

A

Iur


2-9

Version 1 Rev 0 UMTS Architecture - Release 1999


The Access Network (AN) EntitiesTwo different types of access network are used by the CN: the Base Station System (BSS) andthe Radio Network System (RNS). The BSS offers a Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)based technology to access the Mobile Station whereas the RNS offers a Wideband-CodeDivision Multiple Access (W-CDMA) based technology. The MSC (resp. SGSN) canconnect to one of these Access Network type or to both of them.

The Base Station System (BSS)

The Base Station System (BSS) is the system of base station equipments (transceivers,controllers, etc...) which is viewed by the MSC through a single A-interface as being the entityresponsible for communicating with Mobile Stations in a certain area. Similarly, in PLMNs supportingGPRS, the BSS is viewed by the SGSN through a single Gb interface. The functionality forthe A interface is described in GSM 08.02 and for the Gb interface in TS 23.060. The radioequipment of a BSS may support one or more cells. A BSS may consist of one or more basestations. Where an Abis-interface is implemented, the BSS consists of one Base StationController (BSC) and one or more Base Transceiver Station (BTS).

The Radio Network System (RNS)

The Radio Network System (RNS) is the system of base station equipments (transceivers, controllers,etc...) which is viewed by the MSC through a single Iu-interface as being the entity responsiblefor communicating with Mobile Stations in a certain area. Similarly, in PLMNs supporting GPRS,the RNS is viewed by the SGSN through a single Iu-PS interface. The functionality for the Iu-CSinterface is described in TS 25.410 and for the Iu-PS interface in TS 23.060. The radio equipmentof a RNS may support one or more cells. A RNS may consist of one or more base stations. TheRNS consists of one Radio Network Controller (RNC) and one or more Node B.

The Mobile Station (MS)The mobile station consists of the physical equipment used by a PLMN subscriber; it comprisesthe Mobile Equipment (ME) and the Subscriber Identity Module (SIM), called User ServicesIdentity Module (USIM) for Release 99 and following releases. The ME comprises theMobile Termination (MT) which, depending on the application and services, may supportvarious combinations of Terminal Adapter (TA) and Terminal Equipment (TE) functionalgroups. These functional groups are described in GSM 04.02.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

UMTS Architecture - Release 1999 Version 1 Rev 0


GMSC GGSNAuC

HLR

EIR

SGSNVLR

MSC

VLR

MSC

SIM

ME

USIM

Um Um

CN

BSC

BTS BTS

BSC

BTS BTS

RNC

Node B Node B

RNC

Node B Node B

H Gc

GrD

C

Gi

Gs

GfFG

E

Gp

GnPSTN PSTN

Abis

GbBSS

Abislublub

RNSRNSBSS

SIM-ME I/f

or

MS

Cu

Uu

IuPSIuCSIuPS IuCS

A

Iur


2-11

Version 1 Rev 0 UMTS Network - Release 1999

UMTS Network - Release 1999The diagram opposite shows a simplified schematic of a Release 1999 UMTS Network.It illustrates only those entities associated with providing a UMTS service (i.e. excludesany entities specifically associated with GSM/GPRS)

Entities of the CN-CS Domain

The Mobile Services Switching Centre (MSC)

The Mobile-services Switching Centre (MSC) constitutes the interface between the radio systemand the fixed networks. The MSC performs all necessary functions in order to handle the circuitswitched services to and from the mobile stations. In order to obtain radio coverage of a givengeographical area, a number of base stations are normally required; i.e. each MSC would thushave to interface several base stations. In addition several MSCs may be required to cover acountry. The Mobile-services Switching Centre is an exchange which performs all the switchingand signalling functions for mobile stations located in a geographical area designated as theMSC area. The main difference between a MSC and an exchange in a fixed network is that theMSC has to take into account the impact of the allocation of radio resources and the mobilenature of the subscribers and has to perform procedures required for the location registration(see TS 23.012) and procedures required for handovers (see TS 23.009).

The Gateway MSC (GMSC)

If a network delivering a call to the PLMN cannot interrogate the HLR, the call is routed toan MSC. This MSC will interrogate the appropriate HLR and then route the call to the MSCwhere the mobile station is located. The MSC which performs the routing function to the actuallocation of the MS is called the Gateway MSC (GMSC). The acceptance of an interrogation toan HLR is the decision of the operator. The choice of which MSCs can act as Gateway MSCsis for the operator to decide (i.e. all MSCs or some designated MSCs).

The Visitor Location Register (VLR)

A mobile station roaming in an MSC area is controlled by the Visitor Location Register (VLR) incharge of this area. When a Mobile Station (MS) enters a new location area it starts a registrationprocedure. The MSC in charge of that area notices this registration and transfers to the VLR theidentity of the location area where the MS is situated. If this MS is not yet registered, the VLR and theHLR exchange information to allow the proper handling of calls involving the MS. A VLR may be incharge of one or several MSC areas. The VLR contains also the information needed to handle the callsset-up or received by the MSs registered in its database. The following elements are included:

• The International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI);• The Mobile Station International ISDN number (MSISDN);• The Mobile Station Roaming Number (MSRN), see TS 23.003 for allocation principles;• The Temporary Mobile Station Identity (TMSI), if applicable;• The Local Mobile Station Identity (LMSI), if used;• The location area where the mobile station has been registered;• The last known location and the initial location of the MS.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

UMTS Network - Release 1999 Version 1 Rev 0

UMTS Network - Release 1999

Node B Node B

Iub Iub

RNC

UTRAN

Node B Node B

Iub Iub

RNC

HLRVLR AuC

GMSC

MSC

GGSN

SGSN

CN-CS CN-PS

CN Domain

Iu-CS Iu-PS

PSTN PDN

OMC-T(Transport)

OMC-U(UTRAN)

Iur

Uu

User Equipment

RNS RNS


2-13

Version 1 Rev 0 UMTS Network - Release 1999


Entities Common to the CS and PS Domains

The Home Location Register (HLR)

This functional entity is a database in charge of the management of mobile subscribers. A PLMN maycontain one or several HLRs: it depends on the number of mobile subscribers, on the capacity of theequipment and on the organisation of the network. The following kinds of information are stored there:

• Subscription information.• Location information enabling the charging and routing of calls towards the MSC

where the MS is registered (e.g. the MS Roaming Number, the VLR Number,the MSC Number, the Local MS Identity).

• If GPRS is supported, location information enabling the charging and routing of messagesin the SGSN where the MS is currently registered (e.g. the SGSN Number).

• The types of identity are attached to each mobile (e.g. International Mobile Station Identity(IMSI), one or more Mobile Station International ISDN Number(s) (MSISDN), if GPRSis supported zero or more Packet Data Protocol (PDP) address(es)).

The Authentication Centre (AuC)

The Authentication Centre (AuC) is an entity which stores data for each mobile subscriberto allow the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) to be authenticated and toallow communication over the radio path between the mobile station and the network to beciphered. The AuC transmits the data needed for authentication and ciphering via the HLR tothe VLR, MSC and SGSN which needs to authenticate a mobile station. The AuthenticationCentre (AuC) is associated with an HLR, and stores an identity key for each mobile subscriberregistered with the associated HLR. This key is used to generate:

• Data which are used to authenticate the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI).• A key used to cipher communication over the radio path between the mobile station and the network.

The Equipment Identity Register (EIR)

The Equipment Identity Register (EIR) in the GSM system is the logical entity which isresponsible for storing in the network the International Mobile Equipment Identities (IMEIs),used in the GSM system. The equipment is classified as "white listed", "grey listed", "blacklisted" or it may be unknown as specified in TS 22.016 and TS 29.002.

This functional entity contains one or several databases which store(s) the IMEIs usedin the GSM system. An EIR shall as a minimum contain a "white list" (Equipmentclassified as "white listed"). See also TS 22.016 on IMEI.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

UMTS Network - Release 1999 Version 1 Rev 0


Node B Node B

Iub Iub

RNC

UTRAN

Node B Node B

Iub Iub

RNC

HLRVLR AuC

GMSC

MSC

GGSN

SGSN

CN-CS CN-PS

CN Domain

Iu-CS Iu-PS

PSTN PDN

OMC-T(Transport)

OMC-U(UTRAN)

Iur

Uu

User Equipment

RNS RNS


2-15

Version 1 Rev 0 UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN)

UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN)The UTRAN consists of a set of Radio Network Subsystems (RNSs) connected to the CoreNetwork through the IuCS and IuPS. A RNS consists of a Radio Network Controller (RNC) andone or more Node Bs. A Node B is connected to the RNC through the Iub interface. A NodeB can support FDD mode, TDD mode or dual-mode operation. The RNC is responsible for theHandover decisions that require signalling to the UE. An RNC may include a combining/splittingfunction to support combination/splitting of information streams.

Inside the UTRAN, the RNCs of the Radio Network Subsystems can be interconnected togetherthrough the Iur. Iu(s) and Iur are logical interfaces. Iur can be conveyed over direct physicalconnection between RNCs or virtual networks using any suitable transport network.

UTRAN FunctionsThe following is a list of the functions performed by the UTRAN sub-systems. Thesefunctions will be discussed in further detail in later chapters.

Functions related to overall system access control

• Admission Control• Congestion Control• System information broadcasting

Radio channel ciphering and deciphering

Functions related to mobility

• Handover• SRNS Relocation

Functions related to radio resource management and control

• Radio resource configuration and operation• Radio environment survey• combining/splitting control• Radio bearer connection set-up and release (Radio Bearer Control)• Allocation and deallocation of Radio Bearers• Radio protocols function• RF power control• RF power setting• Radio channel coding/decoding• Channel coding control• Initial (random) access detection and handling• CN Distribution function for Non Access Stratum messages

Functions related to broadcast and multicast services

NOTE: Only Broadcast is applicable for Release 1999.

• Broadcast/Multicast Information Distribution• Broadcast/Multicast Flow Control• CBS Status Reporting


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN) Version 1 Rev 0

UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN)

c

Node B Node B

Iub Iub

RNC

Node B Node B

Iub Iub

RNC

Core Network

Iu Iu

IurRNS RNS


2-17

Version 1 Rev 0 Radio network Controller (RNC)

Radio network Controller (RNC)A Radio Network Controller (RNC) is a network component within the PLMN with thefunctions to support one or more Node B, Cell and/or User Equipment.

Typically one RNC can support up to 300 Node Bs, which in turn can provide resources for upto 6 cells. However, it should be noted that the ultimate limiting factor in planning the number ofRNCs required within a PLMN will be the traffic capacity that the RNC can support. Typical valueswill start at around 1000 Erlang, rising to 10,000 Erlang as networks mature.

A Radio Network Controller (RNC) can be considered to operate in one or more of the following roles:

• Controlling Radio Network Controller (CRNC)• Serving Radio Network Controller (SRNC)• Drift Radio Network Controller (DRNC)

Controlling Radio Network Controller (CRNC)Controlling RNC is a role an RNC can take with respect to a specific set of NodeB’s. There is only one Controlling RNC for any Node B. The Controlling RNC has theoverall control of the logical resources of its node B’s.

The main functions of a CRNC are:

• Control of the Radio Resources for the Node-B it controls.• Provision of Services to the Node-B that it controls.• Load and Congestion Control• Admission Control• Code allocation for new radio links


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Radio network Controller (RNC) Version 1 Rev 0

Radio network Controller (RNC)UTRAN CRNC Functions

Controlling of the Radio Resources

Provision of Services to the Node-B

Load and Congestion Control

Admission Control

Code Allocation for new Radio Links

·

···

·Iu

lur

Iu C-RNCC-RNC


2-19


Radio network Controller (RNC)

Serving Radio Network Controller (SRNC)A Serving RNC is the RNC located within a Serving RNS (SRNS). SRNS is a role an RNS cantake with respect to a specific connection between an UE and UTRAN.

There is one Serving RNS for each UE that has a connection to UTRAN.

The Serving RNS is in charge of the radio connection between a UE and the UTRAN.

The Serving RNS terminates the Iu for this UE.

The main functions of an SRNC are:

• Termination of the Radio Resource Control Signalling between the RNC and the UE.• L2 Processing (PDCP, RLC, MAC).• Radio Resource Control operations.• Mapping of Iu Bearer Parameters onto Transport Channels Parameters.• Hand-over decisions.• Outer loop power control.• Macro-Diversity combining and splitting.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Radio network Controller (RNC)UTRAN SRNC Functions

Termination of the Radio Resource Control Signalling between the RNC and the UE

L2 Processing (PDCP, RLC, MAC)

Radio Resource Control Operations

Mapping of Bearer Parameters onto Transport Channel Parameters

·

··

·Hand-Over Decisions·

S-RNC

Outer Loop Power Control·Macro-diversity Combining and Splitting·


2-21


Radio network Controller (RNC)

Drift Radio Network Controller (DRNC)A Drift RNC is located within a Drift RNS. DRNS is role that an RNS can take with respectto a specific connection between a UE and UTRAN.

A DRNS is any RNS that supports the Serving RNS by providing radio resources via the cell(s) itcontrols, to provide additional radio bearer services for a specific connection between a UE and UTRAN.

There may be zero, one or more DRNSs associated with a specific connectionbetween a UE and UTRAN.

The main functions of a DRNC are:

• Macro-diversity combining and splitting.• No L2 processing, i.e. no re-transmissions, acknowledgements or negative acknowledgements.• Transparent routing of data on the Iub and Iur Interfaces, except when Common

or shared channels are used.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Radio network Controller (RNC)UTRAN DRNC Functions

Macro-diversity Combining and Splitting

No L2 Processing

Transparent Routing except for Common/Shared Channels

···

D-RNCS-RNC


2-23

Version 1 Rev 0 Node B

Node BA Node B is a logical node in the RNS that is in charge of radio transmission and reception in oneor more cells. Each Node B is identified within the UTRAN by a unique Node B ID. Typically aNode B will support up to six cells. Each cell is a specific radio coverage area and is Identifiedby a unique Cell ID, which will be broadcast across the entire cell area.

The diagram opposite shows the typical architecture of a Motorola Node B.

Wideband Digital Modem (WDM)The WDM card is the heart of the Node B and performs the majority of the layer 1 (physicallayer) functions. Motorola has designed the WDM card to support a high traffic throughputand to allow trunking across multiple carriers/sectors. This gives advantages in terms ofavailability and also allows the Node B to efficiently handle non-uniform traffic distributions.Up to 6 WDMs can be installed per Node B cabinet and the WDM is fully compliant to theDecember 02 standards baseline of the R99 3GPP standard.

The WDM functions include:

• Transmit and Receive chip and symbol level processing• User plane protocol termination for the Node B/RNC interface• Termination of intra Node B control protocol• Physical control of the signal processing function• Termination of the intra Node B time reference interface• Supports HSDPA

The Wideband Transceiver (WBX)The Wideband Transceiver (WBX) is the interface between the analog and digital baseband worlds.On the forward link the WBX accepts baseband digital data from the WDM via the baseband bus,formats this data to UMTS air interface requirements, and produces a modulated RF signal at therequired carrier frequency for further amplification and transmission via the appropriate antenna.

On the reverse link the received signals are amplified, filtered, down-converted, sampledand digitally processed. Digital data is then output to the WDMs via the baseband bus forfurther processing. Each WBX contains two receiver line-ups, for the main and diversitybranches. The WBX also supports transmit diversity

One WRX is required per cell and typically an additional, redundant device can be fitted.

Linear Power Amplifier (LPA)The Linear Power Amplifier (LPA) subsystem consists of either 3 or 6 hybrid matrixes poweramplifiers. Each amplifier should be thought of as part of an overall power amplification resource whichcan be distributed between sectors and carriers to provide power amplifier trunking. The trunked LPAsubsystem can be configured to support omni, three and six sector configurations, as well as allowingthe site to be reconfigured to meet new operator requirements. The input matrix accepts the compositesignals for each sector for amplification. Up to six LPA modules contribute to amplifying all signalspresented at the input ports. The output matrix ensures proper distribution of the amplified signals tothe correct sector output, whilst minimising the amount of energy presented at the other sector outputs.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Node B Version 1 Rev 0

Node B

WBX

WDM(s)Iub

123

1231

2

3

ToAntenna

O/PMatrix

I/PMatrix

1

2

3

Trunkedlinear

123

123

123


2-25

Version 1 Rev 0 User Equipment (UE)

User Equipment (UE)

Introduction to User EquipmentUMTS aims to offer service capabilities that enable a wide variety of services to be implemented.Such services range from simple services like speech, to complex multimedia services containingseveral simultaneous media components that place totally different requirements on the system andon the terminal equipment. By standardising service capabilities rather than actual services, moreflexibility is available for service providers/network operators to create unique services. The sameprinciple also applies for UMTS terminals, i.e. the types of terminals are not standardised and aretherefore not limited in any way. A wide range of terminal types is likely in the UMTS environment,e.g. speech only terminals, videophones, data terminals, wideband data terminals, fax terminals,multi-band/multi-mode terminals and any combination of the aforementioned.

Terminal development trends for today’s terminals are mainly towards higher integration levelsresulting in smaller size. The goal of "four 100’s" has been a rule of thumb target for handsets, i.e.,100 hour standby, 100 cc size, 100 gram weight and also 100 MIPS performance. The size targetshave already been achieved and any requirement for smaller terminals is questionable from theusability and physical size limitations perspective. The other target parameters have no maximumlimitations. On the other hand, we can see the following further trends for near future terminals:

• Application specific terminals (smart traffic, vending machine radio, etc.);• Increased number of value adding features (graphics, smart messaging, PC connectivity

and compatibility, memory databases, speech recognition, messaging features, displayfunctions, and different source coding methods (e.g., JPEG));

• Support for higher number of source codecs (several speech codecs);• Multiband terminals (e.g., GSM in 900MHz and DCS1800);• Multimode terminals (e.g., UMTS/GSM dualmode terminal);• Dynamic SW configurability;

These trends are more than likely to continue in the future. Multiband and multimode terminalswith high integration levels would be preferred by the users. Technological development of theseterminals relies on new packaging and interconnection technologies, as well as technologicalsteps like SW-radio. The concept trends of mobile handheld terminals is likely to diverge fromsimple speech terminals towards a variety of different types, e.g., communicators, wearablephones, data terminals, etc. The dominant role of speech terminals will be challenged inthe future by these new data- and multimedia-oriented terminals.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

User Equipment (UE) Version 1 Rev 0

User Equipment (UE)

Speech Only

Videophones

Data Terminals

Wideband Data Terminals

Fax Terminals

·

···

·Application Specific Terminals ·Multiband/Multimode Terminals·Dynamic Software Configurability·Value Adding Features·


2-27


User Equipment (UE)

UE ArchitectureThe UMTS UE will consists of a number of logical software and hardware modules. Althoughthese modules may be delivered by a single vendor as single physical and indivisable package,it is also possible that they will be independent physical units.

The reference architecture showing the modules of the UE, along with their corresponding networkfunctions are illustrated opposite and described in the following paragraphs.

Integrated Circuit (IC) CardThe IC card is the module on which are implemented the user and subscription dependent functions ofthe UE. The primary component of the IC card is the User Service Identity Module (USIM)

The mandatory requirements for IC Cards used for holding USIM application, are related tothe need to have one USIM application on the IC card, as well as to the security issues. Thefollowing functionality is required from the IC card holding a USIM application:

• Physical characteristics same as used for GSM SIM• The support of one USIM application• The support of one or more user profile on the USIM• Possibility to update USIM specific information over the air, (e.g. such information as service

profile information, algorithms, etc.) in a secure and controlled manner.• Security mechanisms to prevent USIM application specific information from

unauthorised access or alteration.• User authentication.

In addition to the mandatory functions, the IC Card may support the followingadditional, optional functionality

• The support for more than one simultaneous application (Multiple USIM,Ecash and/or some other applications).

• Possibility to have shared applications/files between multiple subscriptions, includingADNs, other user/SP controlled files and data.

• Possibility for some applications/files to be restricted to one or some of thesubscriptions, under user/SP control.

• Inclusion of a payment method (electronic money and/or prepaid and/or subscription details)• An interface allowing highly secure downloading and configuration of new functionality,

new algorithms and new applications into the IC card as well as updating theexisting applications, algorithms and data.

• Support for storing and possibly executing encryption related information,such as keys and algorithms.

• In multi application cards a functionality to prevent the unauthorised access and alterationof USIM specific information by other applications residing on the card.

• The ability to accept popular value-adding IC card applications, such as digital signatureapplications, EMV credit/debit card, electronic purses such as Mondex and Visacash, etc.

• Possibility for one UMTS SP to block multiple subscription on the card the SP has issued.

Shared applications could include databases (e.g. telephone books), service profiles (e.g.controlling divert information), users preferences (e.g. short dialling codes) and SP-specificparameters inside a USIM application (e.g. call barring tables).


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


User Equipment (UE)UE Architecture

MTRT

NT

TAF

IC CARD

USIM

TERMINALEQUIPMENT

MOBILEEQUIPMENT

UTRAN

CORENETWORK

TERMINALEQUIPMENT

R

TuIu

USEREQUIPMENT

(UE)

USERAPPLICATION

USERAPPLICATION


2-29


User Equipment (UE)

Terminal Equipment (TE)The TE is the part of the UE on which the users end-to-end application functions execute,terminating the services transported via the UMTS bearers. The TE is regarded as a servicedependent component, interacting with a peer TE in the external network.

Mobile Equipment (ME)The ME is the users subscription independent, but mobile system dependent componentof the UE. It will terminate all control plane functions and the user plane UMTSbearer. The ME consists of the following modules:

• Terminal Adaptation Function (TAF)• Mobile Termination (MT)

TAF

The TAF provided the interaction between the TE and MT, via the R interface/referencepoint. This may include the ability of the TE to control the MT by, for example, the useof commands sets ( e.g. Modem AT control commands).

MT

The MT is the telecom service independent, but UMTS dependent portion of the UE which terminatesthe radio transmissions to and from the network. Within the MT two further modules are defined.

The Radio Termination (RT) which is dependent upon the the radio access network. Asingle RT will provide common functions for all services using the same radio accesstechnology. For UMTS the RT terminates the UTRAN physical layer (Uu interface) and alsoencompasses the Access-Stratum layer 2 and layer three protocols.

The RT interfaces to the Network Termination (NT), at the Tu reference points. While the RTis RAN dependent, the NT is CN dependent, and thus terminates, at the serving network, theNon-access Stratum layer 3 protocols, for functions such as mobility management, call control, sessionmanagement, etc. To fulfil many of these functions, the NT must have access to information stored onthe USIM (e.g. security information), this is accessed via the interface at the Cu reference points.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


User Equipment (UE)UE Architecture

MTRT

NT

TAF

IC CARD

USIM

TERMINALEQUIPMENT

MOBILEEQUIPMENT

UTRAN

CORENETWORK

TERMINALEQUIPMENT

R

TuIu

USEREQUIPMENT

(UE)

USERAPPLICATION

USERAPPLICATION


2-31


User Equipment (UE)

MT FunctionalityThe UMTS standards do not restrict the functionality of the terminals in any way. The standardsshould allow terminal specific features and functions to exist. However, a minimum set ofmandatory functions are required in order to ensure proper behaviour of the system, and relatemainly to the interaction with the terminal and the network. Other optional features are supportedby the standard, allowing additional functionality for UMTS terminals

Mandatory Functions

The following functions should be considered mandatory for all UMTS terminals:

• Terminal IC Card interface;• SP and Network registration and deregistration;• Location update;• Originating or receiving a connection oriented or a connectionless service;• An unalterable equipment identification;• Basic identification of the terminal capabilities;• Terminals capable for emergency calls should support emergency call without a USIM;• Support for the execution of algorithms required for authentication and encryption;

Additional Features

The Standard should support the following additional functionality for UMTS terminals:

• A mechanism to download service related information (parameters, scripts or even software),new protocols, other functions and even new APIs into the terminal;

• An API capability to allow information transfer through a well known interface;• Maintenance of the VHE using the same user interface and or another interface while roaming;• Optional insertion of several cards. An example scenario for this feature is a fax machine with a

multiple IC card slots, where several users could insert their IC card and receive faxes.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


User Equipment (UE)UE Functions

At least one IC Card interface

SP and Network Registration/Deregistration

Location Update

MO or MT of services

Unalterable Equipment ID

·

···

·Basic ID of Equipment Capabilities·Emergency calls without USIM·Dynamic Software Configurability·Support of Authentication and Encryption·

Mandatory Functions

Support for download of service related information

API capability through well known interfaces

Support of VHE

Optional insertion of multiple IC cards

···

Optional Functions


2-33

Version 1 Rev 0 Network Evolution

Network EvolutionThe ultimate target of 3GPP is to drive UMTS towards an all Internet Protocol (IP) architecture.The exact detail of this architecture is still under development and will the subject of staged "future"releases of 3GPP Technical Specifications, Known as Release 4 (previously known as Release 2000)and Release 5. Motorola will track this evolution through its core network (GSN) product, which willalso evolve in a series of stages to deliver aspects of ‘all-IP’ functionality. The all IP system, shownin the diagram opposite, complies with UMTS all-IP specifications as defined by 3GPP.

Product evolutionThere are four stages in the evolution of the GSN from Release 99 to Release 4:

Using IP options on the open interfaces

Since most of the GPRS core network interfaces are already based on IP, this is a relativelystraightforward change. For the GSN, the Iu-ps interface operates using a different protocol stackfor signalling which uses SCTP protocol rather than C7 MTP3b at the lower layer.

This can be implemented by a software upgrade for both GSN and RNC. Additionally, GSM MAPmessages can also be routed via SCTP rather than C7 MTP allowing IP to carry all signalling traffic.This would require software upgrade within the GSN, and the addition of a signalling gatewayat the edge of the network to interwork between the C7 and IP protocol stacks.

Initially, this reduces the need for operators to maintain a separate and expensive C7 signallingnetwork. Longer term, it also allows inter-network signalling traffic to be routed via IP which canbe secured using IPSec, both saving costs and increasing security. For interoperability with othervendors, existing Release 99 interfaces are retained as a configurable option.

Separation of bearer and control

Our GSN architecture follows the current GPRS standard that uses the same SGSN node to handleboth signalling and bearer traffic, although these are physically processed on different cards.

By ensuring there are separate routes and processing cards for both types of traffic, a highercapacity, more scalable, efficient and resilient GSN architecture can be realised. This will beachieved by scaling a GSN separately for signalling load (based on number of subscribers,context activations etc) and for bearer load (based on number of packets per second, totalthroughput etc). A distributed GSN is also enabled at this stage, with redundant routers providing99.999% system availability using some 99.9% availability components.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Network Evolution Version 1 Rev 0

Network Evolution

IP Intranet

HSS/ SDB

Network Control Elements

Call State Control FunctionCall Control + SGSN functionality

GPRS/UMTSIntranet

RNC Servers

Node B Node B Node B

SDUs

3G RAN

IP/ATM

OMCs

OMCsRadioSGSN GGSN

Transport

ManagementElements

GGSNGateway

PSTNGateway

C7Gateway

BorderGateway

MAP, CAMEL,

INAP

PSTNVoice

OtherPLMNGSNs

Gateways

Location

Prepaid

MExE

WAP

Feature Servers

ApplicationServersIu (cs & ps)

Other RANIur

PDNData


2-35


Network EvolutionAdding Iu-CS and MSC functionality

Adding further processing cards within the GSN, supplemented by a PSTN Gateway, extends theGPRS core network to handle voice services and voice traffic without the need for an MSC.

The evolved SGSN is termed the Call State Control Function (CSCF) and provides the call controlaspects, and along with the GGSN, also provide the functionality to allow calls to and from IP end pointsthat may be an IP-enabled phone, enterprise IP-based PBX, PC, or any other voice-enabled IP device.

The PSTN gateway provides the interworking functionality for MS to PSTN, or PSTN to MS calls.The PSTN gateway is the interface from the IP core network to the PSTN. Processing withinthe gateway holds the vocoding algorithms for converting between a voice call encapsulatedin an air interface frame and PSTN Pulse-Code Modulation (PCM).

HLR functionality is offered by our Home Subscriber Services (HSS) node, which alsoprovides secure provisioning of WAP/MExE services.

Adding access independent multimedia overlay

This major new network, the IP Multimedia Sub-system (IM), will require a number of newelements, including packet and circuit gateways and further processing. The IM overlay usesthe SIP multimedia call model, DIAMETER or RADIUS authentication and billing, and offersthe same set of services across a wide range of access technologies. New terminals, roamingagreements and services are required to take full advantage of this technology, which takes fulladvantage of widespread IP deployment and accessibility in this timeframe.

Application ServersIn addition to providing telecommunications services (Voice and data) it is envisaged that networkoperators will start to provide "Network Services", such as Internet access, e-mail facilities, etc.To provide these services, a range of applications servers will be required.

Network services are covered in further detail in the next chapter.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Network Evolution Version 1 Rev 0

Network Evolution

IP Intranet

HSS/ SDB

Network Control Elements

Call State Control FunctionCall Control + SGSN functionality

GPRS/UMTSIntranet

RNC Servers

Node B Node B Node B

SDUs

3G RAN

IP/ATM

OMCs

OMCsRadioSGSN GGSN

Transport

ManagementElements

GGSNGateway

PSTNGateway

C7Gateway

BorderGateway

MAP, CAMEL,

INAP

PSTNVoice

OtherPLMNGSNs

Gateways

Location

Prepaid

MExE

WAP

Feature Servers

ApplicationServersIu (cs & ps)

Other RANIur

PDNData


2-37




©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Network Services Version 1 Rev 0

Chapter 3

Network Services


3-1

Version 1 Rev 0 Network Services



©MOTOROLA LTD.2002



• Describe the UMTS service classifications• Describe Quality of Service Architecture• Describe the UMTS Security Architecture


3-3

Version 1 Rev 0 Classification of Services

Classification of Services

TeleservicesTeleservices provide the full capabilities for communications by means of terminal equipment,network functions and possibly functions provided by dedicated centres. The methodologyused covers both single media and multimedia services, the single media services being aparticular type of multimedia services. Multimedia services are classified into categories withsimilar functional characteristics. The six categories are multimedia conference services,multimedia conversational services, multimedia distribution services, multimedia retrieval services,multimedia messaging services and multimedia collection services.

Bearer ServicesBearer services provide the capability for information transfer between accesspoints and involve only low layer functions.

PS and CS domains provide a specific set of bearer capabilities. The Circuit bearer services aredescribed in 22.002. The packet services (GPRS) is described in TS 22.060.

Supplementary servicesA supplementary service modifies or supplements a basic telecommunication service. Consequently,it cannot be offered to a user as a stand alone service. It shall be offered together or inassociation with a basic telecommunication service. The same supplementary service maybe applicable to a number of basic telecommunication services.

Multimedia services:Multimedia services combine two or more media components (e.g. voice, audio, data, video,pictures) within one call. For some services, synchronisation between the media is necessary(e.g. synchronised audio and video). A multimedia service may involve multiple parties, multipleconnections, and the addition or deletion of resources and users within a single call.

Service CapabilitiesService capabilities are based on functionality and mechanisms/toolkits such as providedby SAT, MExE, IN and CAMEL. These service capabilities can be made visible tothe applications through an application interface.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Classification of Services Version 1 Rev 0

Classification of Services• Teleservices• Bearer Services• Supplementary Services• Multimedia Services• Service Capabilities

Definition of Teleservices and Bearer Services

TE MT PLMNpossibletransit

network

Terminatingnetwork

Bearer services

Teleservices

UE

UE: User EquipmentMT: Mobile TerminationTE: Terminal EquipmentTAF: Terminal Adaption Function

TETAF


3-5

Version 1 Rev 0 Description of Services

Description of ServicesBearer services are characterised by a set of end-to-end characteristics with requirements onQoS. The characteristics and requirements cover major network scenarios, i.e. the cases whenthe terminating network is PSTN, ISDN, GSM, IP networks/LANs, X.25 and a PLMN.

Quality of Service is the quality of a requested service (Teleservice or Bearer Service or any otherservice, e.g. customer care) as perceived by the customer. QoS always means end-to-end. NetworkPerformance of several network elements of the originating and terminating network(s) contribute tothe QoS as perceived by the customer including terminals and terminal attachments. In order to offerthe customer a certain QoS the serving network needs to take into account network performancecomponents of their network, reflect the performance of the terminal and add sufficient margin for theterminating networks in case network performance requirements cannot be negotiated.

As far as the QoS to the subscriber is concerned network elements have to providesufficient performance (reflecting possible performance constraints in terminating networks)so that the PLMN cannot be considered as a bottleneck.

This section outlines the requirements on bearer services in two main groups;

• Requirements on information transfer,• Information quality characteristics, which describe the quality of the user information

transferred between two or more access points.

It shall be possible to negotiate / renegotiate the characteristics of a bearer service atsession / connection establishment and during an on going session / connection.

Information TransferRequirements on information transfer, which characterise the networks transfer capabilities fortransferring user data between two or more access points. These characteristics include the following:

Connection oriented / connectionless services

Both Connection oriented and connectionless services shall be supported.

Traffic type.

It is required that the bearer service provides one of the following:

• guaranteed/constant bit rate,• non-guaranteed/dynamically variable bit rate• real time dynamically variable bit rate with a minimum guaranteed bit rate.

Real time and non real time applications shall be supported.

Real time video, audio and speech shall be supported. This implies the:

• ability to provide a real time stream of guaranteed bit rate, end to end delay and delay variation.• ability to provide a real time conversational service of guaranteed bit rate,

end to end delay and delay variation.

Non real time interactive and file transfer service shall be supported. This implies the:

• ability to support message transport with differentiation as regards QoS between different users.

Multimedia applications shall be supported. This implies the:

• ability to support several user flows to/from one user having different traffictypes (e.g. real time, non real time)


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Description of Services Version 1 Rev 0

Description of ServicesInformation Transfer Characteristics

Connection Oriented Services

Connectionless Services

Bearer Service must provide one of the following

Guaranteed/Constant Bit Rate

Non-guaranteed/Dynamically Variable Bit Rate

Real Time/Dynamically Variable Bit Rit With Minimum Guaranteed Bit Rate

Real Time Video, Audio and Speech

Non Real Time Interactive and File Transfer Services

Multimedia Applications


3-7


Description of Services

Traffic characteristicsIt shall be possible for an application to specify its traffic requirements to the network byrequesting a bearer service with one of the following configurations

Point-to-Point

• Uni-Directional• Bi-Directional

SymmetricAsymmetric

Uni-Directional Point-to-Multipoint

• Multicast• Broadcast

A multicast topology is one in which sink parties are specified before the connection is established,or by subsequent operations to add or remove parties from the connection. The source of theconnection shall always be aware of all parties to which the connection travels.

A broadcast topology is one in which the sink parties are not always known to the source. The connectionto individual sink parties is not under the control of the source, but is by request of each sink party.

At USR 2.0 Point to Multipoint Cell Broadcast is supported. Messages are received from theCBC by the RNC over the Iu-BC interface. The message destination is specified by the CBCas a Service Area. This is expanded by the RNC into an actual list of cells that receive themessage. The messaging interface between the CBC and RNC is called the Service AreaBroadcast Protocol (SABP). This is specified in the 3GPP spec 25.419.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Description of ServicesTraffic Characteristics

Point-to-Point

Uni-Directional

Bi-Directional

Symmetric

Asymmetric

Uni-Directional Point-to-Multipoint

Multicast

Broadcast


3-9


Description of Services

Information QualityInformation quality characterises the bit integrity and delay requirements of the applications.

Maximum transfer delay

Transfer delay is the time between the request to transfer the information at one accesspoint to its delivery at the other access point.

Delay variation

The delay variation of the information received information over the bearer has to becontrolled to support real-time services. The possible values for delay variation arenot a limited set, but a continuous range of values.

Bit Error Ratio (BER)

The ratio between incorrect and total transferred information bits. The possible values forBER are not a limited set, but a continuous range of values.

Data rate

The data rate is the amount of data transferred between the two access points in a given period of time.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Description of ServicesInformation Quality Characteristics

Errortolerant

Errorintolerant

Conversational(delay <<1 sec)

Interactive Streaming Background(delay >10 sec)

Conversationalvoice and video

Voice messagingStreaming audio

and videoFax

E-mail arrivalnotificationFTP, still image

paging

E-commerce,WWW browsing,Telnet,

interactive games

(delay approx 1 sec) (delay 10 sec)


3-11

Version 1 Rev 0 Supported Bit Rates

Supported Bit RatesIt shall be possible for one application to specify its traffic requirements to the network by requesting abearer service with any of the specified traffic type, traffic characteristics, maximum transfer delay,delay variation, bit error ratios & data rates. The network should satisfy these requirements withoutwasting resources on the radio and network interfaces due to granularity limitations in bit rates.

It is possible for one mobile termination to have several active bearer services simultaneously,each of which could be connection oriented or connectionless.

The only limiting factor for satisfying application requirements shall be the cumulative bit rateper mobile termination at a given instant (i.e. when summing the bit rates of one mobiletermination’s simultaneous connection oriented and connectionless traffic, irrespective of thetraffic being real time or non real time) in each radio environment:

• At least 144 kbits/s in rural outdoor radio environment.• At least 384 kbits/s in urban/suburban outdoor radio environments.• At least 2048 kbits/s in indoor/low range outdoor radio environment.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Supported Bit Rates Version 1 Rev 0

Supported Bit Rates

At Least 144 Kbps in Rural Outdoor Radio Environments (<500km/h)

At Least 384 Kbps in Urban/Suburban Outdoor Radio Environments (<100km/h)

At Least 2048 Kbps in Indoor/Low Range Outdoor Radio Environments (<10km/h)

···


3-13

Version 1 Rev 0 Quality of Service

Quality of ServiceNetwork Services are considered end-to-end, this means from a Terminal Equipment (TE)to another TE. An End-to-End Service may have a certain Quality of Service (QoS) which isprovided for the user of a network service. It is the user that decides whether he is satisfiedwith the provided QoS or not. To realise a certain network QoS a Bearer Service with clearlydefined characteristics and functionality is to be set up from the source to the destination ofa service. The diagram opposite illustrates the QoS classes for UMTS.

The main distinguishing factor between these QoS classes is how delay sensitive thetraffic is: Conversational class is meant for traffic which is very delay sensitive whileBackground class is the most delay insensitive traffic class.

Conversational and Streaming classes are mainly intended to be used to carry real-time traffic flows.Interactive class and Background are mainly meant to be used by traditional Internet applications likeWWW, Email, Telnet, FTP and News. Due to looser delay requirements, compared to conversationaland streaming classes, both provide better error rate by means of channel coding and retransmission.

Conversational ClassThe most well known use of this scheme is telephony speech (e.g. GSM). But with Internet andmultimedia a number of new applications will require this scheme, for example voice over IP and videoconferencing tools. Real time conversation is always performed between peers (or groups) of live(human) end-users. This is the only scheme where the required characteristics are strictly given byhuman perception. (e.g. The real time data flow is always aiming at a live (human) destination).

Interactive classInteractive traffic is the other classical data communication scheme that on an overall level ischaracterised by the request response pattern of the end-user. At the message destination there is anentity expecting the message (response) within a certain time. Round trip delay time is therefore oneof the key attributes. Another characteristic is that the content of the packets shall be transparentlytransferred (with low bit error rate). Examples are: web browsing, data base retrieval, server access.

Streaming ClassThis scheme is one of the newcomers in data communication, raising a number of new requirements inboth telecommunication and data communication systems. It is characterised by the fact that the timerelations (variation) between information entities (i.e. samples, packets) within a flow shall be preserved,although it does not have any requirements on low transfer delay. The delay variation of the end-to-endflow shall be limited, to preserve the time relation (variation) between information entities of the stream.When the user is looking at (listening to) real time video (audio) the scheme of real time streams applies.

Background TaskBackground traffic is one of the classical data communication schemes that on an overall levelis characterised by that the destination is not expecting the data within a certain time. Thescheme is thus more or less delivery time insensitive. Another characteristic is that the contentof the packets shall be transparently transferred (with low bit error rate).

Examples are background delivery of E-mail notification, SMS, download of databasesand reception of measurement records.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Quality of Service Version 1 Rev 0

Quality of ServiceQuality of Service Classes

ConversationalVoiceVideo

StreamingAudio/Video Streaming, FTP

Still Image, Paging

InteractiveVoice Messaging

Web Browsing, E-Commerce

BackgroundE-mail Arrival Notification

Fax

Maximum bitrate

Guaranteed bitrate

Delivery order

Maximum SDU size

SDU format information bits

SDU error ratio

Residual bit error ratio

Delivery of erroneous SDUs

Transfer Delay

Traffic Handling Priority

Allocation/Retention Priority


3-15

Version 1 Rev 0 QoS Attributes

QoS AttributesUMTS bearer service attributes describe the service provided by the UMTS network to the user ofthe UMTS bearer service. A set of QoS attributes (QoS profile) specifies this service.

Maximum bitrate (kbps)Maximum number of bits delivered by UMTS and to UMTS at a SAP within a periodof time, divided by the duration of the period.

Guaranteed bitrate (kbps)Guaranteed number of bits delivered by UMTS at a SAP within a period of time (providedthat there is data to deliver), divided by the duration of the period.

Delivery order (y/n)Indicates whether the UMTS bearer shall provide in-sequence SDU delivery or not.

Maximum SDU size (octets)The maximum allowed SDU size.

SDU format information (bits)List of possible exact sizes of SDUs

SDU error ratioIndicates the fraction of SDUs lost or detected as erroneous. SDU error ratiois defined only for conforming traffic.

Residual bit error ratioIndicates the undetected bit error ratio in the delivered SDUs. If no error detection is requested,Residual bit error ratio indicates the bit error ratio in the delivered SDUs.

Delivery of erroneous SDUs (y/n/-)Indicates whether SDUs detected as erroneous shall be delivered or discarded.

Transfer delay (ms)Indicates maximum delay for 95th percentile of the distribution of delay for all delivered SDUsduring the lifetime of a bearer service, where delay for an SDU is defined as the time from arequest to transfer an SDU at one SAP to its delivery at the other SAP.

Traffic handling prioritySpecifies the relative importance for handling of all SDUs belonging to the UMTSbearer compared to the SDUs of other bearers.

Allocation/Retention PrioritySpecifies the relative importance compared to other UMTS bearers for allocation andretention of the UMTS bearer. The Allocation/Retention Priority attribute is a subscriptionattribute which is not negotiated from the mobile terminal.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

QoS Attributes Version 1 Rev 0

QoS Attributes

Traffic Class

Maximum bitrate

Delivery order

Maximum SDU size

SDU format information

SDU error ratio

Residual bit error ratio

Delivery of erroneous SDUs

Transfer delay

Guaranteed bit rate

Traffic handling priority

Allocation/Retention priority

Conversationalclass

Streamingclass

Interactiveclass

Backgroundclass

X X X XX X X XX X X X

X X X X

X X X XX X X X

X X X XX

X XX X

X X


3-17

Version 1 Rev 0 The Security Architecture

The Security ArchitectureFive security feature groups are defined. Each of these feature groups meets certainthreats, accomplishes certain security objectives:

Network access security (I): the set of security features that provide users with secure access to3G services, and which in particular protect against attacks on the (radio) access link.

Network domain security (II): the set of security features that enable nodes in the provider domain tosecurely exchange signalling data, and protect against attacks on the wireline network.

User domain security (III): the set of security features that secure access to mobile stations.

Application domain security (IV): the set of security features that enable applications in theuser and in the provider domain to securely exchange messages.

Visibility and configurability of security (V): the set of features that enables the user toinform himself whether a security feature is in operation or not and whether the use andprovision of services should depend on the security feature.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

The Security Architecture Version 1 Rev 0

The Security ArchitectureApplication

Stratum

TransportStratum

HomeStratum/ServingStratum

AN

(IV)

(I)(III)(V)

(I) (I)

(I)

(II)

(I)MT

TE USIM

User Application Provider Application

SN

HE


3-19

Version 1 Rev 0 Security and Privacy

Security and Privacy

User authentication:The property that the Serving Network (SN) corroborates the identity of the user;

Network authentication:The property that the user corroborates that he is connected to a serving network that is authorised bythe users HE to provide him services; this includes the guarantee that this authorisation is recent.

ConfidentialityCipher algorithm agreement: the property that the MS and the SN can securelynegotiate the algorithm that they shall use subsequently;

Cipher key agreement: the property that the MS and the SN agree on a cipherkey that they may use subsequently;

Confidentiality of user data: the property that user data cannot be overheardon the radio access interface;

Confidentiality of signalling data: the property that signalling data cannot beoverheard on the radio access interface.

Data integrityIntegrity algorithm agreement: the property that the MS and the SN can securely negotiatethe integrity algorithm that they shall use subsequently;

Integrity key agreement: the property that the MS and the SN agree on anintegrity key that they may use subsequently;

Data integrity and origin authentication of signalling data: the property that thereceiving entity (MS or SN) is able to verify that signalling data has not been modified inan unauthorised way since it was sent by the sending entity (SN or MS) and that the dataorigin of the signalling data received is indeed the one claimed.

Mobile equipment identificationIn certain cases, SN may request the MS to send it the mobile equipment identity of the terminal. Themobile equipment identity shall only be sent after authentication of SN with exception of emergencycalls. The IMEI should be securely stored in the terminal. However, the presentation of this identity tothe network is not a security feature and the transmission of the IMEI is not protected. Although it is nota security feature, it should not be deleted from UMTS however, as it is useful for other purposes.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Security and Privacy Version 1 Rev 0

Security and PrivacyUser AuthenticationNetwork AuthenticationConfidentialityData integrityMobile equipment identification


3-21

Version 1 Rev 0 Authentication and Key Agreement

Authentication and Key AgreementAuthentication and Key Agreement (AKA) achieves mutual authentication by the user and thenetwork showing knowledge of a secret key K which is shared between and available only to the USIMand the AuC in the user’s HE. In addition the USIM and the HE keep track of counters SEQMS andSEQHE respectively to support network authentication. The method was chosen in such a way as toachieve maximum compatibility with the current GSM security architecture and facilitate migration fromGSM to UMTS. The method is composed of a challenge/response protocol identical to the GSMsubscriber authentication and key establishment protocol combined with a sequence number-basedone-pass protocol for network authentication derived from the ISO standard ISO/IEC 9798-4

Distribution of authentication data from HE to SNUpon receipt of a request from the VLR/SGSN, the HE/AuC sends an ordered array of n authenticationvectors (the equivalent of a GSM "triplet") to the VLR/SGSN. Each authentication vector consistsof the following components: a random number RAND, an expected response XRES, a cipherkey CK, an integrity key IK and an authentication token AUTN. Each authentication vector is goodfor one authentication and key agreement between the VLR/SGSN and the USIM.

Authentication and Key AgreementWhen the VLR/SGSN initiates an authentication and key agreement, it selects the nextauthentication vector from the array and sends the parameters RAND and AUTN to the user.The USIM checks whether AUTN can be accepted and, if so, produces a response RES whichis sent back to the VLR/SGSN. The USIM also computes CK and IK.

The VLR/SGSN compares the received RES with XRES. If they match the VLR/SGSNconsiders the authentication and key agreement exchange to be successfully completed.The established keys CK and IK will then be transferred by the USIM and the VLR/SGSNto the entities which perform ciphering and integrity functions.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Authentication and Key Agreement Version 1 Rev 0

Authentication and Key Agreement

MS SN/VLR HE/HLR

Authentication request

Authentication data responseAV (1 . . . n)

Store authentication vectors

Select authentication vectors

User authentication requestRAND(i) || AUTN(i)

Verify AUTN(i)compute User authentication

RES(i)

Compare RES(i) and XRES(i)

Compute CK(i) and IK(i) Select CK(i) and IK(i)

Distributionauthentication vectors

from HE to SN

Authentication Key

Generatevectors AV (1 . . . n)


3-23

Version 1 Rev 0 Ciphering Algorithms

Ciphering AlgorithmsThe ciphering algorithms used in UMTS are shown on the slide opposite. As can be seen alot of different algorithms are active in the UMTS system. Algorithms f1 to f5 are of the typethat are used to compute numbers for use in authentication procedures.

Two very important algorithms, f8 and f9 are also shown, they have the following functions.

F8This algorithm will perform the ciphering function. The ciphering function is performed either inthe RLC sub-layer or in the MAC sub-layer according to the following rules:

• If a radio bearer is using a non-transparent RLC mode (AM or UM), cipheringis performed in the RLC sub-layer.

• If a radio bearer is using the transparent RLC mode, ciphering is performedin the MAC sub-layer (MAC-d entity).

Ciphering when applied is performed in the S-RNC and the ME and the context needed forciphering (CK, Count-C, etc.) is only known in S-RNC and the ME.

F9Most of the control signalling information elements that are sent between the MS and the networkare considered sensitive and must be integrity protected. Therefore a message authenticationfunction has been developed to solve this problem. The MS will still go through the initialRRC connection establishment sequence and perform the set-up security functions. After thishowever some signalling messages will be encoded using the f9 algorithm. This will be thecase for all RRC, MM, CC, GMM and SM Messages. The MM procedure in the MS will be theprocess responsible for starting the integrity protection procedure.

AK Anonymity Key

AKA Authentication and key agreement

AUTN Authentication Token

MAC The message authentication code included in AUTN, computed using f1

XRES Expected Response


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Ciphering Algorithms Version 1 Rev 0

Ciphering Algorithms

F1 - Message authentication function used to compute MAC·

F3 - Key generating function used to compute CK·F2 - Message authentication function used to compute RES and XRES·F1* - Message authentication function used to compute MAC-S·

F5* - Key generating function used to compute AK in re-synchronisation procedures·F5 - Key generating function used to compute AK in normal procedures·F4 - Key generating function used to compute IK·

K-Long-term secret key shared between the USIM and the AuC·

F9 - Signalling elements between the UE and RNC·F8 - Data transfer between the UE and RNC·


3-25

Version 1 Rev 0 Generation of Authentication Vectors/Tokens

Generation of Authentication Vectors/TokensUpon the receipt of the authentication data request from the VLR/SGSN, the HE may havepre-computed the required number of authentication vectors and retrieve them from the HLRdatabase or may compute them on demand. The HE/AuC sends an authentication response backto the VLR/SGSN that contains an ordered array of n authentication vectors AV(1..n). The diagramopposite shows the generation of an authentication vector AV by the HE/AuC.

SQN and RANDThe HE/AuC starts with generating a fresh sequence number SQN and an unpredictablechallenge RAND. SQNs are unique to each user (the HE/AuC keeps a counter: SQNHe

for each user) and are generated in batches, with a "time stamp" derived from a clockgiving universal time. RAND is a randomly generated number.

Authentication Key Management FieldAn authentication and key management field AMF is used as a third input variable to the algorithms andis also included in the authentication token of each authentication vector. AMF may be used by theoperator to "switch" functions in the USIM (e.g to indicate the algorithm and key used to generate aparticular authentication vector, or set the number of entries in a Sequence list (the list size)

Algorithms f1 -f5Subsequently the following values are computed using the various algorithms (f1 - f5):

A message authentication code MAC = f1K(SQN || RAND || AMF) where f1 isa message authentication function.

An expected response XRES = f2K (RAND) where f2 is a (possibly truncated)message authentication function.

A cipher key CK = f3K (RAND) where f3 is a key generating function.

An integrity key IK = f4K (RAND) where f4 is a key generating function.

An anonymity key AK = f5K (RAND) where f5 is a key generating function.

AUTN and AVFinally the authentication token (AUTN = SQN ⊕ AK || AMF || MAC) and the authentication Vector(AV:=RAND||XRES||CK||IK||MAC) are constructed from the products of the algorithms.

Here, AK is an anonymity key used to conceal the sequence number as the latter may exposethe identity and location of the user. The concealment of the sequence number is to protectagainst passive attacks only. If no concealment is needed then f5 ≡ 0 (AK = 0).


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Generation of Authentication Vectors/Tokens Version 1 Rev 0

Generation of Authentication Vectors/Tokens

Generate SQN

Generate RAND

f1

AMF

SQN RAND

K

AUTN := SQN ⊕ AK || AMF || MAC

AV := RAND || XRES || CK || IK || AUTN

MAC XRES CK IK AK

f2 f3 f4 f5


3-27

Version 1 Rev 0 USIM Authentication Function

USIM Authentication FunctionThe VLR/SGSN invokes the procedure by selecting the next unused authentication vectorfrom the ordered array of authentication vectors in the VLR/SGSN database. The VLR/SGSNsends to the USIM the random challenge RAND and an Authentication Token AUTN fornetwork authentication from the selected authentication vector.

Upon receipt the user proceeds as shown in the diagram opposite.

Retrieval of SQNUpon receipt of RAND and AUTN the USIM first computes the anonymity key AK = f5K (RAND)and retrieves the sequence number SQN = (SQN ⊕ AK) ⊕ AK.

Computation of X-MACNext the USIM computes XMAC = f1K (SQN || RAND || AMF) and compares this with MAC which isincluded in AUTN. If they are different, the user sends user authentication reject back to the VLR/SGSNwith an indication of the cause and the user abandons the procedure. In this case, VLR/SGSNshall initiate an Authentication Failure Report procedure towards the HLR. VLR/SGSN may alsodecide to initiate a new identification and authentication procedure towards the user.

Verification of SQNNext the USIM verifies that the received sequence number SQN is in the correct range.

If the USIM considers the sequence number to be not in the correct range, it sends synchronisationfailure back to the VLR/SGSN including an appropriate parameter, and abandons the procedure.

If the sequence number is considered to be in the correct range however, the USIM computes RES =f2K (RAND) and includes this parameter in a user authentication response back to the VLR/SGSN.

Computation of CK and IKFinally the USIM computes the cipher key CK = f3K (RAND) and the integrity key IK = f4K (RAND).USIM shall store original CK, IK until the next successful execution of AKA.

User Authentication ResponseUpon receipt of user authentication response the VLR/SGSN compares RES with the expectedresponse XRES from the selected authentication vector. If XRES equals RES then theauthentication of the user has passed. The VLR/SGSN also selects the appropriate cipherkey CK and integrity key IK from the selected authentication vector.

If XRES and RES are different, VLR/SGSN shall initiate an Authentication Failure Reportprocedure towards the. VLR/SGSN may also decide to initiate a new identificationand authentication procedure towards the user.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

USIM Authentication Function Version 1 Rev 0

USIM Authentication Function

f1

SQN ⊕ AK

RAND

K

Verify MAC = XMAC

Verify that SQN is in the correct range

XMAC RES CK IK

AK

f2 f3 f4

f5

AUTN

⊕

SQN

AMF MAC

(USIM)


3-29

Version 1 Rev 0 Access Link Data Integrity

Access Link Data IntegrityMost control signalling information elements that are sent between the UEand the network areconsidered sensitive and must be integrity protected. A message authentication function shall beapplied on these signalling information elements transmitted between the UE and the RNC.

Data integrity protection methodThe diagram opposite illustrates the use of the integrity algorithm f9 to authenticate the dataintegrity of a signalling message. Based on the input parameters the user computes messageauthentication code for data integrity MAC-I using the integrity algorithm f9. The MAC-I is thenappended to the message when sent over the radio access link. The receiver computes XMAC-Ion the message received in the same way as the sender computed MAC-I on the message sentand verifies the data integrity of the message by comparing it to the received MAC-I.

Input parameters to the integrity algorithm

COUNT-I

The integrity sequence number COUNT-I is 32 bits long. There is one COUNT-I value per logicalsignalling channel. COUNT-I is derived from a count of the number of RRC SDUs send/received.

IK

The integrity key IK is 128 bits long. There may be one IK for CS connections (IKCS)and one IK for PS connections (IKPS). IK is established during UMTS AKA as theoutput of the integrity key derivation function f4.

FRESH

The network-side generated FRESH message is 32 bits long. There is one FRESH parametervalue per user. The input parameter FRESH protects the network against replay of signallingmessages by the user. At connection set-up the RNC generates a random value FRESH andsends it to the user in the (RRC) security mode command. The value FRESH is subsequentlyused by both the network and the user throughout the duration of a single connection. Thismechanism assures the network that the user is not replaying any old MAC-Is.

DIRECTION

The direction identifier DIRECTION is 1 bit long. The direction identifier is input to avoid theuse of identical set of input parameter values up-link and down-link messages. The value of theDIRECTION is 0 for messages from UE to RNC and 1 for messages from RNC to UE.

MESSAGE

The signalling message itself with the radio bearer identity. The latter is appended in frontof the message. Note that the radio bearer identity is not transmitted with the messagebut it is needed to avoid the circumstance where for different instances of messageauthentication codes the same set of input parameters is used.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Access Link Data Integrity Version 1 Rev 0

Access Link Data Integrity

COUNT-I

MESSAGE

DIRECTION

FRESH

f9

MAC-I

SenderUE or RNC

COUNT-I

MESSAGE

DIRECTION

FRESH

f9

XMAC-I

ReceiverRNC or UE

IK IK


3-31

Version 1 Rev 0 Ciphering of User/Signalling Data

Ciphering of User/Signalling DataUser data and some signalling information elements are considered sensitive and must be confidentialityprotected. To ensure identity confidentiality the temporary user identity (P-)TMSI must be transferred ina protected mode at allocation time and at other times when the signalling procedures permit it.

These needs for a protected mode of transmission are fulfilled by a confidentiality functionwhich is applied on dedicated channels between the UE and the RNC.

The diagram opposite illustrates the use of the ciphering algorithm f8 to encrypt plaintext byapplying a keystream using a bit per bit binary addition of the plaintext and the ciphertext.The plaintext may be recovered by generating the same keystream using the same inputparameters and applying a bit per bit binary addition with the ciphertext.

Input parameters to the cipher algorithm

COUNT-C

The integrity sequence number COUNT-C is 32 bits long. There is one COUNT-C value per logicalsignalling channel. COUNT-C is derived from a count of the number of RLC/MAC SDUs send/received.

CK

The Cipher key CK is 128 bits long. There may be one CK for CS connections (CKCS)and one CK for PS connections (CKPS). CK is established during UMTS AKA as theoutput of the integrity key derivation function f3.

BEARER

The radio bearer identifier BEARER is 5 bits long.

There is one BEARER parameter per radio bearer associated with the same user and multiplexedon a single 10ms physical layer frame. The radio bearer identifier is input to avoid the conditionwhere for different keystream an identical set of input parameter values is used.

DIRECTION

The direction identifier DIRECTION is 1 bit long. The direction identifier is input to avoid theuse of identical set of input parameter values up-link and down-link messages. The value of theDIRECTION is 0 for messages from UE to RNC and 1 for messages from RNC to UE.

LENGTH

The length indicator LENGTH is 16 bits long. The length indicator determines thelength of the required keystream block. LENGTH shall affect only the length of theKEYSTREAM BLOCK, not the actual bits in it.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Ciphering of User/Signalling Data Version 1 Rev 0

Ciphering of User/Signalling Data

SenderUE or RNC

ReceiverRNC or UE

COUNT-C

BEARER

DIRECTION

LENGTH

f8CK

COUNT-C

BEARER

DIRECTION

LENGTH

f8CK

KEYSTREAMBLOCK

⊕PLAINTEXTBLOCK

KEYSTREAMBLOCK

⊕CYPHERTEXTBLOCK


3-33

Version 1 Rev 0 Ciphering of User/Signalling Data



©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

UMTS Protocols Version 1 Rev 0

Chapter 4

UMTS Protocols


4-1

Version 1 Rev 0 UMTS Protocols



©MOTOROLA LTD.2002



• Describe the General Protocol Model for UMTS.• Describe the Interface specific protocol structure for the following interfaces:

◦ lu CS

◦ lu PS

◦ lu b

◦ lu r

• Describe the Radio Interface Protocol Architecture• Describe the functions and service provided by the following Radio Interface Protocols:

◦ Medium Access Control (MAC)

◦ Radio Link Control (RLC)

◦ Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP)

◦ Broadcast Multicast (BMC)

◦ Radio Resource Control (RRC)

• Describe selected end-to-end protocol stacks


4-3

Version 1 Rev 0 Introduction to UMTS Protocols

Introduction to UMTS ProtocolsAs has been outlined in previous chapters, one of the underlying principles in the design anddevelopment of UMTS is to prepare a universal infrastructure able to carry both existing and futureservices. All design work should be such that technological and evolution changes in one part of thenetwork should have no (or at least minimal impact) on other network components or services.

From a protocol perspective, this is acheived by confining , as far as is reasonably practicable,protocol functions and services within one or several physical domains. To this end, the3G protocol architecture can be divided into two strata.

• Access Stratum• Non-Access Stratum

Access StratumThe Access Stratum (AS) is a functional entity that encompasses radio protocols betweenthe UE and the UTRAN and, terrestrial interface (Iu) protocols between the UTRAN and theCore Network (CN). These protocols all terminate within the UTRAN.

Non-Access StratumThe Non-access Stratum (NAS) includes CN protocols that form a direct connectionbetween the UE and the CN itself. The NAS is transparent to the UTRAN and thusthese protocols do not terminate in the UTRAN.

The NAS protocols encompass functions such as; Mobility Management (MM), Call Control(CC), Short Message Services (SMS) and Suplementary Services (SS) associated withthe circuit switched CN and, GPRS Mobility Management (GMM), Session Managment(SM) and GPRS SMS assocoiated with the packet switched CN.

The NAS tries to remain independent of the underlying radio technology. Thus the NAS protocols canremain unchanged regardless of the Radio Access Network (RAN) that carries them.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Introduction to UMTS Protocols Version 1 Rev 0

Introduction to UMTS ProtocolsUMTS Protocol Architecture

CoreNetworkProtocols

CoreNetworkProtocols

RadioProtocols

RadioProtocols

IuProtocols

IuProtocols

Access Stratum

Non-Access Stratum

UE UTRAN Core Network

Uu-Interface Iu-Interface


4-5

Version 1 Rev 0 General Protocol Model

General Protocol ModelThe protocols in the UTRAN are designed according to a set protocol model. The structureconsists of Layers (Horizontal) and Planes (Vertical). All these entities are independent of eachother and can be changed at any time. It is also important to note that these protocol stacks arenot developed for specific entities e.g. RNC or Node-B etc, but rather for the interfaces betweenthese different entities. Let’s have a closer look at the Layers and Planes.

Horizontal LayersThe General protocol stack only consists of two layers, the Transport Network Layer and the RadioNetwork Layer. From the bottom, the Physical layer (Part of the Transport Network Layer) will providethe physical medium for transmission. Above the Physical layer is the Transport layer (Part of theTransport Network Layer) which contains the transport protocols. These protocols are not definedwithin the UMTS specifications. The Transport Network Protocol proposed for UMTS is ATM. The toplayer is called the Radio Network layer, this is the layer responsible for all UTRAN related tasks. Thetasks performed on Radio Network Layer are transparent to Transport Network Layer.

Vertical Planes

Control Plane

The Control plane only exists on L3 of the Horizontal planes and is responsible for all UMTS specificsignalling. The protocols used for the control plane are the RANAP protocol for the Iu interface,the RNSAP protocol for the Iur interface and the NBAP protocol for the Iub interface. These are alltermed Application protocols and will be used for tasks like setting up bearers to the UE. Operation& Maintenance actions will always set up the signalling Bearers for the Application protocol.

User Plane

This plane is being used for transfer of all kinds of information e.g. multimedia, e-mail, speech etc.The User Plane consists of the Data Stream that will be transported on the Data Bearer. Eachdata stream is identified and characterised by one or more frame protocols.

Transport Network Control Plane

This plane is used for all signalling that must be transferred in the Transport Layer and does notinclude any Radio Network Layer information. The protocol used for the Control Plane is calledAccess Link Control Application Protocol (ALCAP). This protocol will handle the setting up ofData Bearers for the User Plane of the Transport layer. The introduction of the ALCAP protocolmade it possible for the Application Protocols to run with complete independence of the databearing technology. It should be noted that we shall not use the ALCAP protocol in the settingup of the Signalling Bearers for the Application Protocols or for ALCAP.

Transport Network User Plane

Both the Signalling Bearer (for Application Protocol) in the Control Plane and the Data Bearer in the UserPlane belong to the Transport Network Layer. The Data bearers in the Transport Network User Planeare directly controlled by the Transport Network Control Plane during real time operations. The control ofthe Signalling Bearer(s) for Application Protocol are considered Operations and Maintenance functions.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

General Protocol Model Version 1 Rev 0

General Protocol Model

Radio Network

Layer

Transport Network

Layer

Control Plane

Application Protocol

Signalling Bearer(s)


ALCAP(S)

Signalling Bearer(s)

User Plane

Data Stream(s)

Data Bearer(s)

Physical Layer




4-7

Version 1 Rev 0 IuCS Protocol Structure

IuCS Protocol StructureAs can be seen form the IuCS protocol stack, it resembles the UMTS Protocol Model very closely andso it will be the case for all other Interfaces. Two different layers can be detected, the Transport NetworkLayer and the Radio Network Layer. The Physical layer in the Transport Network Layer consist of normalOSI L1 specified protocols like E1, STM, Fibre Optic or even Microwave. On OSI L2 is the ATM protocol,one thing to note is that the first two layers will form a common bearer for all three planes above.

Control Plane Protocol StackThe Protocol used on the radio Network Layer is called Radio Access NetworkApplication Part (RANAP). This protocol will run on top of Broadband SS7 protocols.The function of this protocol includes the following:

• SRNS relocation and Hard Handover procedures• Radio Access Bearer (RAB) Management. (Set-up, Maintenance and Clearing)• Reporting of unsuccessful data transfer for Charging Applications• Common ID Management• Paging of the UEs• Transparent UE to CN transfers.• Security Mode Control with integrity checking.• Overload Management.• Management of reset procedures.• Location Management and Reporting.

On the Transport Network Layer the following protocols can be seen:

SCCP Signalling Connection Control Part

MTP3-b Message Transfer Part - Broadband

SAAL-NNI Signalling ATM Adaptation Layer for Network to Network Interfaces

SSCF Service Specific Co-ordination functions

SSCOP Service Specific Connection Orientated Protocol

AAL5 ATM Adaptation Layer 5

Transport Network Control Plane Protocol StackThe Transport Network Protocol Stack consists of Signalling protocols for setting up of the AAL2Connections in the User Plane. Again broadband SS7 signalling protocols are being used.

User Plane Protocol StackThis is a very simple combination of protocols with the User plane being directly on top ofAAL2, which is responsible for segmenting the data to ATM cells. Note that a dedicatedAAL2 connection will be reserved for each user’s CS service.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

IuCS Protocol Structure Version 1 Rev 0

IuCS Protocol Structure

Radio Network

Layer

Transport Network

Layer

Control Plane

RANAP


AAL5

User Plane

Iu UP Protocol Layer

Physical Layer

SCCP

MTP3b

SSCF-NNI

SSCOP

ATM

AAL5

SSCF-NNI

MTP3b

Q.2150.2

SSCOP

Q.2630.1

AAL2




4-9

Version 1 Rev 0 IuPS Protocol Structure

IuPS Protocol StructureAgain, two different layers can be detected, the Transport Network Layer and the RadioNetwork Layer. The Physical layer in the Transport Network Layer consist of normal OSI L1specified protocols like E1, STM, Fibre Optic or even Microwave.

Control Plane Protocol StackThe Protocol used on the Radio Network Layer is again RANAP and the functionsare the same then for the IuCS.

The broadband SS7 part of the Transport Network will stay the same. We will however, have additionalprotocols that could be used. These are the IP based signalling bearer for packet switched information.

M3UA SS7 and MTP3b User Adaptation Layer

SCTP Stream Control Transmission Protocol (Designed for signalling transport in theInternet)

IP Internet Protocol

Transport Network Control Plane Protocol StackThis Plane is not applied to the IuPS.

User Plane Protocol StackNormal GPRS Tunnelling Protocol (GTP) tunnelling will be used over User Datagram Protocol (UDP)which is a connectionless protocol. Multiple packets and flows will be multiplexed on one or more AAL.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

IuPS Protocol Structure Version 1 Rev 0

IuPS Protocol StructureIuPS Protocol Stack

Radio Network

Layer

Transport Network

Layer

Control Plane

RANAP


AAL5

User Plane

Iu UP Protocol Layer

SSCOP

AAL5



Physical Layer

ATM

Physical Layer

IP

UDP

GTP-U

SSCF-NNI

ATM

IP

M3UA

SCCP

MTP3b

SCTP


4-11

Version 1 Rev 0 Iub Protocol Structure

Iub Protocol StructureAs with the Iu interface, two different layers can be detected, the Transport Network Layer and theRadio Network Layer. The Physical layer in the Transport Network Layer consist of normal OSI L1specified protocols like E1, STM, Fibre Optic or even Microwave. On OSI L2 is the ATM protocol, onething to note is that the first two OSI layers will form a common bearer for all three planes above.

Control Plane Protocol StackThe Protocol used on the Radio Network Layer is called NBAP. This protocol is in turn dividedinto the Common NBAP (C-NBAP) and Dedicated NBAP (D-NBAP). The C-NBAP definesall common procedures carried out like Operations & Maintenance task through channels likeRandom Access Channel (RACH) and Paging Channel (PCH).

The main functions of C-NBAP are:

• Setting up of the Radio Link to the UE• Selection of the Traffic Termination Point• Cell Configuration• Fault management• Handling of the Common Transport Channels• Reporting and Initialization of Node-B and/or Cell specific measurements

The main functions of D-NBAP are:

• Set-up, release and reconfiguration of radio links for the UE Context• Softer Combining Management• Compressed Mode Control• Dedicated and Shared Channel Management• Reporting and Initialisation of Radio Link specific measurement• Downlink Power Drifting Correction• Radio link Fault Management

Transport Network Control Plane Protocol StackAgain the usage of broadband SS7 signalling can be seen.

User Plane Protocol StackThe User Plane Protocol Stack consists of all the Control and User frame protocols beingused in order to pass the information on to the Node-B and then finally the UE. Three basictype of transmissions are defined. Transparent, Unacknowledged or Acknowledged. Thelower layers is a simple combination of protocols with the User plane being directly on top ofAAL2 which is responsible for segmenting the data to ATM cells.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Iub Protocol Structure Version 1 Rev 0

Iub Protocol StructureIub Protocol Stack

Radio Network

Layer

Transport Network

Layer

Radio Network Control Plane

NBAP


AAL5

User Plane

Physical Layer

SSCF-UNI

SSCOP

ATM

AAL5

SSCF-UNI

Q.2150.2

Q.2630.1

SSCOP

AAL2D

CH

FP

RA

CH

FP

FAC

H F

PP

CH

FP


4-13

Version 1 Rev 0 Iur Protocol Structure

Iur Protocol StructureThe Iur was originally developed to support Soft Handovers, but has since been changed tohave 4 main distinct functions that will be discussed in this section. Again two different layerscan be detected, the Transport Network Layer and the Radio Network Layer. The Physicallayer in the Transport Network Layer consist of normal OSI L1 specified protocols like E1, STM,Fibre Optic or even Microwave. On OSI L2 is the ATM protocol, one thing to note is that thefirst two layers will form a common bearer for all three planes above.

Control Plane Protocol StackThe Protocol used on the Radio Network Layer is called RNSAP, this protocol could run on broadbandSS7 protocols or IP based signalling. The 4 main functions of this protocol include the following:

• Support for basic Inter RNC Mobility• Support for Dedicated Channel Traffic• Support for Common Channel Traffic• Support of Global Resource Management

Transport Network Control Plane Protocol StackThe Transport Network Protocol Stack is more complex than any other interface. This is mainlydue to four different uses as specified above. Signalling and Data will be carried between differentNode-B’s on either broadband SS7 Interfaces or IP based Interfaces.

User Plane Protocol StackThis is a very simple combination of protocols with the User plane being directly on top ofAAL2, which is responsible for segmenting the data to ATM cells.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Iur Protocol Structure Version 1 Rev 0

Iur Protocol StructureIur Protocol Stack

Radio Network

Layer

Transport Network

Layer

Control Plane

RNSAP


User Plane

DCHFP

AAL2


ATM

Physical Layer

AAL5

M3UA

SCCP

MTP3b

SSCF-NNI SCTP

SSCOP IP

AAL5

Q.2150.1

M3UAMTP3b

SSCF-NNI SCTP

SSCOP IP

CCHFP

Q.2630.1



4-15

Version 1 Rev 0 Radio Interface Protocol Architecture

Radio Interface Protocol ArchitectureThe radio interface is layered into three protocol layers:

• The physical layer (L1);• The data link layer (L2);• The network layer (L3).

Layer 1 provides the Physical layer service between the UTRAN and the UEand is described in detail in later chapters

Layer 2 is split into following sublayers: Medium Access Control (MAC), Radio Link Control (RLC),Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) and Broadcast/Multicast Control (BMC).

Layer 3 and RLC are divided into Control (C-) and User (U-) planes. PDCPand BMC exist in the U-plane only.

In the C-plane, Layer 3 is partitioned into sublayers where the lowest sublayer, denoted as RadioResource Control (RRC), interfaces with layer 2 and terminates in the UTRAN. The next sublayerprovides ’Duplication avoidance’. It terminates in the CN but is part of the Access Stratum; itprovides the Access Stratum Services to higher layers. The higher layer signalling such as MobilityManagement (MM) and Call Control (CC) are assumed to belong to the non-access stratum.

The diagram opposite shows the radio interface protocol architecture. Each block in represents aninstance of the respective protocol. Service Access Points (SAP) for peer-to-peer communicationare marked with circles at the interface. The SAP between MAC and the physical layer provides thetransport channels. The SAPs between RLC and the MAC sublayer provide the logical channels. Inthe C-plane, the interface between ’Duplication avoidance’ and higher L3 sublayers (CC, MM) isdefined by the General Control (GC), Notification (Nt) and Dedicated Control (DC) SAPs.

Also shown in the figure are connections between RRC and MAC as well as RRC and L1 providinglocal inter-layer control services. An equivalent control interface exists between RRC and the RLCsublayer, between RRC and the PDCP sublayer and between RRC and BMC sublayer. Theseinterfaces allow the RRC to control the configuration of the lower layers. For this purpose separateControl SAPs are defined between RRC and each lower layer (PDCP, RLC, MAC, and L1).


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Radio Interface Protocol Architecture Version 1 Rev 0

Radio Interface Protocol Architecture

L3

L2/PDCP

L2/BMC

L2/RLC

L2/MAC

L1PHY

PDCP

PDCP

RLC

BMC

RRC

RLC

MAC

RLC

RLC

RLC

RLC

RLC

RLC

cont

rol

cont

rol

cont

rol

control

LogicalChannels

TransportChannels

cont

rol

Duplication avoidance

GC Nt DCC-plane signalling U-plane information

GC Nt DC

UuS boundary


4-17

Version 1 Rev 0 RRC Functions

RRC FunctionsThe Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer handles the control plane signaling of Layer 3between the UEs and UTRAN. The RRC performs the following functions:

Broadcast of information provided by the non-access stratum (Core Network)The RRC layer performs system information broadcasting from the network to all UEs. The systeminformation is normally repeated on a regular basis. The RRC layer performs the scheduling,segmentation and repetition. This function supports broadcast of higher layer (above RRC)information. This information may be cell specific or not. As an example RRC may broadcastCore Network location service area information related to some specific cells.

Broadcast of information related to the access stratumThe RRC layer performs system information broadcasting from the network to all UEs. The systeminformation is normally repeated on a regular basis. The RRC layer performs the scheduling,segmentation and repetition. This function supports broadcast of typically cell-specific information.

Establishment, re-establishment, maintenance and release of an RRC connectionbetween the UE and UTRAN

The establishment of an RRC connection is initiated by a request from higher layers at the UE side toestablish the first Signalling Connection for the UE. The establishment of an RRC connection includesan optional cell re-selection, an admission control, and a layer 2 signalling link establishment. AnRRC Connection Request message from the UE with an Establishment Cause of Emergency Call issupported. If no resources are available, other users will be removed to allow the emergency call tobe processed. The release of an RRC connection can be initiated by a request from higher layers torelease the last signalling connection for the UE or by the RRC layer itself in case of RRC connectionfailure. In case of connection loss, the UE requests re-establishment of the RRC connection. In case ofRRC connection failure, RRC releases resources associated with the RRC connection.

Establishment, reconfiguration and release of Radio BearersThe RRC layer can, on request from higher layers, perform the establishment, reconfigurationand release of Radio Bearers in the user plane. A number of Radio Bearers can beestablished to an UE at the same time. At establishment and reconfiguration, the RRC layerperforms admission control and selects parameters describing the Radio Bearer processingin layer 2 and layer 1, based on information from higher layers.

Assignment, reconfiguration and release of radio resources for the RRC connectionThe RRC layer handles the assignment of radio resources (e.g. codes, CPCH channels) needed for theRRC connection including needs from both the control and user plane. The RRC layer may reconfigureradio resources during an established RRC connection. This function includes coordination of theradio resource allocation between multiple radio bearers related to the same RRC connection. RRCcontrols the radio resources in the uplink and downlink such that UE and UTRAN can communicateusing unbalanced radio resources (asymmetric uplink and downlink). RRC signals to the UE toindicate resource allocations for purposes of handover to GSM or other radio systems.

RRC connection mobility functionsThe RRC layer performs evaluation, decision and execution related to RRC connection mobility duringan established RRC connection, such as handover, preparation of handover to GSM or other systems,cell re-selection and cell/paging area update procedures, based on e.g. measurements done by the UE.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

RRC Functions Version 1 Rev 0

RRC Functions• Broadcast of information related to the non-access stratum(Core Network)• Broadcast of information related to the access stratum• Establishment, maintenance and release of an RRCconnection between the UE and UTRAN• Establishment, reconfiguration and release of Radio Bearers• Assignment, reconfiguration and release of radio resourcesfor the RRC connection• RRC connection mobility functions• Control of requested QoS• UE measurement reporting and control of the reporting• Outer loop power control• Control of ciphering• Slow Dynamic Channel Allocation (TDD mode)• Paging• Initial cell selection and cell re-selection• Arbitration of radio resources on uplink DCH• RRC message integrity protection• Timing advance (TDD mode)• CBS control.


4-19


RRC Functions

Paging/notificationThe RRC layer can broadcast paging information from the network to selected UEs. Higherlayers on the network side can request paging and notification. The RRC layer can alsoinitiate paging during an established RRC connection.

Routing of higher layer PDUsThis function performs at the UE side routing of higher layer PDUs to the correct higherlayer entity, at the UTRAN side to the correct RANAP entity.

Control of requested QoSThis function shall ensure that the QoS requested for the Radio Bearers can be met. Thisincludes the allocation of a sufficient number of radio resources.

UE measurement reporting and control of the reportingThe measurements performed by the UE are controlled by the RRC layer, in terms of what to measure,when to measure and how to report, including both UMTS air interface and other systems. TheRRC layer also performs the reporting of the measurements from the UE to the network.

Outer loop power controlThe RRC layer controls setting of the target of the closed loop power control.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


RRC Functions• Broadcast of information related to the non-access stratum(Core Network)• Broadcast of information related to the access stratum• Establishment, maintenance and release of an RRCconnection between the UE and UTRAN• Establishment, reconfiguration and release of Radio Bearers• Assignment, reconfiguration and release of radio resourcesfor the RRC connection• RRC connection mobility functions• Control of requested QoS• UE measurement reporting and control of the reporting• Outer loop power control• Control of ciphering• Slow Dynamic Channel Allocation (TDD mode)• Paging• Initial cell selection and cell re-selection• Arbitration of radio resources on uplink DCH• RRC message integrity protection• Timing advance (TDD mode)• CBS control.


4-21


RRC Functions

Control of cipheringThe RRC layer provides procedures for setting of ciphering (on/off) between the UE and UTRAN.

Arbitration of radio resources on uplink DCHThis function controls the allocation of radio resources on uplink DCH on a fast basis, usinga broadcast channel to send control information to all involved users.

Note: This function is implemented in the CRNC.

Initial cell selection and re-selection in idle modeSelection of the most suitable cell based on idle mode measurements and cell selection criteria.

Integrity protectionThis function adds a Message Authentication Code (MAC-I) to those RRC messages thatare considered sensitive and/or contain sensitive information.

Allocation of radio resources for CBSThis function allocates radio resources for CBS based on traffic volume requirements indicatedby BMC. The radio resource allocation set by RRC (i.e. the schedule for mapping of CTCHonto FACH/S-CCPCH) is indicated to BMC to enable generation of schedule messages. Theresource allocation for CBS shall be broadcast as system information.

Configuration for CBS discontinuous receptionThis function configures the lower layers (L1, L2) of the UE when it shall listen to the resourcesallocated for CBS based on scheduling information received from BMC.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


RRC Functions• Broadcast of information related to the non-access stratum(Core Network)• Broadcast of information related to the access stratum• Establishment, maintenance and release of an RRCconnection between the UE and UTRAN• Establishment, reconfiguration and release of Radio Bearers• Assignment, reconfiguration and release of radio resourcesfor the RRC connection• RRC connection mobility functions• Control of requested QoS• UE measurement reporting and control of the reporting• Outer loop power control• Control of ciphering• Slow Dynamic Channel Allocation (TDD mode)• Paging• Initial cell selection and cell re-selection;• Arbitration of radio resources on uplink DCH• RRC message integrity protection• Timing advance (TDD mode)• CBS control.


4-23

Version 1 Rev 0 RLC Protocol

RLC ProtocolThe Radio Link Control (RLC) protocol provides segmentation and retransmissionservices for both user and control data

The diagram opposite gives an overview model of the RLC layer. The figure illustrates the differentRLC peer entities. Each RLC instance is configured by RRC to operate in one of three modes

• Transparent Mode (Tr)• Unacknowledged Mode (UM)• Acknowledged Mode (AM)

The mode to be used is determined by the SAP into which the higher layer deliver their PDUs.The mode chosen indicates which services and functions are to be applied and what (if any)response will be passed to higher level protocols regarding error detection.

For all RLC modes, CRC error detection is performed by the physical layer and the result ofthe CRC check is delivered to RLC together with the actual data.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

RLC Protocol Version 1 Rev 0

RLC ProtocolRLC Protocol Model

C

Tr-SAP UM-SAP AM-SAP UM-SAP Tr-SAP

AM-EntityTransmitTr-Entity

TransmitUM-Entity

ReceiveTr-Entity

ReceiveUM-Entity

Transmitting Side Receiving Side


4-25

Version 1 Rev 0 MAC Layer Functions

MAC Layer Functions

Mapping between logical and Transport channelsThe MAC layer performs cross mapping of information between logical channels (to/from higherlevel protocols) and the appropriate transport channel, according to the type of information to betransferred. Logical and transport channel types are covered in more detail in a later chapter.

Transport format selectionMAC will select the most appropriate Transport format (from the transport format combinationset) for each transport channel, depending upon the instantaneous source rate.

MAC Multiplexing AlgorithmThe MAC multiplexing algorithm schedules transport channel resources based ontraffic priorities of different UEs and data flows and the RANAP RAB parameter “TrafficHandling Priority” is used to map the priorities.

Dynamic SchedulingUnder certain circumstances UEs may use common or shared transport channels toreceive data in the downlink. Use of these shared resources is dynamically scheduledby the MAC-sh layer according the UEs QoS requirements.

Identification of UEs on Common ChannelsWhen a common transport channel carries data from dedicated-type logical channels,the MAC-sh will identify the source or destination UE by including a Radio NetworkTemporary Identifier (RNTI) in the MAC header.

MUX/DEMUX of PDUs into Transport BlocksMAC handles the service multiplexing for both common and dedicated transport channels.However, it should be noted that MAC multiplexing of dedicated channels can only be performedfor services with the same QoS parameters, while physical layer multiplexing makes it possibleto multiplex any type of service, including those with different QoS parameters.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

MAC Layer Functions Version 1 Rev 0

MAC Layer Functions• Mapping of Logical Channels to transport Channels• Transport Format Selection• MAC Multiplexing Algorithm• Priority Handling of Handling Between UEs by DynamicScheduling• Identification of UEs on Common Channels• MUX/DEMUX of Higher Layer PDUs Into/ Transport Blocks• Traffic Volume Monitoring• Dynamic Transport Channel Switching• Ciphering (Transport RLC Mode Only)• Access Service Class Selection


4-27

Version 1 Rev 0 MAC Layer Functions

MAC Layer Functions

Traffic Volume MonitoringMAC receives RLC PDUs together with status information on the amount of data in the RLC buffer.MAC compares the amount of status corresponding to a transport channel with the thresholds set byRRC. If the amount of data is too high or too low, MAC sends a traffic volume status measurement toRRC. RRC uses these reports to trigger reconfiguration of the Radio Bearers/Transport channels.

Dynamic Transport Channel Type SwitchingBased upon a switching decision received from RRC, MAC is able to execute switching ofdata flows between common and dedicated transport channels.

CipheringThe MAC-D entity performs ciphering if a logical channel is using transparent RLC mode. Ciphering isan XOR function where data is XOR’d with a ciphering mask produced by a ciphering algorithm.

Access Service Class SelectionUEs are allocated to one of eight Access Service Classes, to provide different priorities for serviceresources. MAC indicates the ASC associated with a PDU received from the physical layer.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

MAC Layer Functions Version 1 Rev 0

MAC Layer Functions• Mapping of Logical Channels to transport Channels• Transport Format Selection• Priority Handling of Data Flows of one UE• Priority Handling of Handling Between UEs by DynamicScheduling• Identification of UEs on Common Channels• MUX/DEMUX of Higher Layer PDUs Into/ Transport Blocks• Traffic Volume Monitoring• Dynamic Transport Channel Switching• Ciphering (Transport RLC Mode Only)• Access Service Class Selection


4-29

Version 1 Rev 0 Protocol Stacks

Protocol StacksThe following pages construct the protocol stacks for each UMTS network entity. The exact protocolstructure is dependent upon which Core Network domain (CS or PS) is providing the BearerService, and whether the information transfer is user plane or control plane.

User Plane Protocol Stack (Dedicated Channels CS-Domain)The diagram opposite shows the User plane protocol stack for user plane data transfer, using dedicatedchannels via the CN-PS. The user CS payload will be received at the MSC from the external network(e.g. the PSTN). The protocols used to transfer the Payload across this interface may vary and are notdescribed in this course. AAL, ATM and physical layers will be described in detail in later chapters.

Iu UP Frame Protocol

The Iu UP protocol is located in the User plane of the Radio Network layer over the Iu interfaceand is used to convey user data associated to Radio Access Bearers (RABs) . One Iu UPprotocol instance is uniquely associated to each RAB. If several RABs are established towardsone given UE, then these RABs make use of several Iu UP protocol instances. These Iu UPinstances are established, relocated and released together with the Associated RAB.

The Iu UP Protocol is defined with modes of operation, which can be activated on a RAB basis ratherthan on A CN domain or service basis. This makes the protocol independent of the CN domain andto have limited or no dependency with the Transport Network Layer. This provides the flexibilityto evolve services regardless of the CN domain. The Iu UP mode of operation determines if andwhich set of features shall be provided. Currently two mode of operation are defined:

• Transparent Mode (TrM)• Support modes

TrM is intended for those RAB that do not require any particular feature from the Iu UP protocol otherthan transfer of user data. In this mode the Iu UP protocol does not perform any peer-to-peer informationtransfer over the Iu interface. The Iu UP protocol layer is crossed though by PDUs being exchangedbetween upper layers and the transport network layer, no Iu UP overhead is added to the payload.

The support modes are intended for those RABs that do require particular features from the Iu UPprotocol in addition to transfer of user data. When operating in support mode, the peer Iu UP protocolinstances exchange Iu UP frames, adding overhead to the payload. The Iu UP Support mode is preparedto support variations. However, the only support mode currently defined in 3GPP specifications; namelySupport Mode for Predefined SDU size (SMpSDU), and provides the following functions.

• Transfer of user data;• Initialisation• Rate Control• Time Alignment• Handling of Error Events• Frame Quality Classification


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Protocol Stacks Version 1 Rev 0

Protocol StacksUser Plane Protocol Stack (Dedicated Channels CS-Domain)

lu-UP

RLC

CS Payload

CS Payload

Phys

AAL2

ATM

Phys

RLC

MAC-d

Split/ Comb

Phys

Split/ Comb

Phys

DCH FP

AAL2

ATM

Phys

MAC-d

Split/ Select

DCH FP

AAL2

ATM

Phys

lu-UP

AAL2

ATM

Phys Phys

UE Node B SRNC MSC PSTN


4-31

Version 1 Rev 0 Protocol Stacks

Protocol Stacks

Dedicated Channel Frame Protocol (DCH FP)User data is received at the SRNC, via the transport layer and Iu UP protocol and the passedto the Radio Interface Control protocols for RLC and MAC processing as appropriate. Theresultant Transport Blocks are delivered to the DCH FP.

DCH FP transfers DCH data frames every transmission time interval from the SRNC to the NodeB for downlink transfer and from Node B to the SRNC for uplink transfer. An optional errordetection mechanism may be used to protect the data transfer if needed. At the transport channelset-up it shall be specified if the error detection on the User data is used.

In addition to the transfer of user data, DCH FP provides the following services

• Transport of outer loop power control information between SRNC and Node B.• Support of transport channel synchronisation mechanism.• Support of Node Synchronisation method.• Transfer of DSCH TFI from SRNC to Node B.• Transfer of radio interface parameters from the SRNC to the Node B.

The specification of Iub DCH data streams is also valid for the Iur DCH data streams.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Protocol Stacks Version 1 Rev 0

Protocol StacksUser Plane Protocol Stack (DedicatedChannels CS-Domain)

lu-UP

RLC

CS Payload

CS Payload

Phys

AAL2

ATM

Phys

RLC

MAC-d

Split/ Comb

Phys

Split/ Comb

Phys

DCH FP

AAL2

ATM

Phys

MAC-d

Split/ Select

DCH FP

AAL2

ATM

Phys

lu-UP

AAL2

ATM

Phys Phys

UE Node B SRNC MSC PSTN


4-33

Version 1 Rev 0 Dedicated control services

Protocol Stacks

Control Plane Protocol Stack (UE-CN SIGNALLING, Dedicated Channels, CS-Domain& PS-Domain)

The diagram opposite illustrates the protocol stack for UE to CN signalling, when the UEis connected to the network and operating in dedicated mode.

RANAP Services

RANAP provides the signalling service between UTRAN and the CN that is required to fulfil the RANAPfunctions. RANAP services are divided into three groups based on Service Access Points.

General control services

General control services are related to the whole Iu interface instance between RNC andlogical CN domain, and are accessed in CN through the General Control SAP. They utiliseconnectionless signalling transport provided by the Iu signalling bearer.

Notification services

Notification services are related to specified UEs or all UEs in specified area, and areaccessed in CN through the Notification SAP. They utilise connectionless signallingtransport provided by the Iu signalling bearer.

Dedicated control services

Dedicated control services are related to one UE, and are accessed in CN through the DedicatedControl SAP. RANAP functions that provide these services are associated with Iu signallingconnection that is maintained for the UE in question. The Iu signalling connection is realised withconnection oriented signalling transport provided by the Iu signalling bearer.

SCCP

SCCP provides connectionless service, class 0, connection oriented service, class 2, separationof the connections mobile by mobile basis on the connection oriented link and establishmentof a connection oriented link on a mobile by mobile basis.

MTP3-B

MTP3-b provides message routing, discrimination and distribution (for point-to-point link only),signalling link management load sharing and changeover/back between link within one link-set.

SAAL-NNI

SAAL-NNI consists of the following sub-layers: - SSCF [3], - SSCOP [2] and - AAL5 [6]. The SSCF mapsthe requirements of the layer above to the requirements of SSCOP. Also SAAL connection management,link status and remote processor status mechanisms are provided. SSCOP provides mechanismsfor the establishment and release of connections and the reliable exchange of signalling informationbetween signalling entities. Adapts the upper layer protocol to the requirements of the Lower ATM cells.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Dedicated control services Version 1 Rev 0

Protocol StacksControl Plane Protocol Stack (UE-CN SIGNALLING, DedicatedChannels, CS-Domain & PS-Domain)

RRC

RLC

MAC-d

Combining

Phys

UE

Split/ Comb

Phys

DCH FP

AAL2

ATM

Phys

Node

RLC

MAC-d

Split/ Comb

DCH FP

AAL2

ATM

Phys

SRNC

RRC

RANAP

MS

RANAP

SCCP

MTP3-b

SAAL- NNI

ATM

Phys

SCCP

MTP3-b

SAAL- NNI

ATM

Phys


4-35

Version 1 Rev 0 Dedicated control services

Protocol Stacks

Control Plane Protocol Stack (UE-CN Signalling, Shared Channels, CS-Domain)The diagram opposite illustrates the protocol stack for UE to CN signalling, when the UE isconnected to the network and operating on shared or common channels. The stack differsfrom that of dedicated mode, in that the CRNC is no longer transparent.

This continues to provide the majority of the Layer 2 services (RRC, RLC, MAC-d), However,the CRNC is responsible for terminating the MAC-c/sh entity.

On the diagram, the MUX-1 box in the CRNC represents the multiplexing of the various AAL2connections coming from multiple SRNCs into MAC-c/sh. The MUX-2 box represents the multiplexing ofvarious instances of MAC-d from the same SRNC into AAL2, for transfer to the MAC-c/sh at the CRNC.

RACH/FACH Frame Protocol

RACH/FACH Frame Protocols (FPs) are responsible for the transfer of Transport Blocksbetween the Node B and the DRNC for common/shared channels. These FPs will alwaysadd overhead to the payload, in the form of a header.

In addition to providing a data transfer function, the common/shared FPs provide the following services:

• Support of transport channel synchronisation mechanism.• Support of Node synchronisation mechanism.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Dedicated control services Version 1 Rev 0

Protocol StacksControl Plane Protocol Stack (UE-CN Signalling, SharedChannels, CS-Domain)

MUX1

Phys

RACH/FACH

FP

AAL2

ATM

Phys

MAC-c/sh

AAL2

ATM

Phys

AAL2

ATM

Phys

UE Node B CRNC SRNC CN

RRC

RLC

MAC-d

RRC

RLC

MAC-d

SCCP

RANAP

MAC-c/sh

Phys

MUX2

AAL2

ATM

Phys

RANAP

SCCP

MTP3-b

SAAL-NNIATM

Phys

MTP3-b

SAAL-NNI

ATM

Phys

RACH/FACH

FP


4-37

Version 1 Rev 0 IP

Protocol Stacks

User Plane Protocol Stack (Dedicated Channels, PS-Domain)The diagram opposite shows the user plane protocol stack for user data transfer, usingdedicated channels via the CN-PS. The user CS payload will be received at the GGSN fromthe external network (e.g. the Internet). The protocols used to transfer the payload acrossthis interface may vary and are not described in this document.

GPRS Tunnelling Protocol, User Plane (GTP-U)

The user payload data packets, known as T-PDUs, arrive at the GGSN from the external PDN. Typicallythese will be IP based and addressed to an application running on the target UE. Alternate transportmechanisms, such as X25, may also be used. The T-PDUs will be presented to GTP, via the appropriateNSAPI for the source protocol. For UMTS the second version of GTP (version 1) will be used.

GTP allows multi-protocol packets to be tunnelled through the UMTS/GPRS Backbone betweenGSNs and is necessary to forward packets between an external packet data network and an MSuser. In the user plane, GTP uses a tunnelling mechanism (GTP-U) to provide a service for carryinguser data packets. The GTP-U protocol is implemented by SGSNs and GGSNs in the UMTS/GPRSBackbone and by Radio Network Controllers (RNCs) in the UTRAN. No other systems need to beaware of GTP. UMTS/GPRS UEs are connected to an SGSN without being aware of GTP.

A GTP tunnel in the GTP-U plane is defined for each PDP Context in the GSNs and/or eachRAB in the RNC. A GTP tunnel is identified in each node with a Tunnel Endpoint ID (TEID), aUDP port number and an IP address. The TEID unambiguously identifies a tunnel endpoint inthe receiving GTP-U protocol entity. The TEID values are negotiated and exchanged betweentunnel endpoints using control plane procedures defined in protocols such as GTP-C (or RANAP,over the Iu) messages during the activation of the PDP context or RAB.

Path Protocols

UDP/IP is the only path protocol defined to transfer GTP messages in the version 1 of GTP.

UDP

A User Datagram Protocol (UDP) compliant with STD 0006 shall be used. The UDPdestination port number for GTP-U messages is 2152.

IP

An Internet protocol compliant with STD 0005 shall be used. The IP destination addressin a GTP message shall be the IP address of the destination GSN/RNC. The sourceaddress shall be the IP address of the originating GSN/RNC.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

IP Version 1 Rev 0

Protocol StacksUser Plane Protocol Stack (DedicatedChannels, PS-Domain)

UE Node B SRNC SGSN PDNGGSN

AAP

Split/ Comb

DCH FP

PDCP

RLCGTP-U GTP-U GTP-U

IP IP

AAP

IP

PDCP

RLC

MAC-d

Comb

Phys Phys

AAL2

ATM

Phys

MAC-d

Split CombDCH

FP

AAL2

ATM

Phys

UDP

IP

AAL5

ATM

Phys

UDP

IP

AAL5

ATM

Phys

UDP

IP

L2

Phys

GTP-U

UDP

IP

L2

Phys Phys

IP

Phys


4-39

Version 1 Rev 0 IP



©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Data Flow and Terrestrial Interfaces Version 1 Rev 0

Chapter 5

Data Flow and Terrestrial Interfaces


5-1

Version 1 Rev 0 Data Flow and Terrestrial Interfaces



©MOTOROLA LTD.2002



• State the transport mechanisms used for the UMTS transport network.• Describe the basic principles of ATM.• Describe the use of PDH and SDH bearers for UMTS.


5-3

Version 1 Rev 0 Terrestrial Interfaces

Terrestrial InterfacesOne very important aspect that is sometimes overlooked is the transport medium requiredbetween the different entities. In the case of UMTS the Network Operator will run into problemsif the wrong links are utilised. Speed of transfer and cost will be two of the major determiningfactors when planning the UMTS network. Other issues that need to be addressed are thetypes of converting equipment used between the different types of terrestrial interfaces. Inthe following pages a closer look will be taken at these aspects.

It should also be mentioned that as data rates increase the use of E1/T1 systemsbecome more difficult. ATM is the preferred transport mechanism on the CN. Voice andIP over ATM is conducted using ATM adaptation layers.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Terrestrial Interfaces Version 1 Rev 0

Terrestrial Interfaces

UE Node B RNCSGSNMSC

GGSNGMSC

PS or CS Network

CDMA- FDDCDMA- TDD

ATME1

ATMSDH

IPPCM

IPX25PCM

Uu Iub Iu-PS Iu-CS

GnPSTN

Gi/GpPSTN


5-5

Version 1 Rev 0 ATM Principles

ATM PrinciplesATM is used to transfer different types of information with different rate factors over oneor more common link with a high bit rate. This properties makes ATM an extremely usefulsystem when it comes to wideband or broadband data transfer.

With the standards in place it is now possible for packet switching techniques like FrameRelay or ATM to deliver high quality speech. Some of the intrinsic advantages ATMhas over other network technologies are listed below:

• Considering data, voice, and video payload requirements, ATM was constructed. ATM cellsare of fixed size, 53 bytes each with 48 bytes for payload and 5 for ATM header. This helps inreducing the packetization delay significantly, which is one of the major delay parameters.

• It supports extensive Quality of Service (QoS) parameters, which allows voice traffic tobe transmitted across the network in a reliable jitter-free way.

• Various ATM Adaptation Layers (AALs) support various service classes capabilities.• ATM switches have always been designed with effective traffic management capabilities, for

example, call admission control, usage parameter control, traffic shaping, etc.• Single network for voice, data, and video.• Interworking with PSTN is relatively straightforward.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

ATM Principles Version 1 Rev 0

ATM PrinciplesFixed Bit Stream

Variable Bit Stream

DiscontinuesBit Stream


5-7

Version 1 Rev 0 Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM)

Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM)Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) is a technology originally designed for LANsthat have transport, switching and network management facilities built into it. Maximumdata rates for STM–1 and STM–4 respectively are:

• Primary User 155.2 Mb/s• Network Interface 622.08 Mb/s

In general terms ATM is a packet switching protocol made up of fixed lengthpackets. The standard packet length is 53 Octets, 5 being header information andthe remaining 48 user data, called the payload.

The fixed length cell gives some key advantages over variable length structures. The firstis that short cells can be switched quickly and economically. Secondly the queuing causedby long, variable length frames can be reduced to the wait time for a single 53 Octet frame,allowing time dependent voice and video to be transported.

ATM can provide both ABR, CBR, VBR, UBR and UBR+ transport. These are described below:

Constant Bit Rate (CBR), or Class A quality of service, is an ATM bandwidth-allocationservice that requires the user to determine a fixed bandwidth requirement at the time theconnection is set up so that the data can be sent in a steady stream. CBR service isoften used when transmitting fixed-rate uncompressed video.

Variable Bit Rate (VBR), or Class B quality of service, is an ATM bandwidth-allocationservice that allows users to specify a throughput capacity (i.e., a peak rate) and a sustainedrate but data is not sent evenly. VBR is often used when transmitting compressedpacketized voice and video data, such as videoconferencing.

Available Bit Rate (ABR), or Class C quality of service, is an ATM bandwidth-allocationservice that adjusts the amount of bandwidth based on the amount of traffic in the network.ABR service provides a guaranteed minimum bandwidth capacity but allows data to bebursted at higher capacities when the network is free.

Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR), or Class D quality of service, an ATM bandwidth-allocationservice that does not guarantee any throughput levels and uses only available bandwidth.UBR is often used when transmitting data that can tolerate delays.

Unspecified Bit Rate + (UBR+), is a best-efforts delivery service, but with a minimum cellrate (MCR) that allows you to choose a guaranteed delivery level. Of course, if there isbandwidth available, your UBR+ PVCs can burst up to the port speed.

For USR 1.0 CBR is supported. From USR 2.0 UBR and UBR+ are also supported withinthe Node B, RNC and CN, the main benefits are shown below.

UBR provides more efficient usage of ATM bandwidth for O&M (upload & download). UBR allows mostof an E1 link to be dedicated downloading (we’re unlikely to be servicing any calls if emergencydownloads are required, which is less cumbersome and time consuming without UBR. This is becausethere would be a need to reconfigure CBR O&M link before and after O&M download

For Iub, having UBR allows over provisioning of the OAM VC and thus better efficiency for download oflarge code/config files as well as upload of large performance measurement files. For Iu-PS, having UBRallows over provisioning of the Iu-PS packet data traffic and better efficiency in the Iu-PS user plane.

Benefit of UBR+ is that a specified amount of bandwidth will always be available. In the case of receivinga code download or sending a statistics upload with UBR+ the specified value for Minimum DownloadCell Rate (MDCR) will be always available even during e.g. busy times in the middle of the day.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Version 1 Rev 0

Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM)

Data transferred in Cells

Fast Switching

Supports Real-Time Services

Connection Orientated - Virtual Circuits

Resource Allocation on Requirement Basis

Primary User Rate - 155.2 Mbps

Network Interface - 622.08 Mbps

No Error Correction or Flow Control

Header Payload

5 Bytes 48 Bytes

·······

·


5-9

Version 1 Rev 0 Virtual Channels and Paths

Virtual Channels and PathsOn a physical level ATM connects via the specification of Virtual Paths (VPs) and Virtual Channels(VCs). A Virtual Channel will be located inside a Virtual Path. A Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) willidentify the Virtual Channel and the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) will identify the Virtual Path (VP).

In total we could have up to 256 addresses for a VP User to Network Interface (UNI)and 4096 for a VP Network to Network Interface (NNI). When VCIs are used, upto 216 channels per path can be addressed.

Use of Virtual Channels and PathsA virtual channel provides an end-to-end connection, referred to as a Virtual ChannelConnection. This connection in turn may consist of a number of VC and VP components.These components are illustrated opposite and are defined as follows:

Virtual Channel Link

A virtual channel link is a unidirectional facility transporting ATM cells between two consecutiveATM entities where a VCI value is assigned, remapped or removed. For example, betweenan ATM endpoint and a VC Switch, or between two VC switches.

Virtual Channel Connection

A virtual channel connection is a concatenation of virtual channel connections.

Virtual Path Link

A virtual path link is a unidirectional facility transporting ATM cells between two consecutiveATM entities where a VPI value is assigned, remapped or removed. For example, betweenan ATM endpoint and a VC Switch, or between two VC switches.

Virtual Path Connection

A virtual path connection is a concatenation of virtual path connections.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Virtual Channels and Paths Version 1 Rev 0

Virtual Channels and Paths

ATM Path

Virtual Path (VP)

Virtual Channel (VC)

Each VP within the physical layer has a different VPI value

Each VC within a VP has a different VCI value

Use of Virtual Channels and Paths

Virtual Channel Connection Endpoints

Virtual Channel Connection

Virtual Channel Link Virtual Channel Link

Virtual Path Link Virtual Path LinkVC Switch - VCI and VPI

values change

Virtual Path Connection

Virtual Path Connection Endpoints

VP Switch VC SwitchATMEND

SYSTEM

ATMEND

SYSTEM


5-11

Version 1 Rev 0 Virtual Path and Virtual Connection Switching

Virtual Path and Virtual Connection SwitchingWhen addressing is carried out on VP level only a VP address would be needed since all the VCs areinside the VP. Therefore we would only switch on VP level like illustrated in the diagram. If howeverVCs need to be switched a VP Switch combined with a VC Switch would be needed.

The switching in ATM could get complicated at times therefore special tools havebeen developed to help with this aspect.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Virtual Path and Virtual Connection Switching Version 1 Rev 0

Virtual Path and Virtual Connection SwitchingVC Switch

VP Switch VP Switch

Endpointof VPC

Representation of VC and VP SwitchingRepresentation of VP Switching


5-13

Version 1 Rev 0 ATM Adaptation Layers (AALs)

ATM Adaptation Layers (AALs)The ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL) is the protocol used between the ATM layer itself and higherlayers. The main functionality is to adapt the information coming in from the higher layers sothey can be transferred onto ATM. This is what gives ATM its powerful property of transferringmany traffic types, and ensures appropriate service characteristics are provided.

The AALs are divided into 5 different categories, where AAL1 has the lowest delay and AAL5 thehighest. This means that services like speech will tend to go towards a lower AAL number.

Horizontally the AAL protocol is divided into the Convergence Sublayer (CS) and theSegmentation and Reassembly Sublayer (SAR).


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

ATM Adaptation Layers (AALs) Version 1 Rev 0

ATM Adaptation Layers (AALs)Class A Class B Class C Class D

Timing Relation Required Not Required

Bit Rate

Connection Rate

Examples

Service Typeto be used

Constant Variable

ConnectionOrientated

ConnectionLess

Emulationof Circuits

CPCM

Variable BitRate Video

ConnectionOrientated Data

Transmission

ConnectionLess Data

Transmission

AAL 1 AAL 2AAL 3/4 or

AAL 5

Available Unspecified


5-15

Version 1 Rev 0 The ATM Adaptation Process

The ATM Adaptation ProcessThe AAL consists of two sub-layers; The Convergence sub-layer (CS) and thesegmentation and reassembly sub-layer (SAR).

Convergence Sub-Layer (CS)The function of the CS is to divide very long packets into fixed-length packets called CS-servicedata units (CS-SDUs). It may add header and/or trailer information to the CS-SDU to generatea CS-protocol data unit (CS-PDU). Finally it passes the CS-PDUs to the SAR.

Segmentation and Reassembly (SAR)At the source end, the SAR sub-layer is responsible for segmenting each CS-PDU receivedfrom the CS sub-layer into fixed-length SAR-SDUs according to the application traffictype. The SAR then appends a header and/or trailer to each SAR-SDU to generate anSAR-PDU that it sends to the ATM layer, to be built into the cell.

At the destination end, the SAR is responsible for reassembling all SAR-PDUs belonging to thesame CS-PDU and presenting the reassembled CS-PDU to the CS.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

The ATM Adaptation Process Version 1 Rev 0

The ATM Adaptation ProcessGeneric AAL Process

User Data

Header TrailerUser Data

TCS-SDUH

SAR-SDU TH

SAR-PDU SAR-PDUHH

TCS-SDUH TCS-SDUH

SAR-SDU TH

CSPROCESS

SARPROCESS

ATMLAYER

CS-PDU

SAR-PDU

ATM Cell


5-17

Version 1 Rev 0 ATM Adaptation Layer 2 (AAL2)

ATM Adaptation Layer 2 (AAL2)AAL 2 is designed for applications with a variable bit rate but requiring real time delivery. It supportsmechanisms, which can identify and multiplex multiple users over a common ATM layer connection.

AAL2 is a lot more efficient at transporting voice as there is a more efficient use of bandwidthdue to silence detection and suppression as well as idle channel detection.

In This type of AAL, the convergence sub-layer further divided into two parts. CommonPart Convergence Sub-layer (CPCS), over which may operate zero or more ServiceSpecific Convergence Sub-layers (SSCS). In UMTS the Higher level protocolsused, do not require the support of an SSCS.

CPCSUser information, from multiple users is received at the CPCS sub-layer and placed into a containerof variable length CPS-Information Field (1-64 Octets) and a three octet CPS Header. Theheader contains; the Channel ID(CID) which identifies the sub-stream within the AAL2 connection.The Length Indication(LI) indicates the length of the CPS-INFO payload. The User-to-UserIndication(UUI) carries information between the SSCSs/Applications running above the CPS. TheHeader Error Control(HEC) can be used to report errors within the header.

Dependent upon size multiple CPS Packets, from different sources, can be multiplexed to form 47Octet CPS-SDUs, (If necessary, padding can be added to give 47-Octets). A further header is added tothe SDU to yield a 48 Octet CPS-PDU. The CPS-PDU header contains an Offset Field(OSF) whichis a pointer to the first octet of the next CPS-Packet in the CPS-SDU. The 1 bit sequence number isan alternating logic-1, logic-0, logic-1, etc sequence. A single parity bit is also included.

The Complete CPS-PDU is now 48-octets, and is now passed unchanged to theATM layer, to be built directly into an ATM cell.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

ATM Adaptation Layer 2 (AAL2) Version 1 Rev 0

ATM Adaptation Layer 2 (AAL2)

HEADER OSF SN P Info Packets or padding

CID8bits

LI6bits

UUI5bits

HEC5bits

CPS-Information fieldVARIABLE 1 - 64 Octets

3-Octet CPS Header User Data

CPS-PDU

ATM Cell (53-Octets)

CPS-Packet

Start Field CPS-SDU

OSF6bits

SN1bit

P1bit

Info packets or padding47 Octets


5-19

Version 1 Rev 0 ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL 5)

ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL 5)The most recent of the adaptation layers, AAL 5 is also becoming the most popular and has largelysuperseded AAL3/4. Often referred to as the Simple And Efficient Adaptation Layer (SEAL),it supports a wide variety of applications. It is the adaptation layer of choice for the ATM signallingprotocol on VCI 5. MPEG video and Frame Relay also use AAL 5. Unlike AAL2 (or AAL 3/4)AAL5 does not support multiplexing of data from multiple higher layer applications

AAL 5 takes any user data, normally as a frame, adds some padding and an 8-byte trailer so that thewhole of the resulting CPCS PDU is n x 48-bytes long. The PDUs are then sent for segmentationby SAR and forwarded 48-bytes at a time to the ATM layer. When the last cell from the PDUis given to the ATM layer, the ATM layer is informed that it is the last cell. The ATM layer thensets the "End of User Data" bit in the ATM header to inform the receiving end.

In the receiver, the ATM layer passes the payloads up to the SAR sublayer. When the last cellarrives, it is recognised by the ATM layer. The ATM layer informs the SAR layer that the payloadis the last for that frame. The SAR presents the assembled PDU to the CS. The CS performs aCRC on the PDU and compares this with the last 4 bytes in the trailer. If the CRCs match, theCS then checks the 2-byte Length Indicator (LI). The LI field indicates the amount of user datain the PDU so that the CS can remove the padding and recover the user data. Should the CRCnot match, then the whole PDU is discarded. AAL 5 relies on the application to recover fromlost frames. For video applications, the last correct frame received would be repeated. For LANdata, the transport protocol would arrange for re-transmission of the missing frame.

CPI Common Part Indicator LI Length Indicator

PDU Protocol Data Unit AAL ATM Adaptation Layer

SDU Service Data Unit CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check

CPCS Common Part ConvergenceSub-layer

SAR Segmentation and Re-assembly


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL 5) Version 1 Rev 0

ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL 5)User Data

1 - 65,535 bytes

H SAR Payload

SAR Payload

CPCS-PDU Payload PAD UUI CPI LI CRC

H SAR Payload

SAR Payload

H SAR Payload

SAR Payload

0-47 1 1 2 4

AAL 5 SDUs

ATMCELLS

SARPDUs

CPCSPDUs


5-21

Version 1 Rev 0 E1/T1 Architecture

E1/T1 Architecture

Logical LinksWe have seen some of the mediums over which the data is transmitted, now let us considerthe format of the data that is carried over these mediums.

In GSM all the data is in digital form, and the path that the data takes is called a logical link. The format ofthe data is dependent on where in the system the data is and what sort of data needs to be transferred.

E1In the European GSM system the basic building block of data that gets carried around thenetwork is based around the multiplexed 2.048 Mbit/s frame.

This frame contains 32 channels of 64 Kbit/s. 30 are used for user information. Channel 0 isreserved for timing and synchronisation and channel 16 is used for signalling.

E1 also specifies the sampling rate, frequency bandwidth, bits per sample, time slots per frame,output bit rate, encoding law and the dedicated signalling and synchronisation channels.

T1T1 is the American version of E1.

There are significant differences in the make up of the TDM frame.

T1 uses 24 time slots per frame, with 24 PCM channels per frame. The output bit rate is 1.544 Mbit/sand the signalling used in the frame is only used once every 6th frame, instead of every frame in E1.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

E1/T1 Architecture Version 1 Rev 0

E1/T1 Architecture

T1/DS1

E1

Frequency

Sampling Rate

Bits per Sample

Bits per Frame

PCM Channels per Frame

Output Bit Rate

Encoding Law

Signalling Capabilities

300 - 3400Hz

8000Hz

8

193

24

1.544 Mbps

μ Law

1st bit in frame - Sync

1 bit in timeslots 6 and 12

Frequency Range

Sample Rate

Bits per Sample

Time Slots per Frame

Output Bit Rate

Encoding Law

Signalling Capabilities

300 - 3400Hz

8000Hz

8

32

2.048 Mbps

A LAW

TS16 Signalling

TS0 Sync


5-23

Version 1 Rev 0 ATM Cell to E1 Cell Mapping

ATM Cell to E1 Cell MappingThe ATM cell is mapped into bits 9 to 128 and bits 137 to 256 (i.e. time slots 1 to 15 and time slots 17to 31) of the 2048 kbit/s frame as specified in ITU-T Recommendation G.704[2] and as shown in theFigure opposite. The ATM cell octet structure shall be aligned with the octet structure of the frame.

There shall be no relationship between the beginning of an ATM cell and the beginning of an2048 kbit/s transmission frame. Since the frame payload capacity (30 octets) is not an integermultiple of cell length (53 octets), ATM cells will cross the E1 frame boundary.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

ATM Cell to E1 Cell Mapping Version 1 Rev 0

ATM Cell to E1 Cell MappingTS0

SynchTS16Sig

ATM Mapping Field15 Octets

ATM Mapping Field15 Octets

125 µs E1 frames - 256 bits per frame


5-25

Version 1 Rev 0 E1 Link Multiplexing

E1 Link MultiplexingThe standard E1 and T1 streams can be further multiplexed to put more channelsover one transmission path.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

E1 Link Multiplexing Version 1 Rev 0

E1 Link MultiplexingE1 Series Hierarchies

E1

2.048 Mb/s

E2

8.448 Mb/s

E3

34.368 Mb/s

E4

139.264 Mb/s

E5

564.992 Mb/s

x 4

x 4

x 4

x 4

30 TCH

120 TCH

480 TCH

1,920 TCH7,680 TCH


5-27

Version 1 Rev 0 Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA)

Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA)Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA) is a methodology which provides a modular bandwidth,for user access to ATM networks and for connection between ATM network elements, at ratesbetween the traditional order multiplex level. An example is to achieve rates between theDS1/E1 and DS3/E3 levels in the asynchronous digital hierarchies. DS2/E2 physical links arenot necessarily readily available throughout a given network. Therefore the introduction of ATMInverse Multiplexers provides an effective method of combining the transport bandwidths of multiplelinks (e.g., DS1/E1 links) grouped to collectively provide higher intermediate rates.

The ATM Inverse Multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing ofATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical linkwhose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This is referred to as an IMA group.The figure opposite provides a simple illustration of the ATM Inverse Multiplexing techniquein one direction. The same technique applies in the opposite direction.

IMA groups terminate at each end of the IMA virtual link. In the transmit direction, the ATM cell streamreceived from the ATM layer is distributed on a cell by cell basis, across the multiple links within the IMAgroup. At the far-end, the receiving IMA unit recombines the cells from each link, on a cell by cell basis,recreating the original ATM cell stream. The aggregate cell stream is then passed to the ATM layer.

The IMA interface periodically transmits special cells that contain information that permitreconstruction of the ATM cell stream at the receiving end of the IMA virtual link. The receiverend reconstructs the ATM cell stream after accounting for the link differential delays, smoothingCDV introduced by the control cells, etc. These cells, defined as IMA Control Protocol (ICP)cells, provide the definition of an IMA frame. The transmitter must align the transmission ofIMA frames on all links. This allows the receiver to adjust for differential link delays among theconstituent physical links. Based on this required behavior, the receiver can detect the differentialdelays by measuring the arrival times of the IMA frames on each link.

At the transmitting end, the cells are transmitted continuously. If there are no ATM layer cells to besent between ICP cells within an IMA frame, then the IMA transmitter sends filler cells to maintaina continuous stream of cells at the physical layer. The insertion of Filler cells provides cell ratedecoupling at the IMA sublayer. The Filler cells should be discarded by the IMA receiver.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA) Version 1 Rev 0

Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA)Inverse Multiplexing and De-multiplexing of ATM cells

PHY

PHY

PHY

IMA GroupIMA Group

PHY

PHY

PHY

Physical Link #0

Physical Link #1

Physical Link #2

Original ATM CellStream to ATM Layer

Single ATM CellStreamfrom ATM Layer

Tx direction: cells distributed across links in round robin sequenceRx direction: cells recombined into single ATM stream

IMA Frames

ATM FATM ICP2ATM F FATM ICP0ATMF FATM ICP1F Link 0

ICP2 FATM FF ICP0 FATM FATMICP1 ATMATM ATMATM Link 1

ATM ICP2ATM FF F ICP0ATM ATMATMF ICP1ATM ATMATM Link 2

IMA Frame 2 IMA Frame 1 IMA Frame 0

M-1 23 1 0 M-1 23 1 0M-1 23 1 0

ICP1 ICP Cell in Frame # 1 F Filler Cell ATM ATM Layer Cell

Time


5-29

Version 1 Rev 0 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)With the advent of fully digital and synchronous networks the CCITT defined a newmultiplexing hierarchy called Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH). In the USA is calledSynchronous Optical Network (SONET) with the two major differences being terminologyand the basic line rates used (SONET - 51.84 Mbps).

SDH uses a basic transmission rate of 155.52 Mbps (abbreviated to 155 Mbps) and multiples of 4n.

This basic rate is known as a Synchronous Transport Module level 1 (STM-1),higher rates are STM-4 and STM-16.

As with PDH, the signal is repetitive frames with a repeat period of 125µs. Any ofthe PDH rates can be multiplexed into the STM-1.

The main advantages of SDH are:

• It allows direct access to tributary signals without demultiplexing the composite signal.• It supports advance operations, administration and maintenance by dedicating channels for this

purpose. The network can therefore be reconfigured under software control from remote terminals.• Overhead bytes have been preserved for growth to support services and technologies of the future.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) Version 1 Rev 0

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)SDH Bit Rates

Synchronous TransportModule

TransmissionRate

STM - 1

STM - 4

STM - 16

STM - N

155.52 Mbps

622.08 Mbps

2,488.32 Mbps

N x 155.52 Mbps


5-31

Version 1 Rev 0 SDH Drop and Insert

SDH Drop and InsertSDH overcomes the limitations of plesiochronous networks, and will allow transmission networksto evolve to meet the demands of emerging broadband services.

Network SimplificationSynchronous transmission equipment eliminates the multiplexer mountain, leading to lower equipmentand maintenance costs, and improved service provisioning. The diagram shows how 2Mbpschannels can be dropped and inserted from a Synchronous Transfer Module, Type 1 (STM-1) bymeans of remote commands at a network management station. The flexibility of SDH transmissionis attractive to carriers because it offers the potential of generating new revenues.

SurvivabilitySDH includes overheads for end-to-end monitoring and maintenance of transmission equipment;the network management station can immediately identify the failure of links and equipment.Furthermore, as shown in the diagram, an SDH network can be constructed with a self-healingring architecture that automatically reroutes traffic until the faulty segment is repaired; there will beno disruption of service to the end user, allowing carriers to guarantee service levels.

Software ControlSDH also includes overheads for management channels; these are used for performancemonitoring, equipment configuration, resource management, network security, inventorymanagement, network planning and network design. Since all of these managementoperations can be performed remotely, SDH offers the possibility of centralised networkmanagement and provisioning, with associated cost savings.

Bandwidth on DemandThe flexibility of SDH allows carriers to allocate network capacity dynamically in that users will be able tosubscribe at very short notice to large bandwidth services e.g. video-conferencing. This feature opensup the possibility of providing new services e.g. high-speed LAN interconnection and High Definition TV.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

SDH Drop and Insert Version 1 Rev 0

SDH Drop and Insert

SDH Mux

2Mbps interface

1 632

SDH Mux

2Mbps interface

SDH Mux

2Mbps interface

SDH Mux

2Mbps interface

155Mbps alternate routingusing ring topology

Management of2Mbps traffic

SDH Drop and Insert

155Mb/s

155Mbps

155Mbps


5-33

Version 1 Rev 0 Principles of SDH

Principles of SDHAlthough a full description of SDH is beyond the scope of this course, thissection will cover the main principles.

The diagram shows the SDH multiplex structure, indicating how an STM is formed from various PDHtraffic rates. The following terms are used in the diagram, and further explained below:

• C - Container• VC - Virtual Container• TU - Tributary Units• TUG - Tributary Unit Group• AU - Administrative Unit• AUG - Administrative Unit Group• STM - Synchronous Transfer Module

The following table lists the container size suffices used when referring to equivalentPDH traffic rates within SDH signals:

Container Suffix Bit rate kbps

0 64

11 1,554

12 2,048

21 6,312

22 8,448

31 34,368

32 44,736

4 139,264


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Principles of SDH Version 1 Rev 0

Principles of SDH

STM-N AUG AU-4

TU-3

VC-4

VC-3

VC-11

VC-12

VC-2

VC-3

C-11

C-12

C-2

C-3

C-4

SDH Multiplex Structure

140 Mbit/s

45 Mbit/s34 Mbit/s

6 Mbit/s

2 Mbit/s

1.5 Mbit/sTU-11

TU-12

TU-2TUG-2

AU-3

x1

x3

x3

TUG-3x1

x7

x7 x1

x3

x4


5-35

Version 1 Rev 0 Typical UMTS Transport Network

Typical UMTS Transport NetworkThe diagram opposite shows a typical implementation of an ATM transport network tosupport the UMTS interfaces. The UMTS nodes as shown are connected to a single SDHring, whereas there may actually be several rings involved depending on the networkproviders configuration and may include PDH interfaces as well.

Node Bs use E1 physical interfaces and in the case where multiple E1’s are used IMA is utilised bythe Node B. The ATM Mux shown in the figure is expected to provide E1 (VC-12) to STM-1 (VC-4)mapping and vice versa in addition to providing IMA and reverse IMA capability. For a large numberof Node B’s, the transport network will have to provide a significant number of E1 interfaces.

The ATM switch will be utilised for VP and VC switching and will be expected to provide aggregation oflogical interfaces to physical interfaces via VP and VC switching. The ATM network is also expected tobe configurable to limit the throughput of a given physical interface. For example, the RNC STM-1physical interfaces need to be limited to a bandwidth of 100Mbps due to the hardware limitations.

Daisy ChainingFrom USR 2.0 it will be possible to configure Node B’s in a daisy chain. All typesof daisy chain are supported with the exception of closed loop. Up to 3 Node B’s(4 including hub node B) can be daisy chained.

Circuit EmulationFrom USR 2.0 the node B has the ability to terminate an ATM AAL1 connection and generatea circuit data stream for use by another piece of network equipment connected to the NodeB. Using circuit emulation, the E1 connections are routed first through the UMTS base stationwhere it uses its ATM data, and converts the ATM AAL1 data to circuit data. The resultingcircuit data is sent out another E1 connection to the attached network equipment. This islikely to be a BTS as operators move from GSM to UMTS.

ATM Protection SwitchFrom USR 2.0 this feature provides higher availability radio network system, especially improvedavailability, when it is used in addition to a lower layer protection (e.g. SDH). This is done byproviding 1:1 redundancy for important Permanent Virtual Circuits(PVCs), these are NCPPVC, ALCAP PVC, NodeB OM PVC, it is set by configuration.

The system switches from the primary PVCs to the secondary ones automaticallyunder the following conditions:

• Detection of signal failure of the primary PVCs• Detection of signal degradation of the primary PVCs• OAM command from operator• Others scenarios specified in I.630 not covered in this course.

To determine that a PVC is not functioning properly, the equipment collects PM statisticson quality of the PVC (lost packets, buffer overflow, etc), in order to indicate to theOAM that a switch to the secondary PVC is needed.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Typical UMTS Transport Network Version 1 Rev 0

Typical UMTS Transport Network

Node B

SGSN

MSCu

RNC

RNC

RNC

Node BNode B

Node BNode B

ATM Mux

OMCATM Switch

ATM Switch

Ethernet

Ethernet(Option underinvestigation)

STM-1

STM-1

STM-1

STM-1

STM-1

E1, IMA

E1, IMA

E1, IMAE1, IMA

SDH Ring(STM-1/STM-4/STM-16)

BTS

Circuit Emulation


5-37

Version 1 Rev 0 Typical UMTS Transport Network



©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

W-CDMA Theory Version 1 Rev 0

Chapter 6

W-CDMA Theory


6-1

Version 1 Rev 0 W-CDMA Theory



©MOTOROLA LTD.2002



• Describe various options for multiple access schemes.• State the Characteristics of UMTS W-CDMA.• State why W-CDMA has been chosen for the UMTS multiple access scheme.• Describe W-CDMA spreading and despreading procedures.• Describe the use of orthagonal codes and the channelisation code tree.• Describe the scrambling and summation process.• Describe the effects of multi-path radio channels and the purpose of the RAKE receiver.


6-3

Version 1 Rev 0 Multiple Access Schemes

Multiple Access SchemesThere are 3 forms of multiple access schemes, frequency, time and code. The major issuewith the first two is the requirement to have guard bands.

Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA)FDMA divides radio channels into a range of radio frequencies and is used in the traditional analoguesystem. With FDMA, only one subscriber is assigned to a channel at one time. Other subscriberscannot access this channel until the original call is terminated or handed off to a different channel.

Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)TDMA is a common multiple access technique employed in digital cellular systems. It dividesradio channels into time slots to obtain higher capacity. As with FDMA, no other conversationscan access an occupied channel until that channel is vacated.

Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)CDMA assigns each subscriber a unique code to put multiple users on the same channelat the same time. CDMA users can share the same frequency channel because theirconversations are distinguished only by digital code.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Multiple Access Schemes Version 1 Rev 0

Multiple Access Schemes

CDMA

TDMA

Frequency

Power

FDMA

Frequency

Power

Codes Time

Time

Time

Frequency


6-5

Version 1 Rev 0 W-CDMA Characteristics

W-CDMA CharacteristicsThe vital statistics for our W-CDMA UMTS system is shown opposite. Don’t be confused bythe slots and frames, this is not a TDMA system, every user does share the same band.The frames and slots are used for interleaving, power control.

The major points are:

FDD requires paired frequencies for up and down channels.

The chip rate of 3.84 Mcps provides a bandwidth of 5 MHz. A chip is the originalsignal split or chipped by the spreading code.

The carrier spacing of 200 kHz is used to allow re-farming of GSM frequencieswhich have been set at 200 kHz spacing.

The frame length is set at 10 ms. Each frame is split into 15 timeslots, each timeslotcontains user data, power control and signalling data.

The UMTS system does not require synchronisation due to the framing structure anduse of matched filters for the framing alignment.

The spreading factor is the ratio between the user data and the chip rate. As the userdata increases this factor will vary between 4 and 512. The spreading factor is a roughindication of the number of users in the system.

The user data rates available in the FDD system is up to 384 Kbps.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

W-CDMA Characteristics Version 1 Rev 0

W-CDMA Characteristics

Multiple Access Scheme

Duplexing Method

Chip Rate

Bandwidth

Carrier Spacing

Frame Length

Slots per Frame

Inter-cell Synchronization

Spreading Factor

User Data Rate

CDMA

FDD

3.84 Mcps

5 MHz

200 kHz Raster

10 ms

15

None

Variable (4-512)

3-384 Kbps


6-7

Version 1 Rev 0 Re-Use of Frequency

Re-Use of FrequencyMobile telephones and cell broadcast networks use cellular radio, a technique developed in recentyears to enable the use of mobile telephones. It would be impossible to provide each phonewith an individual radio frequency, so the idea of cellular radio evolved.

A region is divided into geographical areas called cells, varying in size depending on the number ofusers in the area. In cities cells are small whereas in rural areas cells are much larger.

In GSM cells use a set of frequencies that are different from any neighbouring cell, but canbe the same as another cell as long as it is far enough away.

For UMTS, a frequency re-use of one, may be employed. This means that all cells within a givengeographical area, or even an entire network may use the same carrier frequency.

An alternate method of discriminating between neighbouring cells must therefore be found.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Re-Use of Frequency Version 1 Rev 0

Re-Use of Frequency

1

2

5

3

7

41 6

2

5

3

7

4

1 6

2

5

3

7

4

1 6

2

5

3

7

4

16

2

5

3

7

41 6

2

3

4

1

2

5

74

6

3


6-9

Version 1 Rev 0 Re-Use of Codes

Re-Use of CodesCodes are used to uniquely identify a cell in the network. Frequency planning is more or less a thing of thepast but code planning will have to be implemented. Code planning will be much easier then frequencyplanning since we have 512 Codes to play with, the code re-use pattern will thus be extremely large.

Codes can be reused when the separation between cells containing the same channel set is farenough apart so that co-channel interference can be kept below acceptable levels. The number of cellsin a cluster is 512, which provides greater separation between co-channel cells than GSM.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Re-Use of Codes Version 1 Rev 0

Re-Use of Codes

14 6

1615

13

741 27

2830

3129

36 37

225

35

3234

23 39

2018

38

2221

17 19

1110

12

247 4

1

6

5

41

245

3340

26


6-11

Version 1 Rev 0 Spectral Efficiency (GSM and UMTS)

Spectral Efficiency (GSM and UMTS)The Slide opposite shows how spectrally efficient UMTS and GSM is in comparison toeach other when employed in a multi-cellular structure.

The capacity, which Shannon derived in 1947, provided a Law, which we now call Shannons Law.This details the digital capacity of the link given the transmit power and the bandwidth.

If we are using, FDMA, TDMA or CDMA, the capacity is still controlled by this law. However,some gains are made by technology and coding methods.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Spectral Efficiency (GSM and UMTS) Version 1 Rev 0

Spectral Efficiency (GSM and UMTS)

7 x 200 kHz = 1.4 MHz

1 Call = 25 kHz

8 Calls = 200 kHz Carrier

1 Call = 25 kHz

GSM

7 Cells, 5 MHz

1 Call = 2.8 kHz

256 Calls = 5 MHz Carrier

1 Call = 19.4 kHz

UMTS


6-13

Version 1 Rev 0 Direct Spread (DS)-CDMA Implementation

Direct Spread (DS)-CDMA Implementation

TransmitterThe digital modulator will take digital speech/data and multiply it with the spreading code.

The radio modulator moves the baseline signal from the digital modulator onto a2GHz carrier to produce the W-CDMA output.

ReceiverThe modulated carrier is moved by the radio demodulator to the digital demodulator whichcan be very complicated due to the large number of users.

Here the input is multiplied by the de-spreading codes to produce digital speech.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Direct Spread (DS)-CDMA Implementation Version 1 Rev 0

Direct Spread (DS)-CDMA Implementation

Single User Channel

5 MHz

Multiple User Channel

5 MHz

Multiple User Channel

5 MHz

Output

0

0

Input External Interference

RadioModulator

DigitalSignal

DigitalSignal

SpreadingCode

Generator

DigitalModulator

DigitalModulator

RadioModulator C

ombiner

Splitter

DigitalSignal

DigitalSignal

DigitalDemodulator

RadioDemodulator

RadioDemodulator

DigitalDemodulator

t0

RxRadioCarrier

RadioCarrier

Tx

W-CDMAModulated Carrier

SpreadingCode

Generator


6-15

Version 1 Rev 0 Spreading

SpreadingThe spreading operation is the multiplication of each user data bit with a "Spreading Code" , whichis a pre-defined bit pattern. To discriminate between User data "bits" and spreading code "bits", thesymbols in the spreading code are referred to as "Chips". The chip rate for UMTS is fixed at 3.84 Mcps.After the spreading operation each "Bit" of the data signal is represented by a number of "chips".

The number of chips representing each bit is referred to as the Spreading Factor (SF) and isgiven by dividing the chip rate by the source signal bit rate; in this example:

3.84

Mcs / 480 kbps = (SF=8)

The spreading operation has resulted in an increase of the "signalling rate of the user data, in this caseby a factor of 8, and corresponds to a widening of the "spectrum" occupied by the user data signal.Due to this, CDMA systems are more generically referred to as "Spread Spectrum" systems.

The SF is also referred to as the Processing Gain (PG), which is expressed as a Decibel ratio anddescribes the gain or amplitude increase that will be applied to the signal at the receiving station as aresult of the de-spreading operation. This concept is described in more detail later in this chapter


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Spreading Version 1 Rev 0

Spreading

Data 480 kB/s

Spreading

Code 3.84 Mcs

Spread

Data

1–1

1–1

1–1


6-17

Version 1 Rev 0 De-spreading

De-spreadingDe-spreading is performed at the receiving station (UE or Node B) by multiplying the chip rate,spread user data signal by a chip rate spreading code. By using the same spreading codeas used at the transmitting station for the spreading operation, the multiplication of the twochip rate signals will reproduce the original bit rate user data signal.

To aid accurate recovery of the user data, a Correlation Receiver is employed in most CDMAsystems. The correlation receiver integrates the product of the de-spreading process on achip-by-chip basis. In the upper diagram opposite, the example shown illustrated that for a perfectlyreceived de-spread signal, the correlation receiver output has effectively "Lifted" the amplitudeof the received signal by a factor of 8, a function of the processing gain.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

De-spreading Version 1 Rev 0

De-spreading

Spread

Data

Spreading

Code

Correlation

RX

Integrator

O/P

Recovered

Data

1–1

1–1

1–1


6-19

Version 1 Rev 0 Orthogonal Codes

Orthogonal CodesTransmissions from a single source are separated by channelisation codes. The channelisation codesof UTRA are based upon the Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factor (OVSF) technique.

There are a finite number of OVSF codes available, and some restrictions in their use.

OVSF codes are, as their name implies, orthogonal codes. Orthogonal codes possess good crosscorrelation properties allowing easy discrimination between signals produced using correctlyselected codes. For OVSF the cross correlation between codes is zero, meaning interferersignals between different codes is effectively "zero" after correlation.

Channelisation Code TreeFor separating channels from the same source, channelisation codes called OrthogonalVariable Spreading Factors are used.

The lines in the diagram represent codes, these are Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factor (OVSF)codes, allowing to mix in the same timeslot channels with different spreading factors while preservingthe orthogonality. The OVSF codes can be defined using the code tree shown opposite.

Each level in the code tree defines a Spreading Factor (SF) indicated in the figure. All codes withinthe code tree cannot be used simultaneously in a given timeslot. A code can be used in a timeslotif and only no other code on the path from the specific code to the root of the tree or in the sub-treeopposite the specific code is used in this timeslot. This means that the number of available codes in aslot is not fixed but depends on the rate and spreading factor of each physical channel.

The spreading codes can be used to identify individual channels, but a mobile usually has to identifythe base station that it is currently parented on. A long code is usually used for that.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Orthogonal Codes Version 1 Rev 0

Orthogonal CodesChannelisation Code Tree

(1, -1, -1, 1, -1, 1, 1, -1)

Cch, 8, 7

Cch, 8, 6

(1, -1, -1, 1, 1, -1, -1, 1)

(1, -1, 1, -1, -1, 1, -1, 1)

Cch, 8, 5

Cch, 8, 4

(1, -1, 1,- 1, 1, -1, 1, -1)

(1, 1, -1, -1,- 1, -1, 1, 1)

Cch, 8, 3

Cch, 8, 2

(1, 1, -1, -1, 1, 1, -1, -1)

(1, 1, 1, 1, -1, -1, -1, -1)

Cch, 8, 1

Cch, 8, 0(1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1)Cch, 4, 0

Cch, 4, 1

Cch, 4, 2

Cch, 4, 3

(1, 1, 1, 1)

(1, 1, -1, -1)

(1, -1, 1, -1)

(1, -1, -1, 1)

Cch, 2, 0

Cch, 2, 1

(1, 1)

(1, -1)

Cch, 1, 0

(1)

SF = 1 SF = 2 SF = 4 SF = 8


6-21

Version 1 Rev 0 De-spreading Other Users Signals

De-spreading Other Users SignalsIt must be remembered that in a CDMA system, all users are potentially transmittingon the same frequency. This means that at any given receiver station, in addition tothe desired signal, multiple interferer signals will also be received. It is the task of thecorrelation receiver to reject these interferer signals.

The diagram opposite shows the effect of de-spreading and correlation at a given receivingstation (e.g UE "A"), on an interferer signal, (e.g a signal transmitted on the same carrier forreception by UE "B"). The de-spreading/correlation of the interferer signal will result in a crosscorrelation of zero (i.e. the output of the integration process will be zero). This process is onlytrue when correctly selected orthogonal spreading codes are employed.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

De-spreading Other Users Signals Version 1 Rev 0

De-spreading Other Users Signals

Data for UE B

Spreading Codefor UE B

Spread Datafor UE B

Spread Codefor UE A

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1

Recovered Dataat UE A

Correlation RXIntegrator O/Pat UE A


6-23

Version 1 Rev 0 Processing Gain

Processing GainProcessing Gain can be defined as the Chip Rate divided by the bit rate. This gives a ratiothat can be converted to decibels by using the following formula.

PG = 10 x log SF

The gain that we get from the Processing Gain is an extremely important part of CDMA. It is in factbecause of this relationship that CDMA is so effective and is used even in space transmissions.Processing gain will determine how much the received signal can be lifted out of the noise floor.

There is one simple rule to follow, the higher the SF the higher the processing gain will be, thelower the SF the lower the processing gain. As we know, the SF is also inversely proportional tothe speed of the transmission. This means that the higher the speed of transmission the lowerthe processing gain will be. Due to this relationship the power output must be increased for anytransmitter if the transmission rate is increased due to the loss in Processing Gain.

This will also mean that if the Frame Erasure Rate (FER) is increased on thereceiver side the power must be increased or the transmission rate must drop on thetransmitter side to meet the FER requirement.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Processing Gain Version 1 Rev 0

Processing Gain

PG = 10 x log (Chip Rate/Bit Rate)

or

PG = 10 x log (SF)


6-25

Version 1 Rev 0 Exercise 1 - Spreading

Exercise 1 - SpreadingThis Exercise demonstrates the Modulo-2 Addition, Spreading Factor usage, Code Lengthsand in general will give the student a feel for the Spreading Principle.

NOTES____________________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________________


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Exercise 1 - Spreading Version 1 Rev 0

Exercise 1 - Spreading

Spreading

De-spreading

C/I = 5 dB - 6 dB

= -1 dB

S/N = 5dB

Calculation Box

SF = 4

PG = 4 (ratio)PG = 6 dB

Data

Spreading Code

Spread Data

Spreading Code

De-spread Data

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1


6-27

Version 1 Rev 0 Exercise 2 - Spreading/Despreading

Exercise 2 - Spreading/DespreadingTo gain some experience in Spreading the student can complete the following exercise.The student can complete the despreading part of the exercise and then calculate theSF and PG. See if it matches with the answers provided.

Note the irregular structure in the answer.

NOTES

____________________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________________


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Exercise 2 - Spreading/Despreading Version 1 Rev 0

Exercise 2 - Spreading/Despreading

C/I = 5 dB - 6 dB

= -1 dB

S/N = 5dB

Calculation Box

SF = 4

PG = 4 (ratio)PG = 6 dB

Spreading

De-spreading

Data

Spreading Code

Spread Data

Spreading Code

De-spread Data

WrongSpreading Code

De-spread DataWrong Code

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1


6-29

Version 1 Rev 0 Exercise 3 - Spreading/Despreading

Exercise 3 - Spreading/DespreadingIn this exercise the student must complete the following:

1. Determine the SF used?2. Do the spreading part of the exercise?3. Do the despreading part of the exercise using the right code?4. Do the despreading part of the exercise using the wrong code?5. Complete the calculation?

NOTES

____________________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________________


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Exercise 3 - Spreading/Despreading Version 1 Rev 0

Exercise 3 - Spreading/Despreading

C/I =

= -1 dB

S/N = 5dB

Calculation Box

SF =

PG = PG =

Spreading

De-spreading

-1

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1

Data

Spreading Code

Spread Data

Spreading Code

De-spread Data

WrongSpreading Code

De-spread DataWrong Code

1


6-31

Version 1 Rev 0 Scrambling

ScramblingAs previously described, OVSF spreading codes can be used to separate individual users on acommon RF carrier freq. However, because of the need to maintain orthogonality of codes, the numberof codes available is very limited (512 Downlink, 256 Uplink). These 512 code must be reused in everycell, as such they do not become unique to a cell and users located at the boundaries of cells, wouldreceive transmissions using the same OVSF code, from more than one cell. For UMTS therefore,OVSF codes are used only as channelisation codes, used identify individual physical channels. Afurther coding, process, known as a "Scrambling" is performed, in order to discriminate between thetransmissions between different cells on the downlink and different UEs on the uplink.

Each physical channel is first individually spread to chip rate using a channelisation code (Cch sf,k) takenfrom the OVSF code tree, resulting in an increase in bandwidth of the signal form "Bit Rate" to "Chip Rate"

The Sequence of chips produced by the channelisation process is then "Scrambled",using a chip-to-chip multiplication with a complex-valued scrambling code (Csc). The codechosen is used to identify the source of the signal. As scrambling is performed on top ofspreading, it has no further effect on the bandwidth of the signal.

Although the primary purpose of using a scrambling code is to identify all channels from a singlesource, that single source may use more than scrambling code. For example, in the downlink, a cellmay transmit using one of 16 possible scrambling codes. After scrambling, all physical channels arethen combined, using complex addition, before being forwarded to the RF Modulator for transmission.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Scrambling Version 1 Rev 0

Scrambling

Cch SF,x Csc,x

Cch SF,x Csc, x

Cch SF,x Csc,x

Channel x Data

Channel y Data

Channel z Data

Σ


6-33

Version 1 Rev 0 Scrambling Codes vs Channelisaton Codes

Scrambling Codes vs Channelisaton CodesThe Slide shows the major differences between Scrambling Codes (SC) and Channelisation Codes (CC).


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Scrambling Codes vs Channelisaton Codes Version 1 Rev 0

Scrambling Codes vs Channelisaton Codes

CC SC

Usage Uplink

Length Uplink

Number of Codesavailable

Code Family

Spreading

Separation of Data & Control Channels(from the same UE)

Separation of channels to different UEs

Separation of UEs

Separation of CellsUsage Downlink

Length Downlink 4 - 512 Chips

No effect on Bandwidth

LC=10ms = Gold CodeSC = Extended S2 Family

Uplink = 2 – 1 = 16,777,215

LC =38400 Chips

LC - 10ms=38400 Chips orSC = 66.7us = 256 Chips

Increases Tx Bandwidth

512 Uplink and Downlink

OVSF

4 - 256 Chips

24

Downlink = 2 – 1 = 262,143(truncated to 8,192)

18


6-35

Version 1 Rev 0 Short Codes vs Long Codes

Short Codes vs Long CodesShort codes and Long codes are both used in the UMTS system. The main advantage of Short Codes isthat they have good Auto Correlation properties. This means that they are very easy to synchronise to.

The main advantage of long codes is that they have excellent cross correlation properties. Thismeans that they are very resistant to interference from other codes in the network.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Short Codes vs Long Codes Version 1 Rev 0

Short Codes vs Long Codes

Short codesCode sequence length <TimeslotCode sequence repeated within every timeslotGood auto correlation propertiesBad cross correlation propertiesPlanning Difficult

Code sequence length >> TimeslotCode sequence repeated for each Radio FrameBad auto correlation properties (long repetition cycle)Good cross correlation propertiesPlanning easy

Long codes


6-37

Version 1 Rev 0 Scrambling and Summation

Scrambling and SummationThe diagram opposite illustrates the process of scrambling and summation of multiple channels, priorto modulation onto the RF carrier and transmission over the UMTS air interface (Uu).

For the purposes of this example, three separate data streams (Channels X, Y and Z),each carrying a user bit sequence of "1,0,0,1", have been spread using channelisationcodes of Cch 8,1 , Cch 8,2 and Cch 8,3 respectively.

The spread signals are then independently scrambled using a single scrambling code. Theresultant chip sequences are then combined using complex addition, to produce the multi leveldigital baseband signal, that will be used to modulate the RF carrier.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Scrambling and Summation Version 1 Rev 0

Scrambling and Summation

Spread DataChannel X Cch 8,1

Spread DataChannel Y Cch 8,2

Spread DataChannel Z Cch 8,3

Scramblingcode

Channel X afterscrambling

Channel Y afterscrambling

Channel Z afterscrambling

Complex addedscrambled codes

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1

1-1

+3+2+1-1-2-3


6-39

Version 1 Rev 0 De-Scrambling and Data Recovery

De-Scrambling and Data RecoveryThe diagram opposite illustrates the processes of de-scrambling of a complex scrambledsignal and the recovery of user data from one channel.

The input signal, (derived from the example on the preceding page) is first de-scrambledby multiplication with the specified scrambling code. The result is a combined version ofall received channels, represented by a complex chip sequence.

The dispreading process must now be performed to recover the user data. The exampleillustrates the recovery of the data for Channel "X" from the preceding page. By performinga direct multiplication of the complex signal with the appropriate channelisation code, theillustrated correlation receiver output will be obtained. As can be seen, the integrated outputindicates bit values of “1,0,0,1", the expected result for this example.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

De-Scrambling and Data Recovery Version 1 Rev 0

De-Scrambling and Data Recovery

ReceivedScrambled

ScramblingCode

De-scrambledSignal

Chan Code forChan Y (Cch8,2)

CorrelationOutput

+3+2+1-1-2-3

1-1

+3+2+1-1-2-3


6-41

Version 1 Rev 0 Multi-path Radio Channels

Multi-path Radio ChannelsRadio propagation for mobile communications suffers greatly from the effects of mulipath reflections,diffractions and attenuation of the signal energy. These effects are causes by objects such as buildings,hills, etc, resulting in "Multipath Propagation", which has two main effects upon the signal.

Inter-symbol InterferenceInter-symbol interference occurs when the signal energy from more than one radio path, pertaining to asingle symbol (or chip in the case of W-CDMA), such that the energy from the various paths overlaps.This results in the smearing of the signal, such that is hard to define where one chip starts and one chipends and the true value of the chips may be distorted. This problem can be resolved, providing the delaybetween the two paths is greater than one chip period (0.26µs at 3.84 Mcs). This equates to a pathlength difference of 78 m). Delays of 1 or 2 µs are typical in urban areas, with 20µs possible in hilly areas.

Signal FadeIn multi-path situations where path lengths are multiples of half a wavelength of the received frequency(7cm at 2GHz), the signals on two (or more) paths will arrive in anti-phase to each other. This resultsin cancellation of the signals, causing fast or Rayleigh fading. Such fading can result in signal leveldrops in the order of 20 to 30dB, making the reception of error free data bits very difficult.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Multi-path Radio Channels Version 1 Rev 0

Multi-path Radio Channels


6-43

Version 1 Rev 0 Matched Filter Operation

Matched Filter OperationThe main task of the matched filter is to determine the timing reference of theinformation as it arrives at the receiver.

The filter will perform a chip-by-chip comparison of the received signal against a known"Pilot" reference, to identify multiple copies of the same chip pattern.

After several iterations of the multiple paths have been accumulated, the time dispersion betweenthe two paths can be calculated and tracked, allowing the paths to be separated.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Matched Filter Operation Version 1 Rev 0

Matched Filter Operation

RFFront EndCircuitry

MatchedFilter

Slot WiseAccumulation


6-45

Version 1 Rev 0 The Rake Receiver

The Rake ReceiverThe Rake receiver performs a similar (but not identical) function to the equaliser in GSM.Instead of training bits, the pilot signals (all zeros) are used as a basis for the search for thebest path. The rake receiver then constructs its fingers to track the other multi-path rays bystepping through delays one chip at a time until it finds another, lower level pilot. It can then usethe weightings to bring the rays into phase and constructive addition. Note that the differentrays are uncorrelated if the delay difference is greater than one chip.

The effect of the propagation environment on spread spectrum modulated signals is to producea series of signal components that have traversed differing paths. This is known as multipathinterference and, depending on whether or not there is a significant specula multipath component,the envelope of the multipath signal may be Rician or Rayleigh distributed.

Multipath results in two signal perturbations, known as Inter-Symbol Interference (ISI) and fading.Both introduce severe degradation in the system performance. ISI creates signal components thatare delayed into the next signal period, making these signals overlap and therefore interfere with oneanother. Fading is caused by signals of opposite phase cancelling in the receiver. To combat this,a RAKE receiver may be used. This is the type of receiver shown in the figure and contains manysignal paths, each with an individual delay. These delays are changed so that the total delay fromthe transmitter for all paths is the same and thus when combined they are in-phase.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

The Rake Receiver Version 1 Rev 0

The Rake Receiver

t1

t2

t3

D0

D1

D2

D3

Cch sf,k

Cch sf,k

Cch sf,k

Cch sf,k


6-47

Version 1 Rev 0 The Rake Receiver



©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

The Physical Layer Version 1 Rev 0

Chapter 7

The Physical Layer


7-1

Version 1 Rev 0 The Physical Layer



©MOTOROLA LTD.2002



• Describe the procedures performed by the Air Interface Physical Layer• Describe the UMTS Channel Structure.

◦ Logical Channels

◦ Transport Channels

◦ Physical Channels

• Describe the Downlink and Uplink Flow Processes.


7-3

Version 1 Rev 0 Physical Layer Services

Physical Layer ServicesThe Physical Layer (L1) will be the main discussion in this section since this is wheremost of the air interface tasks are performed.

The physical layer offers data transport services to higher layers. The access to these servicesis through the use of transport channels via the MAC sub-layer. The physical layer is expectedto perform the following functions in order to provide the data transport service.

• Macrodiversity distribution, combining and soft handover execution.• Error detection on transport channels and indication to higher layers.• FEC encoding/decoding of transport channels.• Multiplexing of transport channels and demultiplexing of coded composite

transport channels (CCTrCHs).• Rate matching of coded transport channels to physical channels.• Mapping of coded composite transport channels on physical channels.• Power weighting and combining of physical channels.• Modulation and spreading/demodulation and despreading of physical channels.• Frequency and time (chip, bit, slot, frame) synchronisation.• Radio characteristics measurements including FER, SIR, Interference Power,

etc., and indication to higher layers.• Inner - loop power control.• RF processing.

When network elements (UEs and network) provide compatible service bearers (for examplesupport a speech bearer) they should be assured of successful interworking. Moreover,different implementation options of the same (optional) feature would lead to incompatibilitybetween UE and network. Therefore, this shall be avoided.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Physical Layer Services Version 1 Rev 0

Physical Layer Services

Macrodiversity distribution, combining and soft handover execution.Error detection on transport channels.FEC encoding & decoding of transport channels.Mux & Demux of transport channels and CCTrCHs.Rate matching of coded transport channels to physical channels.Mapping of coded composite transport channels on physical channels.Power weighting and combining of physical channels.Modulation demodulation and spreading of physical channels.Frequency and time synchronisation.Radio characteristics measurements.Inner - loop power control.RF processing.


7-5

Version 1 Rev 0 QPSK

QPSKThe modulation scheme used in W-CDMA is quadrature phase shift keying (PSK) whichallows 2 bits to be sent per symbol (I and Q). The reason for using QPSK is that it is fairlyresilient to amplitude variations. The major problem with CDMA is that all users are onthe same frequency and thus interfering with each other.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

QPSK Version 1 Rev 0

QPSK

QPSK

(0,0)

I

QQ

2 bits per symbol

(0,1)

(1,0)(1,1)


7-7

Version 1 Rev 0 Structure of Transmission

Structure of TransmissionThe physical layer receives information, on a transport channel, as Transport Blocks (or TransportBlock sets) from Layer 2. This information will consist of User Plane or Control Plane streams. Inaddition the physical layer will generate Layer 1 control information, used to maintain the radiobearer between the UE and the UTRAN. This layer 1 control information must be transmittedon the physical channel along with the transport channel information.

As previously discussed, even when FDD mode is in use, a radio frame/timeslot structure isobserved. (A 10 ms radio frame is divided into 15 timeslots). Though it is important to note thatany given radio bearer is able to use all timeslots in every radio frame.

Downlink TransmissionOn the downlink each timeslot will contain transport channel information and Layer 1 controlinformation in time-multiplex. Each timeslot will contain fields supporting transport block information,interspersed with Layer 1 control fields. The exact structure of the fields is dependent upon thetype of physical channel in use, and is described in detail later in this chapter.

Uplink TransmissionOn the Uplink a time-multiplex structure is not practical as Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)is frequently employed. The combination of DTX and Time-multiplex would result in a "Bursty"transmission, which would generate audio band noise perceptible to the other party in a voice call.

To overcome this problem, the transport channel information and Layer 1 control informationare I/Q code multiplexed within each timeslot, allowing them to be transmitted in parallel.This make the transmission of Layer 1 control information continuous and hence preventsbursty transmission, even when DTX is applied.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Structure of Transmission Version 1 Rev 0

Structure of Transmission

Q

I


7-9

Version 1 Rev 0 Channel Locations

Channel LocationsThe radio interface is the section of the network between the UE and the Network. This section ofthe network is where the biggest limitation lies at the moment, it is the most vulnerable section andtherefore very complex methods have to be invented in order to transmit the required data at the highspeeds that is demanded of today’s networks. The radio interface is composed of Layers 1, 2 and 3.

The slide opposite shows the UTRA radio interface protocol architecture around the physicallayer (Layer 1). The physical layer interfaces with the Medium Access Control (MAC) sub-layerof Layer 2 and the Radio Resource Control (RRC) Layer of Layer 3.

The physical layer offers different Transport channels to MAC. A transport channel is characterizedby how the information is transferred over the radio interface.

MAC offers different Logical channels to the Radio Link Control (RLC) sub-layer of Layer2. The type of information transferred characterizes a logical channel.

Physical channels are defined in the physical layer. In FDD mode, physical channels are defined by aspecific carrier frequency, scrambling code, channelization code (optional), time start and stop (givingduration) and, on the uplink, relative phase (0 or π/[Symbol_ps2]). In the TDD mode the physicalchannels is also characterized by the timeslot. The physical layer is controlled by RRC.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Channel Locations Version 1 Rev 0

Channel Locations

Layer 2

Layer 1

Logical Channels

Transport Channels

Physical Channels

MAC

Physical Layer

UE

RLCLayer 2


7-11

Version 1 Rev 0 Channels on the Air Interface

Channels on the Air InterfaceThe diagram opposite shows the most common channels used on the air interface. Thechannels are divided horizontally into the Physical Channels (PCHs), the Transport Channels(TCHs) and the Logical Channels (LCHs). Vertically they are divided into 2 channel types,the Dedicated Channels and the Common Channels. Dedicated Channels are dedicated toone UE only and Common Channels can be shared by multiple UEs.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Channels on the Air Interface Version 1 Rev 0

Channels on the Air InterfaceDCCH DTCH BCCH PCCH CCCH CTCH

PTM

LogicalChannels

CCH

BCH PCH FACH RACH

DCHTransportChannels

PDCH PCCH

DPDCH DPCCH

P-CCPCH S-CCPCH PRACH SCH CPICH AICHPICH

P-SCH S-SCH Primary Secondary

PhysicalChannels


7-13

Version 1 Rev 0 Logical Channels

Logical ChannelsThe MAC layer provides data transfer services on logical channels. A set of logical channeltypes is defined for different kinds of data transfer services as offered by MAC. Each logicalchannel type is defined by what type of information is transferred.

A general classification of logical channels is into two groups:

• Control Channels (for the transfer of control plane information).• Traffic Channels (for the transfer of user plane information).

Control Channels

Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH)

A downlink channel for broadcasting system control information.

Paging Control Channel (PCCH)

A downlink channel that transfers paging information. This channel is used when thenetwork does not know the location cell of the UE, or, the UE is in the cell connectedstate (utilising UE sleep mode procedures).

Common Control Channel (CCCH)

Bi-directional channel for transmitting control information between network and UEs. This channelis commonly used by the UEs having no RRC connection with the network and by the UEs usingcommon transport channels when accessing a new cell after cell reselection.

Dedicated Control Channel (DCCH)

A point-to-point bi-directional channel that transmits dedicated control information between a UEand the network. This channel is established through RRC connection set-up procedure.

Traffic Channels

Dedicated Traffic Channel (DTCH)

A Dedicated Traffic Channel (DTCH) is a point-to-point channel, dedicated to one UE, for thetransfer of user information. A DTCH can exist in both uplink and downlink.

Common Traffic Channel (CTCH)

A point-to-multipoint unidirectional channel for transfer of dedicated user informationfor all or a group of specified UEs.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Logical Channels Version 1 Rev 0

Logical Channels

DCCH DTCH BCCH PCCH CCCH CTCH

Between MAC and RLC

U-RNTI PTM


7-15

Version 1 Rev 0 Transport Channels

Transport ChannelsThe physical layer offers information transfer services to MAC and higher layers. Thephysical layer transport services are described by how and with what characteristics datais transferred over the radio interface. An adequate term for this is ’Transport Channel’. Ageneral classification of transport channels is into two groups:

• Common transport channels (where there is a need for inband identification ofthe UEs when particular UEs are addressed.

• Dedicated transport channels (where the UEs are identified by the physical channel, i.e.code and frequency for FDD and code, time slot and frequency for TDD).

Random Access Channel (RACH)A contention based uplink channel used for transmission of relatively small amounts of data,e.g. for initial access or non-real-time dedicated control or traffic data.

Forward Access Channel (FACH)Common downlink channel without closed-loop power control used for transmissionof relatively small amount of data.

Broadcast Channel (BCH)A downlink channel used for broadcast of system information into an entire cell.

Paging Channel (PCH)A downlink channel used for broadcast of control information into an entire cell allowing efficientUE sleep mode procedures. Currently identified information types are paging and notification.Another use could be UTRAN notification of change of BCCH information.

Dedicated Channel (DCH)A channel dedicated to one UE used in uplink or downlink.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Transport Channels Version 1 Rev 0

Transport ChannelsBetween the Physical Layer and MAC

CCH

BCH PCH FACH RACHDCH


7-17

Version 1 Rev 0 Physical Channels

Physical Channels

Common Physical Channels (CPCHs)

P-SCH ;S-SCH

Primary Synchronisation Channel; Secondary SynchronisationChannel

Synchronisation to the network

P-CCPCH Primary Common Control Physical Channel

Cell Information and Frequency info

S-CCPCH Secondary Common Control Physical Channel

Paging Information and Transfer of small amounts of user data. Downlinkonly.

PRACH Physical Random Access Channel

Initial message when UE wants to gain access to the network; Transfer ofsmall amounts of data; Uplink only

PICH Paging Indicator Channel

Provides UEs with efficient sleep mode operation

AICH Acquisition Indicator Channel

Acknowledges an effective request for access after preamble has beensend up

P-CPICH;S-CPICH

Primary Common Pilot Indicator Channel; Secondary Pilot IndicatorChannel

Helps with channel estimation and shows the attractiveness of the cell

DPDCH/DPCCH Dedicated Physical Channels

Uplink and downlink control and data information; Dedicated to a singleuser


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Physical Channels Version 1 Rev 0

Physical Channels

PDCH PCCH

DPDCH DPCCH

P-CCPCH S-CCPCH PRACH SCH CPICH AICHPICH

P-SCH S-SCH Primary Secondary


7-19

Version 1 Rev 0 Channel Mapping

Channel MappingThe diagram opposite summarises the mapping of logical channels onto transportchannels, and transport channels onto physical channels.

The DCHs are coded and multiplexed, as described later in this chapter, and the resulting datastream is mapped sequentially (first-in-first-mapped) directly to the physical channel(s).

The mapping of BCH and FACH/PCH is equally straightforward, where the data stream after codingand interleaving is mapped sequentially to the Primary and Secondary CCPCH respectively. Notethat the BCCH logical channel can be mapped to both BCH and FACH, so as to be available to idlemode and connected mode UEs respectively. Also for the RACH, the coded and interleaved bits aresequentially mapped to the physical channel, in this case the message part of the PRACH.

Physical signalsPhysical signals are entities with the same basic on-air attributes as physical channels but do nothave transport channels or indicators mapped to them. Physical signals may be associated withphysical channels in order to support the function of physical channels. SCH, CPICH, and AICHare classified as physical signals and hence are not shown on the diagram opposite.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Channel Mapping Version 1 Rev 0

Channel Mapping

CTCHCCCHBCCHPCCHDCCHDTCH

DCCHDTCH

CCCH

FACHBCHPCH DCH

PrimaryCCPCH

SecCCPCH

DPDCHDPCCH

DPDCHDPCCH

PRACH

DCHRACH

Uplink Downlink

PagingControlChannel

BroadcastControChannel

CommonControlChannel

CommonTrafficChannel

DedicatedControl ChannelDedicatedTraffic Channel


7-21

Version 1 Rev 0 Generic Frame Structure

Generic Frame StructureThe diagram opposite illustrates the generic frame structure, use to delimit the transferof units of information on the UMTS air interface.

Radio FrameAs previously outlined the basic unit of the air interface is the radio frame. A radio frame is defined as ’aprocessing duration which consists of 15 timeslots’. The length of a radio frame corresponds to 38,400chips." With a system chip rate of 3.84 Mcps being employed, a radio frame thus has a duration of 10 ms.

System FrameSeveral physical layer procedures (e.g. Paging and Random Access) span more than a singleframe. To accommodate these procedures, a system frame is defined. The frame within thesystem frame structure is identified by a System Frame Number (SFN), which is a 12 bitbinary number, thus a System Frame can consist of 4096 frames.

TimeslotEach radio frame consists of 15 timeslots. A slot duration consists of fields containing bits.The length of the slot always corresponds to 2560 chips. The time duration of a timeslotis approximately 666 µs. The number of fields within each timeslot is dependent upon thephysical channel in use. Similarly the number of bits which can be accommodate by a timeslotis dependent upon the spreading factor in use for that physical channel.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Generic Frame Structure Version 1 Rev 0

Generic Frame Structure

Time Slot = 2560 chips

TS0 TS1 TSn

Frame1

Framen

TS13 TS14

Frame4094

Frame4095

10ms

666μs

SLOT

FRAME

SYSTEM FRAME

40.96 secs


7-23

Version 1 Rev 0 Synchronisation Channel (SCH)

Synchronisation Channel (SCH)The Synchronisation Channel (SCH) is a downlink signal used for cell search. The SCHconsists of two sub channels, the Primary and Secondary SCH. The 10 ms radio frames ofthe Primary and Secondary SCH are divided into 15 slots, each of length 2560 chips. Thediagram opposite illustrates the structure of the SCH radio frame.

The Primary SCHThe Primary SCH consists of a modulated code of length 256 chips, the PrimarySynchronisation Code (PSC) denoted cp in the diagram, transmitted once every slot.The PSC is the same for every cell in the system.

The Secondary SCHThe Secondary SCH consists of repeatedly transmitting a length 15 sequence of modulated codesof length 256 chips, the Secondary Synchronisation Codes (SSC), transmitted in parallel withthe Primary SCH. The SSC is denoted cs

i,k in the diagram, where i = 0, 1, …, 63 is the numberof the scrambling code group, and k = 0, 1, …, 14 is the slot number. Each SSC is chosenfrom a set of 16 different codes of length 256. This sequence on the Secondary SCH indicateswhich of the code groups the cell’s downlink scrambling code belongs to.

Modulation Symbol "a"The primary and secondary synchronization codes are modulated by the symbol a shownin the diagram, which indicates the presence/ absence of Space Time Transmit Diversity(STTD) encoding on the P-CCPCH and is given by the following table:

P-CCPCH STTD encoded a = +1

P-CCPCH not STTD encoded a = -1


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Synchronisation Channel (SCH) Version 1 Rev 0

Synchronisation Channel (SCH)

acp

acsi,0

acp

acsi,1

acp

acsi,2

acp

acsi,3

acp

acsi,14

Tslot = 2560 chips

256 chips

PrimarySCH

SecondarySCH

One 10ms SCH radio frame


7-25

Version 1 Rev 0 Synchronisation (Cell Search) Procedure

Synchronisation (Cell Search) ProcedureDuring the cell search, the UE searches for a cell and determines the downlink scrambling code andframe synchronisation of that cell. The cell search is typically carried out in three steps:

Step 1: Slot synchronisationDuring the first step of the cell search procedure the UE uses the SCH’s primary synchronisationcode to acquire slot synchronisation to a cell. This is typically done with a single matched filter (orany similar device) matched to the primary synchronisation code which is common to all cells. Theslot timing of the cell can be obtained by detecting peaks in the matched filter output.

Step 2: Frame synchronisation and code-group identificationDuring the second step of the cell search procedure, the UE uses the SCH’s secondary synchronisationcode to find frame synchronisation and identify the code group of the cell found in the first step.This is done by correlating the received signal with all possible secondary synchronisation codesequences, and identifying the maximum correlation value. Since the cyclic shifts of the sequencesare unique the code group as well as the frame synchronisation is determined.

Step 3: Scrambling-code identificationDuring the third and last step of the cell search procedure, the UE determines the exact primaryscrambling code used by the found cell. The primary scrambling code is typically identified throughsymbol-by-symbol correlation over the CPICH with all codes within the code group identified inthe second step. After the primary scrambling code has been identified, the Primary CCPCHcan be detected, and the system and cell specific BCH information can be read.

If the UE has received information about which scrambling codes to search for,steps 2 and 3 above can be simplified.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Synchronisation (Cell Search) Procedure Version 1 Rev 0

Synchronisation (Cell Search) Procedure

Synchronisation

ScramblingCodeGroup

slot number

#0 #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11 #12 #13 #14

Group 0 1 1 2 8 9 10 15 8 10 16 2 7 15 7 16

Group 1 1 1 5 16 7 3 14 16 3 10 5 12 14 12 10

Group 2 1 2 1 15 5 5 12 16 6 11 2 16 11 15 12

Group 3 1 2 3 1 8 6 5 2 5 8 4 4 6 3 7

Group 4 1 2 16 6 6 11 15 5 12 1 15 12 16 11 2

Group 5 1 3 4 7 4 1 5 5 3 6 2 8 7 6 8

Group 6 1 4 11 3 4 10 9 2 11 2 10 12 12 9 3

Group 7 1 5 6 6 14 9 10 2 13 9 2 5 14 1 13

Group 8 1 6 10 10 4 11 7 13 16 11 13 6 4 1 16

Group 9 1 6 13 2 14 2 6 5 5 13 10 9 1 14 10

Group 10 1 7 8 5 7 2 4 3 8 3 2 6 6 4 5

Group 11 1 7 10 9 16 7 9 15 1 8 16 8 15 2 2

Group 12 1 8 12 9 9 4 13 16 5 1 13 5 12 4 8

Group 13 1 8 14 10 14 1 15 15 8 5 11 4 10 5 4

Group 14 1 9 2 15 15 16 10 7 8 1 10 8 2 16 9

Group 15 1 9 15 6 16 2 13 14 10 11 7 4 5 12 3

Group 16 1 10 9 11 15 7 6 4 16 5 2 12 13 3 14

Group 17 1 11 14 4 13 2 9 10 12 16 8 5 3 15 6

Group 18 1 12 12 13 14 7 2 8 14 2 1 13 11 8 11

Group 19 1 12 15 5 4 14 3 16 7 8 6 2 10 11 13

Group 20 1 15 4 3 7 6 10 13 12 5 14 16 8 2 11

Group 21 1 16 3 12 11 9 13 5 8 2 14 7 4 10 15

Group 22 2 2 5 10 16 11 3 10 11 8 5 13 3 13 8

Group 23 2 2 12 3 15 5 8 3 5 14 12 9 8 9 14

Group 24 2 3 6 16 12 16 3 13 13 6 7 9 2 12 7

Group 25 2 3 8 2 9 15 14 3 14 9 5 5 15 8 12

Group 26 2 4 7 9 5 4 9 11 2 14 5 14 11 16 16

Group 27 2 4 13 12 12 7 15 10 5 2 15 5 13 7 4

Group 28 2 5 9 9 3 12 8 14 15 12 14 5 3 2 15

Group 29 2 5 11 7 2 11 9 4 16 7 16 9 14 14 4

Group 30 2 6 2 13 3 3 12 9 7 16 6 9 16 13 12

Group 31 2 6 9 7 7 16 13 3 12 2 13 12 9 16 6


7-27


Synchronisation (Cell Search) ProcedureScramblingCode

Groupslot number

#0 #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11 #12 #13 #14

Group 32 2 7 12 15 2 12 4 10 13 15 13 4 5 5 10

Group 33 2 7 14 16 5 9 2 9 16 11 11 5 7 4 14

Group 34 2 8 5 12 5 2 14 14 8 15 3 9 12 15 9

Group 35 2 9 13 4 2 13 8 11 6 4 6 8 15 15 11

Group 36 2 10 3 2 13 16 8 10 8 13 11 11 16 3 5

Group 37 2 11 15 3 11 6 14 10 15 10 6 7 7 14 3

Group 38 2 16 4 5 16 14 7 11 4 11 14 9 9 7 5

Group 39 3 3 4 6 11 12 13 6 12 14 4 5 13 5 14

Group 40 3 3 6 5 16 9 15 5 9 10 6 4 15 4 10

Group 41 3 4 5 14 4 6 12 13 5 13 6 11 11 12 14

Group 42 3 4 9 16 10 4 16 15 3 5 10 5 15 6 6

Group 43 3 4 16 10 5 10 4 9 9 16 15 6 3 5 15

Group 44 3 5 12 11 14 5 11 13 3 6 14 6 13 4 4

Group 45 3 6 4 10 6 5 9 15 4 15 5 16 16 9 10

Group 46 3 7 8 8 16 11 12 4 15 11 4 7 16 3 15

Group 47 3 7 16 11 4 15 3 15 11 12 12 4 7 8 16

Group 48 3 8 7 15 4 8 15 12 3 16 4 16 12 11 11

Group 49 3 8 15 4 16 4 8 7 7 15 12 11 3 16 12

Group 50 3 10 10 15 16 5 4 6 16 4 3 15 9 6 9

Group 51 3 13 11 5 4 12 4 11 6 6 5 3 14 13 12

Group 52 3 14 7 9 14 10 13 8 7 8 10 4 4 13 9

Group 53 5 5 8 14 16 13 6 14 13 7 8 15 6 15 7

Group 54 5 6 11 7 10 8 5 8 7 12 12 10 6 9 11

Group 55 5 6 13 8 13 5 7 7 6 16 14 15 8 16 15

Group 56 5 7 9 10 7 11 6 12 9 12 11 8 8 6 10

Group 57 5 9 6 8 10 9 8 12 5 11 10 11 12 7 7

Group 58 5 10 10 12 8 11 9 7 8 9 5 12 6 7 6

Group 59 5 10 12 6 5 12 8 9 7 6 7 8 11 11 9

Group 60 5 13 15 15 14 8 6 7 16 8 7 13 14 5 16

Group 61 9 10 13 10 11 15 15 9 16 12 14 13 16 14 11

Group 62 9 11 12 15 12 9 13 13 11 14 10 16 15 14 16

Group 63 9 12 10 15 13 14 9 14 15 11 11 13 12 16 10


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002




©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Version 1 Rev 0 Common Pilot Channel (CPICH)

Common Pilot Channel (CPICH)The CPICH is a fixed rate (30 kbps, SF=256) downlink physical channel that carries a pre-definedbit/symbol sequence. The diagram opposite shows the frame structure of the CPICH.

In case transmit diversity (open or closed loop) is used on any downlink channel in the cell, theCPICH shall be transmitted from both antennas using the same channelization and scramblingcode. In this case, the pre-defined symbol sequence of the CPICH is different for Antenna1 and Antenna 2, see lower diagram opposite. In case of no transmit diversity, the symbolsequence of Antenna 1 in the lower diagram opposite is used.

There are two types of Common pilot channels, the Primary and Secondary CPICH. Theydiffer in their use and the limitations placed on their physical features.

Primary Common Pilot Channel (P-CPICH)The Primary Common Pilot Channel (P-CPICH) has the following characteristics:

• The same channelization code is always used for the P-CPICH (SF=256,0).• The P-CPICH is scrambled by the primary scrambling code.• There is one and only one P-CPICH per cell.• The P-CPICH is broadcast over the entire cell.

The Primary CPICH is the phase reference for the following downlink channels:SCH, Primary CCPCH, AICH, PICH. The Primary CPICH is also the default phasereference for all other downlink physical channels.

Secondary Common Pilot Channel (S-CPICH)A Secondary Common Pilot Channel (S-CPICH) has the following characteristics:

An arbitrary channelization code of SF=256 is used for the S-CPICH.

A S-CPICH is scrambled by either the primary or a secondary scrambling code.

There may be zero, one, or several S-CPICH per cell.

A S-CPICH may be transmitted over the entire cell or only over a part of the cell.

A Secondary CPICH may be the reference for the Secondary CCPCH and the downlink DPCH.If this is the case, the UE is informed about this by higher-layer signalling.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Common Pilot Channel (CPICH) Version 1 Rev 0

Common Pilot Channel (CPICH)Frame Structure

A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Antenna 1

Antenna 2 -A -A -A A -A -A A -A A A-A -A AA-A -A A A -A -A A A -A

slot #14 slot #0 slot #1

Frame#iFrame Boundary

Frame#i+1

Slot #0 Slot #1 Slot #i Slot #14

Pre-defined symbol sequence

Tslot = 2560 chips, 20 bits = 10 symbols

1 radio frame: Tf = 10ms

Modulation Pattern for Common Pilot Channel


7-31

Version 1 Rev 0 P-CCPCH Frame Structure

P-CCPCH Frame StructureThe Primary CCPCH is a fixed rate (30 kbps, SF=256) downlink physical channels used to carry the BCH.

The frame structure of the Primary CCPCH is illustrated opposite.

The frame structure differs from the downlink DPCH in that no Transmit Power Control(TPC) commands, no Transport Format Combination Indicator (TFCI) and no pilot bits aretransmitted The Primary CCPCH is not transmitted during the first 256 chips of each slot. Instead,Primary SCH and Secondary SCH are transmitted during this period.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

P-CCPCH Frame Structure Version 1 Rev 0

P-CCPCH Frame Structure


Data18 bits

Tslot = 2560 chips, 20 bits

Tf = 10ms

(Tx OFF)

256 chips


7-33

Version 1 Rev 0 SCH and P-CCPCH

SCH and P-CCPCHThe diagram opposite shows the construction of the SCH and the P-CCPCH. It is thus clearthat different channels can be multiplexed onto one link. The structure of these 2 PhysicalChannels are very important to the synchronization process.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

SCH and P-CCPCH Version 1 Rev 0

SCH and P-CCPCH

Frame 0

Data on P-CCPCH

SCH

Frame 1

Data on P-CCPCH Data on P-CCPCH

Frame 2

SCHSCH


7-35

Version 1 Rev 0 Paging Indicator Channel (PICH)

Paging Indicator Channel (PICH)

PICH Channel Structure.The Paging Indicator Channel (PICH) is a fixed rate (SF=256) physical channel usedto carry the Paging Indicators (PI). The PICH is always associated with a S-CCPCHto which a PCH transport channel is mapped.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Paging Indicator Channel (PICH) Version 1 Rev 0


One radio frame (10ms)

288 bits for paging indication

b0

12 bits (transmission off)

b1 b287b288 b299


7-37

Version 1 Rev 0 Paging Indicator Channel (PICH)


Discontinuous Reception (DRX) on the PICHThe PICH Channel is used to alert the mobile that a possible paging message will be broadcast toit on the PCH channel. Each mobile will calculate a paging occasion, which it listens to for such analert. In order to save on UE battery life the time between monitoring the paging occasions canbe altered, also the number of paging indicators per frame that carry the alerts may be configured.These settings are all broadcast in the cell system information messages.

The main parameters that determine the time between the UE monitoring itspaging indicator are as follows:

DRX Cycle length.

The DRX Cycle Length is made up of a number of system Frames (each 10ms duration). It is thisperiod that determines how long the mobile is actually in DRX mode thus conserving battery power.The cycle is repeated continuously and the UE must only become active once during each cycle.The duration of the cycle is variable and maybe altered to suit network conditions.

Paging Occasion.

The Paging Occasion determines the frame number the UE becomes active in, during the DRX Cycle.

Paging Indicator.

The Paging Indicator is repeated multiple times per system frame. The UE calculates whichpaging indicator to listen to using network-determined parameters.

The mobile listens to the system information messages to obtain the parameters required for receivingpaging indicators in the selected cell. It then performs a standard calculation using the cell parametersand its IMSI. The result of this calculation is a single paging indicator during the DRX cycle time. Inother words the mobile must power up and listen to the calculated paging indicator (now know asits paging occasion) between a repetition period of 80ms to 5.12s (DRX Cycle Period).

The diagram opposite illustrates the frame structure of the PICH.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Paging Indicator Channel (PICH) Version 1 Rev 0


Frame. 10s

DRX Cycle, 80s to 5.12s

Paging Indicators 18,36,72 or 144 per 10msecs PICH Frame.

Calculated Paging OccasionUE is in DRX until this Paging Indicator


7-39

Version 1 Rev 0 Secondary Common Control Physical Channel (S-CCPCH)

Secondary Common Control Physical Channel (S-CCPCH)The Secondary CCPCH is used to carry the FACH and PCH. There are two types of SecondaryCCPCH: those that include TFCI and those that do not include TFCI. It is the UTRAN thatdetermines if a TFCI should be transmitted, hence making it mandatory for all UEs to support theuse of TFCI. The set of possible rates for the Secondary CCPCH is the same as for the downlinkDPCH. The frame structure of the Secondary CCPCH is shown opposite.

The parameter k in the diagram determines the total number of bits per downlink Secondary CCPCHslot. It is related to the spreading factor SF of the physical channel as SF = 256/2k. The spreading factorrange is from 256 down to 4. The values for the number of bits per field are given in the table opposite.The channel bit and symbol rates given in the table are the rates immediately before spreading.

The FACH and PCH can be mapped to the same or to separate Secondary CCPCHs. If FACH andPCH are mapped to the same Secondary CCPCH, they can be mapped to the same frame.

The main difference between a CCPCH and a downlink dedicated physical channel isthat a CCPCH is not inner-loop power controlled.

The main difference between the Primary and Secondary CCPCH is that the transport channelmapped to the Primary CCPCH (BCH) can only have a fixed predefined transport formatcombination, while the Secondary CCPCH support multiple transport format combinations usingTFCI. Furthermore, a Primary CCPCH is transmitted over the entire cell while a SecondaryCCPCH may be transmitted in a narrow lobe in the same way as a dedicated physicalchannel (only valid for a Secondary CCPCH carrying the FACH).

For slot formats using TFCI, the TFCI value in each radio frame corresponds to a certaintransport format combination of the FACHs and/or PCHs currently in use. This correspondenceis (re-)negotiated at each FACH/PCH addition/removal.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Secondary Common Control Physical Channel (S-CCPCH) Version 1 Rev 0

Secondary Common Control Physical Channel (S-CCPCH)


DataNdatabits

PilotNpilotbits

TFCINTFCIbits

Tslot = 2560 chips, 20*2kbits (k = 0..6)

1 radio frame: Tf = 10ms

Secondary CCPCH Fields

SlotFormat

#i

ChannelBit Rate(kbps)

ChannelSymbol Rate

(ksps)

SF Bits/Frame

Bits/Slot

Ndata Npilot NTFCI

0 30 15 256 300 20 20 0 0

1 30 15 256 300 20 12 8 0

2 30 15 256 300 20 18 0 2

3 30 15 256 300 20 10 8 2

4 60 30 128 600 40 40 0 0

5 60 30 128 600 40 32 8 0

6 60 30 128 600 40 38 0 2

7 60 30 128 600 40 30 8 2

8 120 60 64 1200 80 72 0 8*

9 120 60 64 1200 80 64 8 8*

10 240 120 32 2400 160 152 0 8*

11 240 120 32 2400 160 144 8 8*

12 480 240 16 4800 320 312 0 8*

13 480 240 16 4800 320 296 16 8*

14 960 480 8 9600 640 632 0 8*

15 960 480 8 9600 640 616 16 8*

16 1920 960 4 19200 1280 1272 0 8*

17 1920 960 4 19200 1280 1256 16 8*

* If TFCI bits are not used, then DTX shall be used in TFCI field.


7-41

Version 1 Rev 0 Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH)

Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH)

Structure of the PRACHThe random-access transmission is based on a Slotted ALOHA approach with fast acquisition indication.The UE can start the random-access transmission at the beginning of a number of well-defined timeintervals, denoted access slots. There are 15 access slots per two frames and they are spaced 5120chips apart, see diagram opposite. Information on what access slots are available for random-accesstransmission is given by higher layers and is based upon the Access Service Class (ASC) of the UE

Random Access TransmissionThe structure of the random-access transmission is also shown opposite. Therandom-access transmission consists of one or several preambles of length 4096chips and a message of length 10ms or 20ms.

PRACH Pre-ambleEach preamble is of length 4096 chips and consists of 256 repetitions of a signature oflength 16 chips. There are a maximum of 16 available signatures


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) Version 1 Rev 0

Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH)RACH access slot numbers and their spacing

#0 #13#12#11#10#9#8#7#6#5#4#3#2#1 #14

5120chips

Access slot

radio frame: 10ms radio frame: 10ms

Random Access Transmission




Structure of the random-access transmission

Message part

10ms (one radio frame)

Message part

20ms (two radio frames)

PreamblePreamblePreamble

4096 chips

PreamblePreamblePreamble

4096 chips


7-43

Version 1 Rev 0 Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH)


Structure of PRACH Message PartThe structure of the Random-access message part is shown opposite. The 10ms messageis split into 15 slots, each of length Tslot = 2560 chips. Each slot consists of two parts,a data part that carries Layer 2 information and a control part that carries Layer 1 controlinformation. The data and control parts are transmitted in parallel.

The data part consists of 10*2k bits, where k=0,1,2,4. This corresponds to a spreadingfactor of 256, 128, 64, and 32 respectively for the message data part. The value for thenumber of bits in the data field are given in the table opposite.

The control part consists of 8 known pilot bits to support channel estimation for coherent detectionand 2 TFCI bits. This corresponds to a spreading factor of 256 for the message control part.The total number of TFCI bits in the random-access message is 15*2 = 30. The TFCI valuecorresponds to a certain transport format of the current Random-access message.

The Random Access Channel(s) (RACH) is characterised by:

• Existence in uplink only• Limited data field• Collision risk• Open loop power control


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) Version 1 Rev 0



DataNdatabits

PilotNpilotbits

TFCINTFCIbits


Message part radio frame TRACH = 10ms

Data

Control

Slot Format #i Channel BitRate (kbps)

ChannelSymbol Rate

(ksps)

SFBits/

FrameBits/Slot Ndata

0 15 15 256 1010150

1 30 30 128 2020300

2 60 60 64 4040600

3 120 120 32 80801200

Random-access message data fields


7-45

Version 1 Rev 0 Acquisition Indicator Channel (AICH)

Acquisition Indicator Channel (AICH)The Acquisition Indicator Channel (AICH) is a fixed rate (SF=256) physical channel used to carryAcquisition Indicators (AI). Acquisition Indicator AIs corresponds to signature s on the PRACH.

The diagram opposite illustrates the structure of the AICH.

The AICH consists of a repeated sequence of 15 consecutive access slots (AS), each of length5120 chips. Each access slot consists of two parts, an Acquisition-Indicator (AI) part consistingof 32 real-valued symbols a0, …, a31 and a part of duration 1024 chips with no transmissionthat is not formally part of the AICH. The part of the slot with no transmission is reserved forpossible use by CSICH or possible future use by other physical channels.

The spreading factor (SF) used for channelization of the AICH is 256.

The phase reference for the AICH is the Primary CPICH.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Acquisition Indicator Channel (AICH) Version 1 Rev 0

Acquisition Indicator Channel (AICH)

AS # 14 AS # 0 AS # 1 AS # i AS # 14 AS # 0

20ms

a0 a31a30a2a1 Transmission Off

Al part = 4096 chips, 32 real-valued symbols 1024 chips


7-47

Version 1 Rev 0 Relationship Between PRACH and AICH

Relationship Between PRACH and AICHThe PRACH contains two sets of access slots as shown below. Access slot set 1 containsPRACH slots 0 - 7 and starts τp-a chips before the downlink P-CCPCH frame for which SFNmod 2 = 0. Access slot set 2 contains PRACH slots 8 - 14 and starts (τp-a -2560) chipsbefore the downlink P-CCPCH frame for which SFN mod 2 = 1.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Relationship Between PRACH and AICH Version 1 Rev 0

Relationship Between PRACH and AICHAICH accessslots

10ms

#0 #1 #2 #3 #14#13#12#11#10#9#8#7#6#5#4Tp-a

#0 #1 #2 #3 #14#13#12#11#10#9#8#7#6#5#4

PRACHaccess slots

SFN mod 2 = 0 SFN mod 2 = 1

10ms

Access slot set 1 Access slot set 2


7-49

Version 1 Rev 0 Downlink Dedicated Physical Channels (DL-DPCH)

Downlink Dedicated Physical Channels (DL-DPCH)

DL-DPCH StructureThere is only one type of downlink dedicated physical channel, the DownlinkDedicated Physical Channel (Downlink DPCH).

Within one Downlink DPCH, dedicated data generated at Layer 2 and above, i.e. the DedicatedTransport Channel (DCH), is transmitted in time-multiplex with control information generated atLayer 1 (known pilot bits, TPC commands, and an optional TFCI). The downlink DPCH can thusbe seen as a time multiplex of a downlink DPDCH and a downlink DPCCH.

The diagram opposite shows the frame structure of the downlink DPCH. Each frame of length10ms is split into 15 slots, each of length Tslot = 2560 chips, corresponding to one power-controlperiod. The parameter k in the diagram determines the total number of bits per downlink DPCHslot. It is related to the spreading factor SF of the physical channel as SF = 512/2k. The spreadingfactor may thus range from 512 down to 4. The exact number of bits of the different downlinkDPCH fields (Npilot, NTPC, NTFCI, Ndata1 and Ndata2) is dependent upon the SF. What slot format touse is configured by higher layers and can also be reconfigured by higher layers.

There are basically two types of downlink Dedicated Physical Channels; those that includeTFCI (e.g. for several simultaneous services) and those that do not include TFCI (e.g. forfixed-rate services). It is the UTRAN that determines if a TFCI should be transmitted and it ismandatory for all UEs to support the use of TFCI in the downlink.

The Pilot bits are provided to permit frame synchronisation and channel estimation at the receiving node.

TPC symbol will indicate a step increase or decrease of transmitter power by the receiving node.

TPC Bit Pattern Transmitter powercontrol command

NTPC = 2 NTPC = 4 NTPC = 8

1100

11110000

1111 111100000000

10


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Downlink Dedicated Physical Channels (DL-DPCH) Version 1 Rev 0



Data 1 TPC TFCI Data 2 Pilot

Npilot bits

DPDCH DPCCH DPDCH DPCCH

One radio frame = 10ms

Tslot = 2560 chips

K = 0.........7


7-51

Version 1 Rev 0 Downlink Dedicated Physical Channels (DL-DPCH)


Downlink Slot Formation in Case of Multi-Code TransmissionFor slot formats using TFCI, the TFCI value in each radio frame corresponds to acertain combination of bit rates of the DCHs currently in use. This correspondenceis re-negotiated at each DCH addition/removal.

When the total bit rate to be transmitted on one downlink CCTrCH exceeds the maximum bit ratefor a downlink physical channel, multicode transmission is employed, i.e. several parallel downlinkDPCHs are transmitted for one CCTrCH using the same spreading factor. In this case, the Layer 1control information is put on only the first downlink DPCH. The additional downlink DPCHs belongingto the CCTrCH do not transmit any data during the corresponding time period.

TFCI Transport Formation Combination Indicator

DCH Dedicated Channel

CCTrCH Coded Composite Transport Channel

DPCH Dedicated Physical Channel

TPC Transmit Power Control


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Downlink Dedicated Physical Channels (DL-DPCH) Version 1 Rev 0


TPC TFCI Pilot

DPDCHDPDCH

One Slot (2560 chips)

Physical Channel 1

Physical Channel L

Physical Channel 2

TransmissionPower

TransmissionPower

TransmissionPower


7-53

Version 1 Rev 0 Uplink Dedicated Physical channels (UL-DPCH)

Uplink Dedicated Physical channels (UL-DPCH)There are two types of uplink dedicated physical channels, the Uplink Dedicated Physical DataChannel (Uplink DPDCH) and the Uplink Dedicated Physical Control Channel (uplink DPCCH).

The DPDCH and the DPCCH are I/Q code multiplexed within each radio frame.

The uplink DPDCH is used to carry the DCH transport channel. There may be zero,one, or several uplink DPDCHs on each radio link.

The uplink DPCCH is used to carry control information generated at Layer 1. The Layer 1 controlinformation consists of known pilot bits to support channel estimation for coherent detection,Transmit Power Control (TPC) commands, Feedback Information (FBI), and an optionalTransport Format Combination Indicator (TFCI). The transport-format combination indicatorinforms the receiver about the instantaneous transport format combination of the transport channelsmapped to the simultaneously transmitted Uplink DPDCH radio frame.

There is one and only one Uplink DPCCH on each radio link.

The diagram opposite shows the frame structure of the Uplink dedicated physicalchannels. Each radio frame of length 10ms is split into 15 slots, each of length Tslot

= 2560 chips, corresponding to one TPC period.

The parameter k in the diagram determines the number of bits per uplink DPDCH slot. It is relatedto the spreading factor SF of the DPDCH as SF = 256/2k. The DPDCH spreading factor may rangefrom 256 down to 4, giving data rates between 15kbs and 960kbs The spreading factor of the uplinkDPCCH is always equal to 256, i.e. there are 10 bits per uplink DPCCH slot. What slot formatto use is configured by higher layers and can also be reconfigured by higher layers.

The FBI bits are used to support techniques requiring feedback from the UE to the UTRAN Access Point,including closed loop mode transmit diversity and Site Selection Diversity Transmission (SSDT).

There are two types of Uplink Dedicated Physical Channels; those that include TFCI (e.g.for several simultaneous services) and those that do not include TFCI (e.g. for fixed-rateservices). It is the UTRAN that determines if a TFCI should be transmitted and it ismandatory for all UEs to support the use of TFCI in the uplink.

Multi-code operation is possible for the uplink Dedicated Physical Channels. When multi-codetransmission is used, several parallel DPDCH are transmitted using different channelizationcodes. However, there is only one DPCCH per radio link.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Uplink Dedicated Physical channels (UL-DPCH) Version 1 Rev 0

Uplink Dedicated Physical channels (UL-DPCH)


DPDCH

DPCCH

DataNdatabits

PilotNpilotbits

TFCINTFCIbits

FBINFBIbits

TPCNTPCbits


Tf = 10ms

K = 0........7


7-55

Version 1 Rev 0 Downlink Flow Process

Downlink Flow ProcessThe downlink flow process consists of the following physical layer functions.

Data arrives to the coding/multiplexing unit in the form of transport block sets onceevery transmission time interval. The transmission time interval is transport-channelspecific from the set {10ms, 20ms, 40ms and 80ms}.

The following coding/multiplexing steps can be identified for downlink:

• Add CRC to each transport block• Transport block concatenation and code block segmentation• Channel coding• Rate matching• First insertion of discontinuous transmission (DTX) indication bits• First interleaving• Radio frame segmentation• Multiplexing of transport channels• Second insertion of DTX indication bits• Physical channel segmentation• Second interleaving• Mapping to physical channels

It should be noted that not every step is applicable to every data type.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Downlink Flow Process Version 1 Rev 0

Downlink Flow Process

PhC

H#2

PhC

H#1

Rate matching

TrBk concatenation /Code block segmentation

1st insertion of DTXindication

CRC attachment

Channel coding

Rate matching

1st interleaving

Radio frame segmentation

2nd insertion of DTXindication

Physical channelsegmentation

2nd interleaving

Physical channel mapping

TrCH Multiplexing

CCTrCH


7-57

Version 1 Rev 0 Uplink Flow Process

Uplink Flow ProcessThe uplink flow process is largely the same as that for the downlink, and is illustrated in thediagram opposite. The differences in the individual process steps are as follows.

Radio Frame EqualisationRadio frame size equalisation is padding the input bit sequence in order to ensure that the output canbe segmented in data segments of equal size. Radio frame size equalisation is only performed in theUL (DL rate matching output block length is always an integer multiple of the frame length).

Rate MatchingThe rate matching operation in the uplink, is a much more dynamic process that may vary on aframe-by-frame basis. The rate matching operation needs to take into account the the number of bitscoming from all transport channels. When the data rate of one service, the dynamic rate matchingadjusts the rates of the remaining service as well so that all symbols in the radio frame will be used.

For example if with two transport channels, one has a momentary zero rate, rate matching used repetitionto increase the symbol rate for the other service sufficiently so that all uplink channel symbols are used.

DTXBecause Uplink rate matching ensures that all unused transport channel bits are filled, thereis no requirement for DTX indication bits to be inserted in the uplink flow


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Uplink Flow Process Version 1 Rev 0

Uplink Flow Process

TrBk concatenation / Code block segmentation

1st interleaving

CRC attachment

Channel coding

Radio Frame equalisation

Radio frame segmentation

Rate matching

TrCH Multiplexing

Rate matching

PhC

H#1

PhC

H#2

Physical channel segmentation

2nd interleaving

Physical channel mapping

CCTrCH


7-59

Version 1 Rev 0 Uplink Flow Process



©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Radio Resource Management Functions Version 1 Rev 0

Chapter 8

Radio Resource ManagementFunctions


8-1

Version 1 Rev 0 Radio Resource Management Functions



©MOTOROLA LTD.2002



• Describe basic Radio Resource and Mobility Management functions.


8-3

Version 1 Rev 0 Radio Resource Management

Radio Resource ManagementRadio Resource Management (RRM) is responsible for the air Interface utilisation. RRMguarantees that services will be provided according to the necessary quality that is expectedfrom the network. It is divided into 5 different sections:

• Cell Selection/Reselection• Handover• Power Control• Admission Control• Load Control


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Radio Resource Management Version 1 Rev 0

Radio Resource Management

Handovers

Power Control

Admission Control

Load Control

Cell Selection / Reselection


8-5

Version 1 Rev 0 UE RRC States

UE RRC StatesThe two basic operational modes of the UE are Idle Mode and Connected Mode. The connected modecan be further divided into service states, which define what kind of physical channels a UE is using.The diagram opposite shows the main RRC service states in the connected Mode. It also shows thetransitions between idle mode and connected mode, and the possible transitions within connected mode.

Idle ModeIn idle mode, after the UE is switched on, it selects (either automatically or manually) a PLMN to contact.The UE looks for a suitable cell of the chosen PLMN, chooses that cell to provide available servicesand tunes to the control channel. This is known as "Camping on a cell". After camping on a cell in idlemode, the UE is able to receive system information messages broadcast from the cell. The UE stays inidle mode until such time as it transmits a request to establish a RRC connection. In Idle mode the UEis identified by IMSI, TMSI and P-TMSI. The UTRAN has no information of its own about individual idlemode UEs and can only address, for example, all UEs in a cell or all UEs monitoring a paging group.-

Connected Mode

Cell DCH

In Cell DCH state a dedicated physical channel is allocated to the UE and the UE is knownby its serving RNC on a cell or active set level. The UE performs measurements and sendsmeasurement reports according to measurement control information received from the RNC.The DSCH can also be used in this state, and UEs with certain capabilities are also ableto monitor the FACH channel for system information messages.

Cell FACH

In Cell FACH state no dedicated channel is allocated to the UE, but the RACH and FACHchannels can be used, both for transferring signalling messages and small amounts of data.In this state the UE is also capable of monitoring the broadcast channel to acquire systeminformation. The CPCH can also be used when instructed by the UTRAN.

In this state the UE performs cell reselections, and after a reselection always sends a Cell Updatemessage to the RNC so the RNC knows the UE location on a cell level. For Identification, a C-RNTIin the MAC PDU header separates UEs from each other in a cell. When the UE performs cellreselection it uses an U-RNTI when sending the Cell Update message, so the UTRAN can routethe message to the current serving RNC of the UE, even if the first RNC receiving the message isnot the current SRNC. The U-RNTI is part of the RRC message, not in the MAC header.

If the new cell belongs to another RAN system, such as GPRS, the UE enters idle mode andaccesses the other system according to that systems access procedure


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

UE RRC States Version 1 Rev 0

UE RRC States

Idle Mode

UTRAN Connected Mode

Cell DCH

Cell FACH

URA PCH

Cell PCH


8-7

Version 1 Rev 0 UE RRC States

UE RRC StatesCell PCH

In the Cell PCH state the UE is still known on a cell level in the SRNC, but it can be reached onlyvia the paging channel. In this state the battery consumption is less than in cell FACH, sincethe monitoring of the paging channel includes a discontinuous reception (DRX) functionality.The UE also listens to system information on the broadcast channel.

A UE supporting the CBS is also capable of receiving BMC message in this state. If the UE performs cellreselection, it moves autonomously to the Cell FACH state to execute the Cell Update procedure, afterwhich it re-enters the Cell PCH state if no other activity is triggered during the Cell Update procedure.

If the new cell belongs to another RAN system, such as GPRS, the UE enters idle mode andaccesses the other system according to that systems’s access procedure

URA PCH

The URA PCH state is very similar to the Cell PCH, except that the UE does not execute CellUpdate after each reselection, but instead reads UTRA Registration Area (URA) identitiesfrom the broadcast channel, and only if the URA changes does the UE pass its location to theSRNC. This is achieved with the URA Update procedure (the UE enters the Cell_FACH stateto execute the procedure and then reverts to the URA PCH state).

One cell can belong to one or many URAs, and only if the UE cannot find its latest URA identificationfrom the list of URAs in a cell does it need to execute the URA Update Procedure. This overlappingURA feature is needed to avoid pin-pong effects in possible network configuration, wheregeographically succeeding base stations are controlled by different RNCs.

The UE leaves the connected mode and returns to idle mode when the RRC connectionis released or at RRC connection failure.

RRC State Change Support via IurAt USR 1.0 support for cell dch on Iur is already supported. From USR 2.0 this support is extended to CellFACH, Cell PCH and URA PCH. Supporting RRC Common Channel States on Iur allows the provisionto facilitate data transfers on rach/fach without incurring a delay involved in an SRNS relocation.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

UE RRC States Version 1 Rev 0

UE RRC States

Idle Mode

UTRAN Connected Mode

Cell DCH

Cell FACH

URA PCH

Cell PCH


8-9

Version 1 Rev 0 Physical Layer Measurements

Physical Layer MeasurementsThe majority of radio resource management functions rely on the exchange of Layer 1measurement reports between the UTRAN and the UE.

To initiate a specific measurement at the UE, the UTRAN transmits a ’measurement controlmessage’ to the UE including a measurement ID and type, a command (setup, modify, release),the measurement objects and quantity, the reporting quantities, criteria (periodical/event-triggered)and mode (acknowledged or unacknowledged). In idle mode the measurement control message isbroadcast in a System Information message. When the reporting criteria is fulfilled the UE shall answerwith a ’measurement report message’ to the UTRAN including the measurement ID and the results.

UE Measurements

CPICH RSCP

Received Signal Code Power, the received power on one code measured on the Primary CPICH.

SIR

Signal to Interference Ratio, defined as: (RSCP/ISCP)×(SF/2). The SIR shall bemeasured on DPCCH after RL combination.

UTRA carrier RSSI

Received Signal Strength Indicator, the wide-band received power within the relevant channelbandwidth. Measurement shall be performed on a UTRAN downlink carrier.

GSM carrier RSSI

Received Signal Strength Indicator, the wide-band received power within the relevant channelbandwidth. Measurement shall be performed on a GSM BCCH carrier.

CPICH Ec/No

The received energy per chip divided by the power density in the band. The Ec/No is identicalto RSCP/RSSI. Measurement shall be performed on the Primary CPICH.

Transport channel BLER

Estimation of the transport channel Block Error Rate (BLER). The BLER estimation shall bebased on evaluating the CRC on each transport block after RL combination.

UE transmitted power

The total UE transmitted power on one carrier.

UE Rx-Tx time difference

The difference in time between the UE uplink DPCCH/DPDCH frame transmission on the firstsignificant path, of the downlink DPCH frame from the measured radio link. Measurementshall be made for each cell included in the active set.

The Observed time difference to GSM

The Observed time difference to GSM cell is defined as: TRxGSMj - TRxSFNi, where:

TRxSFNi is the time at the beginning of the P-CCPCH frame with SFN=0 from cell i.TRxGSMj is the time at the beginning of the GSM BCCH 51-multiframe from GSM frequencyj received closest in time after the time TRxSFNi.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Physical Layer Measurements Version 1 Rev 0

Physical Layer MeasurementsUE Measurements

CPICH RSCP

SIR

UTRA carier RSSI

CPICH Ec/No

Transport channel BLER

UE transmitted power

UE Rx-Tx time difference

The Observed time difference to GSM


8-11

Version 1 Rev 0 Physical Layer Measurements

Physical Layer Measurements

UTRA Measurements

RSSI

Received Signal Strength Indicator, the wide-band received power within the UTRANuplink carrier channel bandwidth in an UTRAN access point.

SIR

Signal to Interference Ratio, is defined as: (RSCP/ISCP)×SF. Measurement shall beperformed on the DPCCH after RL combination in Node B.

Transmitted carrier power

Transmitted carrier power, is the ratio between the total transmitted power and the maximumtransmission power. Total transmission power is the mean power [W] on one carrier from oneUTRAN access point. Maximum transmission power is the mean power [W] on one carrier from oneUTRAN access point when transmitting at the configured maximum power for the cell.

Transmitted code power

Transmitted code power, is the transmitted power on one channelisation code on one given scramblingcode on one given carrier. Measurement shall be possible on the DPCCH-field of any dedicated radio linktransmitted from the UTRAN access point and shall reflect the power on the pilot bits of the DPCCH-field.

Transport channel BER

The transport channel BER is an estimation of the average Bit Error Rate (BER) of RL-combinedDPDCH data. Transport channel BER is only required to be reported for TrCHs that are channel coded.

Physical channel BER

The Physical channel BER is an estimation of the average Bit Error Rate (BER)on the DPCCH after RL combination in Node B.

Round Trip Time

Round Trip Time (RTT), is defined as

RTT = TRX - TTX, where

TTX = The time of transmission of the beginning of a downlink DPCH frame to a UE.

TRX = The time of reception of the beginning (the first significant path) of the correspondinguplink DPCCH/DPDCH frame from the UE.

PRACH Propagation delay

Propagation delay is defined as one-way propagation delay as measured during either PRACH.

Acknowledged PRACH preambles

The Acknowledged PRACH preambles measurement is defined as the total number ofacknowledged PRACH preambles per access frame per PRACH. This is equivalent to the numberof positive acquisition indicators transmitted per access frame per AICH


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Physical Layer Measurements Version 1 Rev 0

Physical Layer MeasurementsUTRA Measurements

RSSI

SIR

Transmitted carrier power

Transmitted code power

Transport channel BER

Physical channel BER

Round trip time

PRACH Propagation delay

Acknowledged PRACH preambles


8-13

Version 1 Rev 0 Compressed Mode

Compressed ModeIn addtion to monitoring Node B’s on the same carrier, the UE must be able to monitor for potential targetresources on other UMTS carriers, and in the case of dual mode UEs on alternative RAN technologies(e.g GSM/GPRS). This will involve at minimum retuning of the UEs receiver elements to a new radiofrequency. As the transfer of information between network and UE is continuous in a CDMA system,time must be "created" for the UE perform this function. This achieved by the use of Compressed Mode.

In compressed mode, time slots from Nfirst to Nlast are not used for transmission of data.Instead, the data that would normally be transmitted during those slots is compressedinto the remaining timeslots within that radio frame.

As illustrated in the figure opposite, the instantaneous transmit power is increased in the compressedframe in order to keep the quality (BER, FER, etc.) unaffected by the reduced processing gain.The amount of power increase depends on the transmission time reduction method What framesare compressed, are decided by the network. When in compressed mode, compressed framescan occur periodically, as illustrated, or requested on demand. The rate and type of compressedframes is variable and depends on the environment and the measurement requirements. Themaximum idle length is defined to be 7 slots per 10ms frame (yielding 4.67ms).

There are three methods of compressing the data:

Compressed mode by puncturingDuring compressed mode, rate matching (puncturing) is applied for creatingtransmission gap in one frame.

Compressed mode by reducing the spreading factor by 2During compressed mode, the Spreading Factor (SF) can be reduced by 2 during one radio frame toenable the transmission of the information bits in the remaining time slots of a compressed frame.

Compressed mode by higher layer schedulingCompressed mode can be obtained by higher layer scheduling. Higher layers then setrestrictions so that only a subset of the allowed TFC’s are used in compressed mode. Themaximum number of bits that will be delivered to the physical layer during the compressedradio frame is then known and a transmission gap can be generated.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Compressed Mode Version 1 Rev 0

Compressed Mode

Transmission gap available for inter-frequency measurements

One frame (10ms)


8-15

Version 1 Rev 0 Cell Selection/Re-selection

Cell Selection/Re-selectionThe goal of the cell selection procedures is to fast find a cell to camp on. To speed upthis process, at "power up" or when returning from "out of coverage", the UE shall startwith the stored information from previous network contacts. If the UE is unable to findany of those cells the initial cell search will be initiated.

If it is not possible to find a cell from a valid PLMN the UE will choose a cell in a forbidden PLMNand enter a "limited service state". In this state the UE regularly attempt to find a suitable cell on avalid PLMN. If a better cell is found the UE has to read the system information for that cell. The cellto camp on is chosen by the UE on link quality basis. However, the network can set cell re-selectionthresholds in order to take other criteria into account, such as, for example:

• available services;• cell load;• UE speed.

In CDMA, it is important to minimise the UE output power, and also to minimise the power consumptionin the UE. In order to achieve that, an ’Immediate Cell Evaluation Procedure’ at call set up can ensurethat the UE transmits with the best cell, while keeping the power consumption low.

Cell Re-selectionThe cell reselection procedure is a procedure to check the best cell to camp on. The evaluation ofthe measurements for this procedure is always active, in idle mode, after the cell selection procedurehas been completed and the first cell has been chosen. The goal of the procedure is to alwayscamp on a cell with good enough quality even if it is not the optimal cell all the time.

It is also possible to have a "time to trigger" and hysteresis criteria in the cell reselection to controlthe number of cell reselections. The parameters needed for the cell reselection procedure (e.g., theoffset value and the hysteresis) are unique on a cell to neighbour cell relation basis. These havetherefore to be distributed, together with time to trigger value, in system information in the servingcell. This implies that the UE does not need to read the system information in the neighbouringcells before the cell reselection procedure finds a neighbouring cell with better quality.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Cell Selection/Re-selection Version 1 Rev 0

Cell Selection/Re-selection

Campednormally

NASregistration

rejected

nosuitable

cellfound

InitialCell Selection

CellReselection

Cell Selectionwhen leaving

connectedmode

StoredInformation

Cell Selection

ConnectedMode

1

go here whenevera new PLMNis selected

cell informationstored for the PLMN

no cell informationstored for the PLMN

no suitablecell found

no suitablecell found

suitable cell found

no suitable cell found

suitable cell found

suitablecell selected

trigger

suitablecell found

return toidle mode

leaveidle mode

Camped onAny Cell

suitablecell found

Any CellReselection

Cell Selectionwhen leaving

connectedmode

ConnectedMode

(Emergencycalls only)

1 USIM inserted

no acceptable cell found

no acceptable cell found

an acceptable cell found

acceptablecell selected

trigger

acceptablecell found

return toidle mode

leaveidle mode

Any CellSelection

1

go here when no USIM in the UE


8-17

Version 1 Rev 0 Macro Diversity

Macro DiversityMacrodiversity provides an improved error correction capability through the use of combining/splittingat the RNC and Node B. Communications will be sent via the Iur interface from the RNC inthe D-RNS to the RNC in the S-RNS and on to the Iu to the core network.

This function controls the duplication/ replication of information streams to receive/ transmit the sameinformation through multiple physical channels from/ towards a single mobile terminal.

This function also controls the combining of information streams generated by a single source (diversitylink), but conveyed via several parallel physical channels (diversity sub-links). Macrodiversity controlshould interact with channel coding control in order to reduce the BER when combining the differentinformation streams. In some cases, depending on physical network configuration, there may beseveral entities that combine the different information streams, i.e. there may be combining/splittingat the S-RNC, D-RNC or Node B level. This function is located in the UTRAN.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Macro Diversity Version 1 Rev 0

Macro Diversity

D-RNS

UTRAN

D-RNS

lu

RNC RNC RNC

S-RNS

Iur Iur


8-19

Version 1 Rev 0 Handover

Handover

Handover StrategyThe handover strategy employed by the network for radio link control determines the handoverdecision that will be made based on the measurement results reported by the UE/RNC and variousparameters set for each cell. Network directed handover might also occur for reasons other than radiolink control, e.g. to control traffic distribution between cells. The network operator will determinethe exact handover strategies. Possible types of Handover are as follows:

• Handover 3G -3G;• FDD soft/softer handover;• FDD inter-frequency hard handover;• FDD/TDD Handover;• TDD/FDD Handover;• TDD/TDD Handover;• Handover 3G - 2G (e.g. Handover to GSM);• Handover 2G - 3G (e.g. Handover from GSM).

Handover CausesThe following is a non-exhaustive list for causes that could be used for the initiation of a handover process.

Uplink quality;

Uplink signal measurements;

Downlink quality;

Downlink signal measurements;

Distance;

Change of service;

Better cell;

O&M intervention;

Directed retry;

Traffic;

Pre-emption


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Handover Version 1 Rev 0

HandoverHandover Strategy Handover Causes

Handover 3G -3G;FDD soft/softer handover;FDD inter-frequency hard handover;FDD/TDD Handover;TDD/FDD Handover;TDD/TDD Handover;Handover 3G - 2G (e.g. Handover to GSM);Handover 2G - 3G (e.g. Handover from GSM).

Uplink quality;Uplink signal measurements;Downlink quality;Downlink signal measurements;Distance;Change of service;Better cell;O&M intervention;Directed retry;Traffic Pre-emption


8-21

Version 1 Rev 0 Soft and Softer Handover

Soft and Softer HandoverSoft Handover is a handover in which the mobile station starts communication with a new Node B on asame carrier frequency, or sector of the same site (softer handover), performing at most a changeof code. For this reason Soft Handover allows easily the provision of macro-diversity transmission.This intrinsic characteristic terminology tends to identify Soft Handover with macro-diversity even ifthey are two different concepts. As a result of this definition there are areas of the UE operationin which the UE is connected to a number of Node B’s. With reference to Soft Handover, the"Active Set" is defined as the set of Node B’s the UE is simultaneously connected to (i.e., theUTRA cells currently assigning a downlink DPCH to the UE constitute the active set).

The Soft Handover procedure is composed of a number of single functions:

• Measurements• Filtering of Measurements• Reporting of Measurement results• The Soft Handover Algorithm• Execution of Handover.

Based on the measurements of the set of cells monitored, the Soft Handover functionevaluates if any Node B should be added to (Radio Link Addition), removed from (RadioLink Removal), or replaced in (Combined Radio Link Addition and Removal) the Active Set.This procedure is known as the "Active Set Update" procedure.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Soft and Softer Handover Version 1 Rev 0

Soft and Softer Handover

Eb/(No + lo)

Time

Tadd

Tdrop

Cell B Cell A

Add ADrop B Relative

Threshold

AbsoluteThreshold


8-23

Version 1 Rev 0 S-RNS Relocation

S-RNS RelocationThis functionality allows moving the Serving RNS functionality from one RNC to anotherRNC e.g. closer to where the UE has moved during the communication. The Serving RNSRelocation procedure may be applied when active cell management functionality has createda suitable situation for it. Both UTRAN and CN are involved.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

S-RNS Relocation Version 1 Rev 0

S-RNS Relocation

RNC RNC

lu lu

D-RNS

S-RNS

S-RNSStep 1

Step 2

RNClur lur


8-25

Version 1 Rev 0 Power Control

Power ControlPower control controls the level of the transmitted power in order to minimiseinterference and keep the quality of the connections.

Three types of Power Control Procedures are identified:

Open Loop Power Control

Closed Loop using the Inner Loop methodUL Inner Loop Power Control - located in both the UTRAN and the UE

DL Inner Loop Power Control - located in both the UTRAN and the UE

Closed Loop using the Outer Loop methodThe main difference between Inner and Outer Loop power control is that the Frame ErrorRate (FER) can be set with Outer Loop Power Control.

UL Outer Loop Power Control - located in the S-RNC (UTRAN).

DL Outer Loop Power Control - located mainly in the UE, but some controlparameters are set by the UTRAN

Site Selection Diversity Power Control (SSDT)A form of power control for the downlink that can be applied in the UE when in a soft handover situation.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Power Control Version 1 Rev 0

Power Control


Closed Loop Power Control (Inner Loop)

Closed Loop Power Control (Outer Loop)

Site Selection Diversity Power Control


8-27

Version 1 Rev 0 Open Loop Power Control

Open Loop Power ControlIn UTRAN, open loop power control is applied only immediately prior to initiatinga transmission on the PRACH.

The UE determines an estimation of the downlink pathloss between the base station and theUE by measuring the UTRA carrier received signal strength at the mobile. Through the mediumof the System Information messages on the P-CCPCH, the UE will also have access to certaincell parameters, such as Cell ERP, Cell size, receiver sensitivity, etc.

Form this information the UE will calculate the required mean output power level required toachieve the access requirements of the cell it wishes to connect to. The UE will now send itsfirst RACH Pre-amble at this calculated value. If no positive or negative acquisition indicatoris detected, the UE will increase its power by the required power-ramping factor, (cell definedparameter), and send a second RACH Pre-amble. This process will be repeated until anacknowledgement is received, or the max retries value is exceeded.

If a positive Ack is received, the UE will again adjust its output power, according to an offset valuenotified by the cell, and transmit the RACH message part. On receipt of the RACH Message part, theUTRAN can accurately calculate the uplink path loss and initiate the use of closed loop power control.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Open Loop Power Control Version 1 Rev 0


UE monitors Common Pilotand Broadcast information, and calculates DL path Loss

Only used prior to initial transmission on PRACH

Using DL path loss as"perceived" UL pathloss, UE calculates TXpower O/P requiredaccess network


8-29

Version 1 Rev 0 Closed Loop Power Control (Inner Loop)

Closed Loop Power Control (Inner Loop)The objective of Closed loop power control is to maintain the the received signal strength, at thebase station, for all UEs at the same average level. As all UEs in a cell transmit on the samefrequency, a single overpowered mobile could block a whole cell to other users.

The uplink inner-loop power control adjusts the UE transmit power in order to keep the receiveduplink Signal-to-Interference Ratio (SIR) at a given SIR Target (SIRtarget). The serving cells(cells in the active set) should Estimate Signal-to-Interference Ratio (SIRest) of the uplink,using the received pilot symbols in each uplink uplink timeslot.

The serving cells should then generate TPC commands and transmit the commands once perslot, using the TPC symbols in each time slot, according to the following rule: if SIRest > SIRtarget

then the TPC command to transmit is "0", while if SIRest < SIRtarget then the TPC command totransmit is "1". The UE uses this information to derive TPC_cmd.

After deriving of the TPC_cmd, the UE shall adjust the transmit power of theuplink with a step Δ (in dB) which is given by:

D = DTPC × TPC_cmd.

The step size ΔTPC is a layer 1 parameter which is derived from the UE-specific higher-layerparameter "TPC-StepSize" which is under the control of the UTRAN. If "TPC-StepSize" has thevalue "dB1", then the layer 1 parameter ΔTPC shall take the value 1dB and if "TPC-StepSize"has the value "dB2", then ΔTPC shall take the value 2dB.

A similar process is used in the downlink, to control the relative power weighting tobe applied to each downlink dedicated channel.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Closed Loop Power Control (Inner Loop) Version 1 Rev 0

Closed Loop Power Control (Inner Loop)

UE monitors DL Signal toInterference Ratio (SIR)And compares againstTarget SIR level

Inner Loop Power Control command rate is 1500Hz

UE sends Transmit Power Control (TPC)information to Node B, adjusting Node Btransmit power output in an attempt toacheive target SIR


8-31

Version 1 Rev 0 Closed Loop Power Control (Outer Loop)

Closed Loop Power Control (Outer Loop)While Closed loop power control (Inner Loop) is used to maintain a target SIR, Outer looppower control adjusts the SIR target in the base station according to the needs of the individualradio link and aims at a constant quality, usually defined as a certain target Bit Error Rate(BER) or Frame Error Rate (FER). The reason for adjusting the target is to compensate forvariations in UE speed and multipath profile when the UE is moving.

Outer loop power control is implemented by having the Node B tag each uplink user dataframe with a frame error indicator, such as a CRC check result to the serving RNC. Shouldthis indicate to the RNC that the transmission quality is decreasing, the RNC will in turncommand the Node B to increase the SIR target proportionally.

The reason for having the outer loop power control reside in the RNC is that this function shouldbe performed after a possible soft handover combining has been performed.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Closed Loop Power Control (Outer Loop) Version 1 Rev 0

Closed Loop Power Control (Outer Loop)

SRNC target qualityValue sent to Node Bas New Target SIR value for Inner Loop Power Control

Outer Loop Power Controlcommand rate is 10-100 Hz

Node B receives UL dedicatedchannel data, which is passedserving RNC along with a Qualityestimate of the Transport Channel

SRNC

SRNC Checks FERand adjusts targetquality value forthe UL


8-33

Version 1 Rev 0 Multi-Cell Power Control

Multi-Cell Power ControlAs we have seen the UE has the ability to receive and process the transmitted downlink fromseveral Node B’s simultaneously. By the same token several Node B’s will be sending conflictingpower control commands to the one UE. In this situation the UE will always ramp its powerdown unless all received power control commands require it to power up.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Multi-Cell Power Control Version 1 Rev 0

Multi-Cell Power Control

Node B

Node B

Node B

Node B

Increase

Increase Increase

Decrease

Mobile DecreasesTx Power

Mobile IncreasesTx Power


8-35

Version 1 Rev 0 Site Select Diversity Transmission

Site Select Diversity TransmissionSite Selection Diversity Transmit (SSDT) Power Control is a form of power control for the downlinkthat can be applied while a UE is in Soft Handover (SHO). This section explains how SSDT works, andprovides some examples when SSDT should be used. In SHO, a UE has DL connections to more thanone cell. Thus, one UE contributes to the DL interference in several cells. SSDT is a power controlmethod that reduces the DL interference generated while the UE is in SHO. The principle of SSDTis that the best cell of the active set is dynamically chosen as the only transmitting site, and theother cells involved turn down their DPDCHs. The DPCCH is transmitted as normally.

Each cell is given a temporary identification number. The UE measures the pilot power of thePCCPCHs, and chooses the best one as its ’primary’ cell. The temporary id of this primarycell (the ’primary id’) is transmitted on the UL DPCCH to all Node B’s of the active set. A cellthat has been selected as primary station transmits its dedicated channels with the powernecessary to reach the desired SIR target, whereas all other cells switch off their downlinkDPDCH transmission. The ’primary id’ is updated by the UE at a frequency of 5, 10 or 20ms.The frequency depends on the SSDT mode and is set by the UTRAN.

In order for the UE to continuously perform measurements and to maintain synchronisation, the’secondary’ cells continue to transmit pilot information on the DPCCH.

The prerequisite for using SSDT during an RRC connection or during a part of an RRC connection isthat all Node B’s involved support SSDT. SSDT is controlled by L3 procedures. The control involvesassignment of temporary ID’s, setting an SSDT mode and switching SSDT on or off. The controlinformation itself (temporary IDs) terminates in the L1 of Node B and UE respectively.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Site Select Diversity Transmission Version 1 Rev 0

Site Select Diversity Transmission


8-37

Version 1 Rev 0 Space Time Transmit Diversity (STTD)

Space Time Transmit Diversity (STTD)The open loop downlink transmit diversity employs a space time block coding based transmitdiversity. The STTD encoding is optional in UTRAN. STTD support is thus mandatory at the UE.A block diagram of the transmitter and a generic STTD encoder are shown in the slide opposite.Channel coding, rate matching and interleaving is done as in the non-diversity mode.

The bit sequence at the antennas after encoding, for an input bit sequence ofb0, b1, b2, b3 is shown below:

b0 b1 b2 b3

-b2 b3 b0 -b1

b0 b1 b2 b3


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Space Time Transmit Diversity (STTD) Version 1 Rev 0

Space Time Transmit Diversity (STTD)

InterleaverRate

MatchingChannelEncoder

STTDEncoder

MUX

MUX

DiversityPilot

PilotTPC

TFI

Data

Ant 1

Ant 2

Ant 1

Ant 2

Channelizaton codeand long scrambling code C,

spreading length = M

TxAntenna 1

TxAntenna 2

QPSK symbols


8-39

Version 1 Rev 0 Closed Loop Mode Transmit diversity

Closed Loop Mode Transmit diversityThe general transmitter structure to support closed loop mode transmit diversity for DPCH transmissionis shown opposite. Channel coding, interleaving and spreading are done as in non-diversity mode. Thespread complex valued signal is fed to both TX antenna branches, and weighted with antenna specificweight factors w1 and w2. The weight factors are complex valued signals (i.e., wi = ai + jbi ), in general.

The weight factors (actually the corresponding phase adjustments in closed loop mode 1 andphase/amplitude adjustments in closed loop mode 2) are determined by the UE, and signalled to theUTRAN access point (cell transceiver) using the D-bits of the FBI field of uplink DPCCH.

For the closed loop mode 1 different (orthogonal) dedicated pilot symbols in the DPCCHare sent on the 2 different antennas. For closed loop mode 2 the same dedicated pilotsymbols in the DPCCH are sent on both antennas.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Closed Loop Mode Transmit diversity Version 1 Rev 0

Closed Loop Mode Transmit diversity

∑

Determine FBI messagefrom Uplink DPCCH

CPICH2

x

x

Ant1

W2

x

∑

Spread/scramble

CPICH1W1 Tx

Ant2

Rx

Tx

Weight Generation

W2W1

DPCCH

DPCCHDPCCH

Rx


8-41

Version 1 Rev 0 Admission Control

Admission ControlThe Radio Resource Module (RRM) makes decisions on whether calls should be admittedor not. It could be a new call, a reconfiguration or a handover. If one of the followingevents occurs the RRM rejects the admission attempt:

• a) the OVSF code resource is low• b) the Iub bandwidth resource is low• c) the CPU resource is low• d) the call request is rejected by the CAC module for DCH• e) the call request is rejected by the CAC module for HSDPA admission.

Call Admission Control (CAC)The CAC algorithm for DCH is responsible for the power-based call admission control of the Rel99channels. It does not check other resources, such as OVSF codes, Iub bandwidth or CPU.

The Call Admission Control (CAC) algorithm applies to DCH calls and Rel99 powerconsuming portions of HSDPA calls, namely, DL DCH, UL DCH and HS-DPCCH. Itdoes not cover FACH/RACH admission control.

The CAC is calculated separately for both ul/dl. It takes the requested data rate and signal tonoise ratio (QoS) to calculate the requested service load factor. The common ul or dl channelsare taken into consideration by using a preset load factor. Finally the current channel servicepower and noise are used to calculate the new predicted load factor. This predicted load factoris compared against a threshold, if above reject the call, if below accept the call.

For an HSDPA call two sets of checks are performed: one with the HSDPA CAC mechanism to determinewhether QoS of the dl bearer can be met, and another with the DCH CAC mechanism to check whetherthe ul DCH as well as HSDPA specific channels (DL DPCCH and HS-DPCCH) can be admitted or not.

System LoadAdmission Control is performed according to the current system load and the required service. Thecall should be blocked if none of the suitable cells can efficiently provide the service required bythe UE at call set up (i.e., if, considering the current load of the suitable cells, the required serviceis likely to increase the interference level to an unacceptable value). This would ensure that the UEavoids wasting power affecting the quality of other communications. In this case, the network caninitiate a re-negotiation of resources of the on-going calls in order to reduce the traffic load.

An example of Call Admission Control is given on the right side of the page.

1. CN requests SRNC for establishing a Radio Access Bearer (RAB) indicating QoS parameters.2. According to QoS parameters the requested service is assigned a type of service.

CAC is performed according to the type of service.3. Resources are allocated according to the result of CAC.4. Acknowledgement is sent back to CN according to the result of CAC.

Sub-layers are configured accordingly.

In the case were PS domain interactive and background services are requested (BE service) and the cellloading is relatively heavy, the call could be rejected if the requested resources are above the allowedthresholds. This has resulted in fewer admissions that could have been granted if the initial bearer ratewas reduced. An algorithm has been introduced to address this situation call RAB downsizing. If a PSdomain interactive and background services are requested (BE service) is requested and the requestedrate is high with a heavy cell loading then the algorithm reduces the initial admission rate , again andagain until the RAB downsizing load calculation indicates that the admission control is likely to besuccessful or until the minimum rate has been reached. If the admission request after RAB downsizingis rejected again, it is possible to use queuing , pre-emption, or directed retry to ensure admission.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Admission Control Version 1 Rev 0

Admission Control

RRM Entity

2. Mapping QoS ParameterType of ServiceCAC

3. Resource Allocation

1. RANAPMessage

4. RANAPMessage

RANAP

RRC

RLC

MAC

4. CPHY-RLSetup-REQ

4. CMACConnection

4. CRLC Config


8-43

Version 1 Rev 0 Load Congestion Control (LCC)

Load Congestion Control (LCC)This Management task ensures that the system will never be overloaded and remainsstable. A well planned system will seldom overload, however if such a condition doesoccur there must be mechanisms in place to reduce the load quickly and efficiently toachieve quality of service among different classes of users.

There are two phases of LCC, the Load Reduction (LDR) phase and theOverload Control (OLC) phase.

Detailed ExplanationDownlink and uplink Load Congestion Control (LCC) have similar functions, and are operatingindependently. There are two stages for downlink and uplink LCC, namely the basic congestion stageand the overload congestion stage. When a LDR threshold is exceeded, the basic congestion stage isentered andLoad Reduction (LDR) actions are taken. During this stage, the cell load is close to but stillbelow the Call Admission Control (CAC) admission threshold for other services. LDR actions suchas inter-frequency handover, bit-rate reduction of BE services, bit-rate reduction of rate-controllablestreaming services and adjustment of AMR mode will be taken to gradually reduce the system load andmake room for the system to admit more new users. When a Overload Control threshold is exceeded,the overload congestion stage is entered and OLC actions such as fast Transport Format (TF) controland selective drop of users will be taken to quickly reduce system load and try to restore system stability.

Upon detection of congestion, this feature allows the system to meet different quality of servicerequirements, to reduce the data rate of low-priority services and if necessary release someof high-priority services until the system returns to a stable un-congested state.

When a cell is detected to be in the LDR stage, the following actions are taken in order to reduce load:

• Reduce the throughput of Best Effort(BE) interactive and background service• Inter-Carrier Load Balancing (ICLB)• Iu QoS renegotiation (Max bit rate of PS domain real time services renegotiated)• Inter-RAT load balancing (Handover to GSM)

When a cell is detected to be in the OLC stage, the following actions are taken. In additionthe LDR actions are stopped when the OLC threshold is reached.

• Fast BE control (Progressively decreasing the maximum Transport Format(TF) of the TrCH that carries BE traffic)

• Selective drop of UEs (different criteria for uplink and downlink).


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Load Congestion Control (LCC) Version 1 Rev 0

Load Congestion Control (LCC)

Load Reduction Phase (LDR)

• Reduce the throughput of Best Effort (BE) interactive and background service

• Inter-Carrier Load Balancing (ICLB)

• Iu QoS renegotiation (Max bit rate of PS domain real time services renegotiated)

• Inter-RAT load balancing (Handover to GSM)

Overload Congestion Phase (OLC)

• Fast BE control (Progressively decreasing the maximum Transport Format (TF)of the TrCH that carries BE traffic)

• Selective drop of UEs (Different criteria for downlink and uplink)


8-45

Version 1 Rev 0 Cell Breathing

Cell BreathingLoad imbalance can happen between cells with same frequency (carrier). When the loadof one cell is too heavy, it results in transmission loss and the quality of communications isdecreased for the users at the edge of the cell. At the same time, neighbour cells still havemany available resources. When this happens, cell breathing can be used to avoid this: thecell size will be reduced when the cell is overloaded and cell size will be increased when thecell is lightly loaded by adjusting the transmitted power of the pilot channel.

The UE at the edge of the cell will be switched to the neighbour cells when the cell isoverloaded and the UE at the edge of neighbour cells will be switched to the cell when it islightly loaded. This results more efficient use of the radio resources.

Detailed ExplanationThis algorithm can be used to distribute the traffic in a heavily loaded cell to surrounding cells byreducing the Primary CPICH power. On the other hand, if a cell is lightly loaded it can relievethe loading in surrounding cells by increasing the Primary CPICH power.

The RNC then informs the Node B of any change in the Primary CPICH power through an NBAP CellReconfiguration Request message. On successful receipt of this message, the Node B reconfiguresthe Primary CPICH power and modifies both the DL common channel power levels and the dedicatedchannel maximum/minimum code powers that are set relative to the Primary CPICH power.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Cell Breathing Version 1 Rev 0

Cell Breathing

RNC

Node B

Heavily loaded cell

Lightly loaded cell

Primary CPICH power reduced

Primary CPICH power increased

Traffic load moved to provide more even distribution


8-47

Version 1 Rev 0 Hierarchical Cell Structure — Layered Cell Traffic Absorption

Hierarchical Cell Structure — Layered Cell Traffic AbsorptionConsidering the high-density of the hot-spot in Urban areas, the Hierarchical Cell Structure(HCS) approach is useful to provide radio coverage to these areas. This feature appliesto UE’s that support Inter-Frequency Hard Handovers.

In the microcell coverage area, the RNC supports the cell selection and reselectionparameter configurations (via System Information Broadcast messages) to give a higherpriority to the microcell over that of macrocell. This ensures that UE’s in non cell DCHstate (Cell FACH/ Cell PCH) would select a microcell first.

In the macrocell coverage when the UE is in cell DCH state, if the CPICH quality of the microcell isabove a configurable threshold and all RAB’s can be accepted by the microcell, the RNC supports thehandover from the macrocell to microcell to realize the microcell traffic absorption function.

At the boundary between the layered cell (i.e. Macro cell containing a micro cell layer) and non-layeredcell (i.e. a cell in which there is no macrocell/ microcell layer), the RNC supports the handover fromthe microcell to macrocell in the layered cell coverage area, or from the microcell in the layeredcell coverage area to a non-layered cell to ensure continuous services for users.

The speed factor is taken into account for the handover from macrocell to microcell. That isnormally, for the same network quality (CPICH quality) condition, the service priority of microcellis always higher than that of macrocell, but the time spent in the cell is also a factor, if thetime is short a handover is not allowed because the UE is fast moving:

• The microcell layer can use up to 2 carriers.• The macrocell layer can use up to 2 carriers.• In the overlap areas, the microcell layer and the macrocell layer cannot use the same frequency.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Hierarchical Cell Structure — Layered Cell Traffic Absorption Version 1 Rev 0

Hierarchical Cell Structure — Layered Cell Traffic Absorption

Hierarchical

Cells

Macro

Micro

Non hierarchical Macro

CPICH quality poor hard handover to Macro or fast moving

CPICH quality poor hard handover to Macro or fast moving

CPICH quality above set threshold and all RAB’s supported and slow moving

Hard handover to Micro



Hard handover to Micro

Cell DCH State


8-49

Version 1 Rev 0 Hierarchical Cell Structure — Layered Cell Traffic Absorption



©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

HSDPA Overview Version 1 Rev 0

Chapter 9

HSDPA Overview


9-1

Version 1 Rev 0 HSDPA Overview



©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


ObjectivesOn completion of this chapter the Student will be able to:

• Describe the important changes and characteristics of HSDPA• State the new channels of HSDPA and how they operate in principle• Describe the extended UTRAN protocol stack with HSDPA• State the advantages and disadvantages of HSDPA and future enhancements• Describe the concept of HSUPA


9-3

Version 1 Rev 0 HSDPA (High Speed Downlink Packet Access) for WCDMA

HSDPA (High Speed Downlink Packet Access) for WCDMAHSDPA considers the trend that the volume of IP-based traffic has already exceeded that forcircuit-switched traffic in most fixed networks. The same change can be anticipated in mobile networksbecause of new IP-based mobile services becoming available and are used by increasing number ofpeople in their daily communication. Current estimates show that in advanced mobile communicationmarkets, packet-switched traffic will overtake circuit-switched traffic in the near future. Deliveryof digital content over mobile networks will generate additional traffic and revenue.

Feature StudyThe HSDPA feature in 3GPP Release 5 is the result of a study carried out in the Release 4time frame. This study considered a number of techniques in order to provide instantaneoushigh speed data in the downlink. Some of the considerations and goals taken intoaccount in the evaluation of the different techniques were:

• To focus on the streaming, interactive and background services: services which requirea constant and/high throughput or low error rate.

• To prioritise urban environments and then indoor deployments (but not limited tothese environments and supporting full mobility).

• To enable compatibility with advanced antenna and receiver techniques: transmit andreceive diversity methods are used and might be enhanced

• To take into account User Equipment processing time and memory requirements:UE’s limitations are taken into account by the network

• To minimize changes on existing techniques and architecture: modest changesto NodeB hardware and UTRAN software

Compatibility with Release ‘99HSDPA is designed to co-exist on the same carrier as the current Release ’99 WCDMA services,enabling a smooth and cost-efficient introduction of HSDPA into existing WCDMA networks.

Demand for Packet Switched TrafficThe increasing demand for capacity in order to provide high data rate multimedia services inwireless environments necessitates enhanced radio transmission techniques and network protocolfunctionality. Such techniques have to be added to already existing mobile cellular networks. For3rd generation UMTS networks based on WCDMA, the HSDPA is being introduced to meet thisdemand and improve spectral efficiency by higher order modulation using 16-QAM.

Note: HSDPA achieves gross data rates in downlink up to 14 Mbit/s under ideal conditions.The reverse link (uplink) may remain on 64 kbit/s unless the operator decides to useHigh Speed Uplink Packet Access (HSUPA).


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

HSDPA (High Speed Downlink Packet Access) for WCDMA Version 1 Rev 0

HSDPA (High Speed Downlink Packet Access) for WCDMA


9-5

Version 1 Rev 0 HSDPA Targets

HSDPA Targets

Higher Data Rates for Streaming-, Interactive- and Background ServicesHSDPA is a feature based on a downlink shared channel that allows user net-data rates of up to10 Mbit/s. It is designed to support services that require instantaneous high rates in the downlinkand lower rates on the uplink. This feature also decreases the level of retransmissions (at theradio link and hence higher layers), in turn allowing the reduction of delivery time. Examples ofend-user services targeted by HSDPA are internet browsing and video on demand.

Consideration of UE Processing Time and Memory RequirementsHSDPA takes UE limitations like available physical memory for transmission and especially forretransmission into account. Also the physical channel processing capability is considered.(Examples: Minimum inter-TTI interval, transport channel bits per TTI)

Higher Spectrum EfficiencyWith 16-QAM applied in downlink, throughput rates can be doubled compared to QPSK whichis used for Rel. ’99 and Rel. 4 physical channels. The amount of bits/Hz is increased with16-QAM as one modulation symbol corresponds to 4 chips whereas in QPSK one modulationsymbol represents 2 chips. Even when HSDPA is using QPSK modulation the spectrum efficiencyincreases as HSDPA exploits good C/I conditions. This is achieved by reducing the protection(increasing the code rate) and thus having more capacity for the application data.

Small Changes to existing Techniques and ArchitecturesHSDPA minimizes the necessary upgrades and changes in UTRAN and UE.Nevertheless some protocol additions are necessary in NodeB and UE as well someenhancements of existing procedures and protocols.

Efficient Resource Sharing in Downlink among UsersHSDPA introduces a new transport channel type that makes efficient use of valuable radio frequencyresources. Beside this, it takes into account the bursty nature of packet switched data by sharingthe channelization codes, transmission power and infrastructure hardware among users.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

HSDPA Targets Version 1 Rev 0

HSDPA Targets


9-7

Version 1 Rev 0 HSDPA Characteristics

HSDPA CharacteristicsHigh Speed Downlink Packet Access comes with certain characteristics whichdistinguishes it clearly from Rel. ’99 UTRAN.

Modulation TypesQPSK is already known from Rel. ’99 UTRAN. Besides QPSK, HSDPA incorporates the 16-QAMmodulation to increase the peak data rates for users served under favorable radio conditions.Support for QPSK is mandatory, though the support for 16-QAM is optional for the networkand UE. 16-QAM (Quadrature Amplitude Modulation) was newly introduced in Rel .5 withHSDPA. It is a so called higher order modulation which basically doubles the data rate in goodradio conditions. Thus it increases the spectrum efficiency of WCDMA.

Higher Throughput RatesHDSPA supports peak throughput rates far beyond 2 Mbit/s when radio conditions are suitable andtherefore it satisfies the demand for instantaneous high throughput of packet switched services e.g.streaming or interactive traffic class. Theoretically, under optimum condition (Code Rate of 1:1) thefollowing maximum throughput can be achieved: (with 16-QAM (Quadrature Amplitude Modulation)and 15 channelization codes simultaneously used) 960kbit/s x 15 = 14.4 Mbit/s

AMC (Adaptive Modulation and Coding)AMC is a key feature of HSDPA allowing adjustment of modulation between QPSK and 16-QAMaccording to radio conditions and retransmission ratio. In addition a variable code rate is used toflexibly adapt the data rate to the physical channel capacity depending on the UE’s downlink C/I..

Hybrid ARQHARQ functionality combines retransmission with the original transmissions. There a twodifferent ways for HARQ to operate. Either identical retransmission of the data block are sentor retransmission are not identical and differ in data and parity bits compared to the originaltransmission. The first method is known as chase combining and, the latter as incrementalredundancy . HARQ operates on an N-channel Stop and Wait principle.

Transmission and Retransmission Scheduling in NodeBAll Rel. ’99 transport channels are terminated at the RNC, except BCH; hence the retransmissionprocedure for packet data is located in the serving RNC. In order to maximize throughput and reducedelays when retransmitting, additional intelligence is put into the NodeB. In this way, retransmissionis controlled by the NodeB, leading to faster retransmission and therefore shorter delay for packetdata services. A scheduler in NodeB evaluates for different users what the radio channel conditionsare, how much data is pending for each user, how much time has passed since a particular userwas last served, for which user retransmission are pending etc. From this input data the schedulerin NodeB may derive a decision how to assign resources to certain users.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

HSDPA Characteristics Version 1 Rev 0

HSDPA Characteristics


9-9

Version 1 Rev 0 QPSK versus 16-QAM Modulation

QPSK versus 16-QAM ModulationThe figure illustrates the I/Q Plane for QPSK and 16-QAM modulation technique.

QPSKEach symbol corresponds to 2 consecutive input bits. The four symbols are representedby different phase shifts in the I/Q plane.

16–QAMEach symbol corresponds to four consecutive input bits. Thus the data rate can be doubled with16-QAM compared to QPSK. The 16 symbols are represented in the I/Q plane by different phaseshifts and amplitudes. In 16-QAM modulation the symbol value is determined by phase andamplitude. Compared to that, in QPSK the phase is only modulated and variation in amplitudehave only minor influence on the decision space in the I/Q diagram. However with 16-QAM thedecision space is heavily influenced by amplitude variations, thus higher constraints are put onthe transmitter linearity. Note, a more accurate phase estimate is necessary with 16-QAM sinceconstellation points have smaller differences in phase domain compared to QPSK.

Note: The number of constellation points in the I/Q-diagram can be calculated with 2m,where m represents the number of bits or chips per modulation symbol. QPSK modulationhas four constellation points in the I/Q-diagram: 2^m = 4 ⇔ m = 2. 16-QAM modulationhas 16 constellation points in the I/Q-diagram: 2^m = 16 ⇔ m = 4


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

QPSK versus 16-QAM Modulation Version 1 Rev 0

QPSK versus 16-QAM Modulation


9-11

Version 1 Rev 0 Maximum Throughput Rates

Maximum Throughput RatesThe formulas opposite consider the physical maximum throughput rates available in FDD modeof WCDMA according to releases and modulation. In Rel. ’99 and Rel. 4 only QPSK is usedwhereas Rel. 5 allows also to user higher order modulation scheme 16-QAM. The standard chiprate is 3.84 Mchips/s across all releases. The slot duration is in all releases 0.67ms correspondingto 2560 chips. Note that the physical maximum chip rate achievable with 3.84 Mchips/s andQPSK modulation is: 2 chips/symbol x 3.84 Mchips/s = 7.68 Mchips/s

UMTS Rel’. 99 / Rel. 4Downlink:

⇒ In the downlink, the DPDCH and DPCCH are time multiplexed onto I and Q plane so theDPDCH data rate also depends on the DPCCH data rate. The physical maximum bit rate(ignoring losses due to DPCCH) using spreading factor ‘4’ is 5.76 Mbit/s.

⇒ The downlink slot format # 16 allows for 1248 DPDCH bits/slot and per physical channel.

⇒ The maximum DPDCH data rate considering 3 spreading codes @ sf4 is: 1248bits/slot x 15 slots x (3 OVSF’s) = 5.616 Mbit/s

Uplink:

⇒ In the uplink each channel DPDCH and DPCCH is assigned an orthogonal channelizationcode. As both physical channels are I/Q multiplexed, (i.e. separated onto I and Q phases),the maximum physical data rate has to be calculated with 1 bit/symbol.

⇒ The uplink slot format # 6 allows for 640 bits/slot.

⇒ The maximum DPDCH data rate considering 6 spreading codes @ sf4 is therefore: 5.76 Mbit/s.

HSDPA – Rel. 5In HSDPA the spreading factor for the user plane is fixed to ‘16’. Thus up to 15 physicalchannels can be allocated at maximum per UE.

⇒ QPSK:

⇒ The downlink slot format # 0 allows for 320 bits/slot and per physical channel.This results in 960 bits/ 2 ms subframe.

⇒ The maximum physical data rate considering 15 spreading codes @ sf16 is: 7.2 Mbit/s.

16-QAM

⇒ The downlink slot format #1 allows for 640 bits/slot and per physical channel.This results in 1920 bits/ 2 ms subframe.

⇒ The maximum physical data rate considering 15 spreading codes @ sf16 is: 14.4 Mbit/s.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Maximum Throughput Rates Version 1 Rev 0

Maximum Throughput Rates

UMTS Rel. 99 / Rel 4

Downlink

2 bits/symbol x [3.84 Mcps / (4 chips/symbol)] x (3 OVSF's) = 5.76 Mbits/S

Uplink


HSDPA Rel. 5

QPSK


16-QAM



9-13

Version 1 Rev 0 Important Changes for HSDPA

Important Changes for HSDPAHSDPA involves significant changes in the UTRAN providing a high flexibility to react tochanging air-interface conditions or variable user QoS.

New 2 ms Subframe for HSDPAThe TTI (Transmission Time Interval) in HSDPA has been reduced to 2 ms in order to be fasterin retransmitting erroneous data blocks compared to the minimum TTI of 10 ms in UTRA-FDD.Another advantage of the shorter TTI in HSDPA is that NodeB can adapt literally every datablock to fast changing radio conditions by the means of AMC. Thus it is possible to counteractfading on the air-interface by adjusting modulation and coding every 2 ms.

New Physical Channels and Transport Channel with HSDPANew channels are introduced for HSDPA: HS-PDSCH, HS-SCCH, HS-DPCCH and HS-DSCH.

No Fast Power Control and variable Spreading FactorWith HSDPA, two of the most fundamental features of WCDMA, fast power control and variablespreading factor are disabled and replaced by AMC (Adaptive Modulation and Coding). Note:AMC uses multicode operation (the UE can use more than one channelization code in parallel)in order to increase the data rate for a certain user and adapts the code rate to the air-interfacequality. By these means AMC is able to improve the user throughput or at least keep it constanteven the downlink channel quality deteriorates between subsequent transmissions.

New UE Capabilities / CategoriesThe HSDPA feature is optional for both UE and network in Rel. 5. The UE indicates itsHSDPA support and its HS-DSCH physical layer category within the radio access capabilityparameter.. The physical layer category defines among other parameters the maximumnumber of channelization codes the UE supports in parallel for multicode operation. A UEmay support up to 5, 10 or 15 channelization codes in parallel.

New MAC-hs in NodeB and UEThe implementation of Medium Access Control (MAC-hs) in NodeB and UE is a pre-requisitefor allowing the NodeB to schedule transmissions and retransmission, to maintain the HSDPAspecific channels and to operate with AMC and Hybrid ARQ.

Impact on NBAP and Frame Protocol ProcedureNBAP procedures need to support HSDPA capability and HSDPA related parameters. The increasedbandwidth needs to be supported by the frame protocol. Among other parameters the frame protocolneeds to cater for HSDPA flow control information, priority queue handling and UE capability information.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Important Changes for HSDPA Version 1 Rev 0

Important Changes for HSDPA


9-15

Version 1 Rev 0 New Channels with HSDPA

New Channels with HSDPAThe support of HSDPA is based on several new physical channels and one new transport channel.

Transport Channel:

HS-DSCH (High Speed Downlink Shared Channel)

The HS-DSCH is the actual transport resource carrying the packet data of the user applications.As it also follows the shortened TTI of 2 ms, it allows for short round trip delay in theoperation between NodeB and UE. The 2 ms TTI is short when compared to 10, 20, 40 or80 ms TTI’s supported by Rel. ’99 and Rel. 4 transport channels. HS-DSCH describes thephysical layer processing by MAC-hs of a HSDPA transport block.

⇒ Dynamic part: TB size = TBS size {1 to 200 000 bits with 8 bit granularity}; modulationscheme {QPSK, 16-QAM}; redundancy / constellation version {1 … 8}.

⇒ Static part: TTI {2 ms for FDD}; type of channel coding {turbo coding}; mothercode rate {1/3}, CRC size {24 bits}

⇒ No semi-static attributes are defined for HS-DSCH.

Physical Channels

High Speed Shared Control Channel (HS-SCCH)

The HS-SCCH has a fixed spreading factor of value ‘128’ and is configured only in the downlinkdirection. It also adopts the shortened TTI of 2 ms. In theory, up to 127 HS-SCCH’s can be configuredin a cell. However, the UE is required only to be able to listen to up to four HS-SCCH in parallel.The HS-SCCH allows the efficient sharing of one or more HS-PDSCH’s among different users.Nevertheless every UE needs to be informed on the DCCH via RRC messages about the specificHS-SCCH-set that it shall monitor in order to receive data via the HS-PDSCH’s.

High Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel (HS-PDSCH)

The HS-PDSCH has a fixed spreading factor of value ‘16’. Thus, it provides for multicode operationusing up to 15 channelization codes in parallel. Of course the UE must support the use of up to 15channelization codes which depends on its category. The HS-PDSCH adopts the shortened TTI of 2 ms.

Uplink Dedicated Control Channel Associated with HS-DSCH Transmission (Uplink HS-DPCCH).

The HS-DPCCH has a fixed spreading factor of value ‘256’ and is only configured in uplink direction.The HS-DPCCH also follows the shortened TTI of 2 ms. Its purpose is to provide feedbackinformation about the downlink receive quality and whether the packet data received by the UEare error-free or need to be retransmitted. Thus the NodeB is quickly notified of unsuccessfultransmissions and/or changing radio conditions in downlink direction.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

New Channels with HSDPA Version 1 Rev 0

New Channels with HSDPA

Transport Channels

Physical Channels


9-17

Version 1 Rev 0 Future Enhancements of HSDPA

Future Enhancements of HSDPAUMTS UTRA FDD aims to support a variety of multiple antenna transmission techniques inorder to enhance coverage, system throughput and spectral efficiency of HSDPA. A majoraim of using multiple antenna transmission in macro-cellular environments is to increase thecoverage ratio at medium and higher data rates, let’s say 2 Mbit/s and beyond. In a typicaldeployment, two to four or more transmit antennas might be used per sector.

BeamformingBeamforming makes use of adaptive antennas and can therefore provide a better C/I to UEsin the downlink. At the same time beamforming allows re-use of scarce downlink channelizationcodes as the individual UEs are separated in space and possibly through different downlinkscrambling codes, thus making use of secondary scrambling codes. The signals toward differentUEs from the same cell are typically transmitted under the same primary scrambling code andseparated by means of orthogonal channelization codes. However, some of the beams may betransmitted under a secondary scrambling code with its associated channelization code tree, therebyincreasing the resources in the cell. Note that the loss of the reduced orthogonality betweenprimary and secondary scrambling code can be partly mitigated in the case of beamforming bysplitting the cell into multiple scrambling code regions, so the spatial isolation between beamsusing different scrambling codes helps to compensate the lack of orthogonality.

Transmit DiversityThe downlink capacity could be improved by using receive antenna diversity in the UE. However forsmall and cheap mobiles it is not feasible to use two antennas and receiver chains. Therefore, theWCDMA standard already supports the use of base station transmit diversity in Rel. ’99. There aretwo modes: open loop (TSTD and STTD) and closed loop mode (mode1 with phase adjustment onlyand mode 2 with phase and amplitude adjustment). The open loop mode simply transmits the codedinformation from two antennas, but on the diversity antenna the bits are time reversed and complexconjugated. The STTD method provides two kinds of diversity. The physical separation of the antennasprovides space diversity and the time difference derived from a bit-reversing process provides for timediversity, thus the decoding in the receiver becomes more reliable. The closed loop mode can only beapplied to the downlink channel, if there is an associated uplink channel. Thus this mode can only beused with dedicated channels (DPCH, PDSCH or HS-PDSCH with an associated uplink DPCCH).

MIMOWith MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) at the transmitter, x independent data streamsare transmitted out of the x antennas on the same frequency band. At the receiver, eachantenna receives all of the transmitted sub-streams superimposed, not separately. If multipathscattering is sufficient, these x data streams have different spatial signatures to each of thee.g. p receive antennas and they are separable, the signals arrive with different phases.When a transmitter has x antennas and the receiver has p antennas, the link speed increaseslinearly with min (x,p) given the same power and bandwidth budget.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Future Enhancements of HSDPA Version 1 Rev 0

Future Enhancements of HSDPA


9-19

Version 1 Rev 0 Preview to HSUPA

Preview to HSUPAThe aim of the HSUPA is to enhance the uplink DCH operation and performance, using severaltechniques in order to support services like video-clips, multimedia, e-mail, telematics, gaming andvideo-streaming. A study showed that various techniques such as Node-B controlled scheduling,shorter TTI and a hybrid ARQ layer in the Node-B can enhance the uplink packet transfer performancesignificantly compared to Release-99/Rel-4/Rel-5. The targeted improvements are a higher air interfacecapacity in the uplink and a better end user experience by increasing both the cell throughput and thecoverage of higher bit rates in uplink. There are fundamental differences between uplink and downlinkdata transmission, making it impossible to simply introduce the same HSDPA solutions for the uplink.

Total available Transmission PowerThe key difference between uplink and downlink is the handling of the total transmission poweravailable. In downlink, the power is centralized whereas in the uplink the power available for anindividual UE is limited by the terminal amplifier capabilities. Therefore it can be said, that a pure timedivision approach, being in place with the maximum data rate in HSDPA, would not work for the uplink.

Much larger Dynamic of the UL Power ControlFurthermore in uplink the power control has much larger dynamics compared to downlink.

UL does not suffer from Channelization Code ShortageHigher order modulation like 16-QAM alleviates the problem of scarce channelizationcodes available in downlink, which is not the case for uplink.

Fast Power Control cannot be abandoned in ULAdditionally the fast power control cannot be abandoned in the case of continuous uplink transmissiondue to the near-far problem. Simulation results have shown a significant improvement compared to Rel.5, in the order of 50%-70% increase in system capacity, 20%-55% reduction in end-user packet calldelay and around 50% increase in user packet call throughput, when simultaneously applying NodeBscheduling, hybrid ARQ with soft combining, and a shortened TTI. Hence, significant technical benefitshave been found for a system using these techniques in conjunction. Complexity of hybrid ARQ hasbeen studied in terms of buffering and timing requirements. The enhancements can be introduced intothe FDD specifications without impacting the backwards compatibility with Rel. 5 and earlier releases.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Preview to HSUPA Version 1 Rev 0

Preview to HSUPA


9-21

Version 1 Rev 0 Preview to HSUPA



©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Annexe A Version 1 Rev 0

Chapter 10

Annexe A


10-1

Version 1 Rev 0 Annexe A



©MOTOROLA LTD.2002



• Describe selected UMTS Signalling Flow procedures.


10-3

Version 1 Rev 0 Paging for a UE in Idle Mode

Paging for a UE in Idle ModeThis example shows how paging is performed for a UE in RRC Idle Mode. The UE may be pagedfor a CS or PS service. Since the UE is in RRC Idle Mode, the location is only known at CN leveland therefore paging is distributed over a defined geographical area (e.g. LA).

NOTE:

The example below illustrates scenario where LA spans across 2 RNCs.

1. The CN initiates the paging of a UE over a LA spanning two RNCs (i.e. RNC1 andRNC2) via a RANAP message called the Paging message.Parameters Sent:CN Domain Indicator, Permanent NAS UE Identity, Temporary UE Identity, Paging Cause.

2. Paging of UE performed by cell1 using Paging Type 1 message.3. Paging of UE performed by cell2 using Paging Type 1 message.

The UE detects page message from RNC1 (as example) and the procedure for NAS signallingconnection establishment follows. NAS message transfer can now be performed.This procedure described for RRC idle mode, applies also to the RRC connectedmode in the case of CELL_PCH and URA_PCH states.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Paging for a UE in Idle Mode Version 1 Rev 0

Paging for a UE in Idle Mode

UENode B

1.1Node B

2.1RNC

1 RNC

2CN

RANAP

RANAP

RANAP

RANAP

2.PCCH: Paging Type 1

3.PCCH: Paging Type 1

1. Paging

1. Paging


10-5

Version 1 Rev 0 Paging for the UE in RRC Connected Mode

Paging for the UE in RRC Connected ModeThis will occur in case the position of the UE is already known; a mobility managementsession will be active at this stage. Two possible solutions exists:

• The UTRAN co-ordinates the paging request with the existing RRC connection.• The UE co-ordinates the paging request with the existing RRC connection.

The following example shows how paging is performed for a UE in RRC ConnectedMode (CELL_DCH and CELL_FACH states) when the UTRAN co-ordinates the pagingrequest with the existing RRC connection using DCCH.

1. CN initiates the paging of a UE via RANAP message Paging Request Message.Parameters used: CN Domain Indicator, Permanent NAS UE Identity,Temporary UE Identity, Paging Cause.

2. SRNC sends RRC message Paging Type 2.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Paging for the UE in RRC Connected Mode Version 1 Rev 0

Paging for the UE in RRC Connected Mode

CN

RRC

RANAP

RRC

RANAP1. Paging

UEServing

RNC

2. DCCH Paging Type 2


10-7

Version 1 Rev 0 RRC Connection Establishment

RRC Connection EstablishmentThe following example shows establishment of a RRC connection in DedicatedTransport Channel (DCH) state.

The following sequence are identified:

1. The UE initiates set-up of an RRC connection by sending RRC messageConnection Request on CCCH.

Parameters used: Initial UE Identity, Establishment cause, Initial UE Capability.

2. The SRNC decides to use a DCH for this RRC connection, allocates RNTI andradio resources for the RRC connection. When a DCH is to be set-up, NBAP messageRadio Link Setup Request is sent to Node B.

Parameters used: Cell id, Transport Format Set, Transport Format Combination Set, frequency, ULscrambling code(FDD only), Time Slots (TDD only), User Codes (TDD only), Power control information.

3. Node B allocates resources, starts PHY reception, and responses with NBAP message, RadioLink Setup Response. Parameters used: Signalling link termination, Transport layer addressinginformation (AAL2 address, AAL2 Binding Identity) for the Iub Data Transport Bearer.

4. SRNC initiates set-up of Iub Data Transport bearer using ALCAP protocol. This requestcontains the AAL2 Binding Identity to bind the Iub Data Transport Bearer to the DCH. Therequest for set-up of Iub Data Transport bearer is acknowledged by Node B.

5./6. The Node B and SRNC establish synchronism for the Iub and Iur Data Transport Bearer bymeans of exchange of the appropriate DCH Frame Protocol frames Downlink Synchronisationand Uplink Synchronisation. Then Node B starts DL transmission.

7. Message RRC Connection Setup is sent on CCCH from SRNC to UE.

Parameters: Initial UE Identity, RNTI, Capability update Requirement, Transport Format Set,Transport Format Combination Set, frequency, DL scrambling code (FDD only), Time Slots(TDD only), User Codes (TDD only), Power control information.

8. Message RRC Connection Setup Complete is sent on DCCH from UE to SRNC.

Parameters: Integrity information, ciphering information.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

RRC Connection Establishment Version 1 Rev 0

RRC Connection Establishment

RRC

UEServing

RNCNode B

Serving RNS

NBAP

DCH

RRC

NBAP

NBAP NBAP

DCH

DCH DCH

RRC

RRC

RRC

RRC

Allocate RNTISelect L1 and L2

parameters

Start Rx

4. ALCAP Iub Data Transport Bearer Setup

Start Rx

1. CCCH: RRC Connection Request

2. Radio Link Setup Request

3. Radio Link Setup Response

5. Downlink Synchronisation

6. Uplink Synchronisation

7. CCCH: RRC Connection Setup

8. DCCH: RRC Connection Setup Complete


10-9

Version 1 Rev 0 RRC DCH Release

RRC DCH ReleaseThis example shows RRC Connection release of a dedicated channel, in the case of macrodiversity ontwo Nodes B’s; the first one connected to the Serving RNC, the second one to the Drift RNC.

1. The CN initiates the release of a dedicated Channel by sending the message IuRelease Command to the SRNC. Parameters used: Cause.

2. The SRNC confirms the release by sending an Iu Release Complete message to the CN.Parameters used: Data volume Report (if data volume reporting to PS is required).

3. The SRNC initiates release of Iu Data Transport bearer using ALCAP protocol.4. Message RRC Connection Release from SRNC to UE to initiate the RRC connection release.

Parameters: Cause.5. Message RRC Connection Release Complete from UE to SRNC to confirm

the RRC connection release.6. The SRNC initiates the release of the link by sending the Radio Link

Deletion to the Node B (SRNC).7. The SRNC initiates the release of the link by sending the Radio Link Deletion to the Drift RNC.8. The Drift RNC initiates the release of the link by sending the Radio Link

Deletion to the Node B (Drift RNC).9. The Node B (SRNC) confirms the release of the link by sending the Radio

Link Deletion Response to the SRNC.10. The Node B (Drift RNC) confirms the release of the link by sending the Radio

Link Deletion Response to the Drift RNC.11. The Drift RNC confirms the release of the link by sending the Radio Link

Deletion Response to the SRNC.12. The Node B (SRNC) initiates release of Iub Data Transport bearer using ALCAP protocol.13. The Node B (Drift RNC) initiates release of Iub Data Transport bearer using ALCAP protocol.14. The Drift RNC initiates release of Iur Data Transport bearer using ALCAP protocol.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

RRC DCH Release Version 1 Rev 0

RRC DCH Release

RRC

NBAP

RRC

NBAP

NBAP

NBAP

RNSAP

RRC

RRC

NBAP

NBAP

NBAP

NBAP

RANAP

Node BServing RNS

UE Node BDrift RNS

DriftRNC

ServingRNC

CN

RANAP RANAP

RANAP

RNSAPRNSAP

RNSAP

1. Iu Release

2. Iu Release

3. ALCAP Iu Bearer Release

4. RRC connection Release

5. RRC Connection Release Complete

6. Radio Link Deletion

7. Radio LinkDeletion

8. Radio Link Deletion

9. Radio Link Deletion Response

10. Radio Link DeletionResponse

11. Radio Link

12. ALCAP Iub Bearer Release

13. ALCAP Iub Bearer Release ALCAP Iur Bearer Release

Complete

Complete

DeletionResponse


10-11

Version 1 Rev 0 RA Update

RA UpdateThis example shows location registration when changing Routing Area including change of3G SGSN when the UE is in MM idle state towards the 3G SGSN.

The illustrated transfer of MM signalling to/from the UE uses an established RRC connection. ThisRRC connection can have been established beforehand due to ongoing inter-working between UE and3G-MSC/VLR or be established only for this location registration procedure towards the 3G-SGSN. Foreach indicated MM message sent in this case to/from UE, the CN discriminator indicates 3G-SGSN.

The following procedure will take place to perform the RA update:

1. The RRC connection is established, if not already done. The UE sends the initial messageRouting Area Update Request (old P-TMSI, old RAI, etc.) to the new 3G-SGSN. The old P-TMSIand the old RAI are assigned data in UMTS. The SRNS transfers the message to the 3G-SGSN.The sending of this message to 3G-SGSN will also imply establishment of a signalling connectionbetween SRNS and 3G-SGSN for the concerned UE. The UTRAN shall add the RAC and theLAC of the cell where the message was received before passing the message to the SGSN.

2. The new 3G-SGSN send an SGSN Context Request (old P-TMSI, old RAI) to the old3G-SGSN to get the IMSI for the UE. (The old RAI received from UE is used to derive theold 3G-SGSN identity/address.) The old 3G-SGSN responds with SGSN Context Response(e.g. IMSI, PDP context information and Authentication triplets).

3. Security functions may be executed.4. The new 3G-SGSN informs the HLR of the change of 3G-SGSN by sending Update

GPRS Location (IMSI, SGSN number, SGSN address) to the HLR.5. The HLR cancels the context in the old 3G-SGSN by sending Cancel Location (IMSI). The

old 3G-SGSN removes the context and acknowledges with Cancel Location Ack.6. The HLR sends Insert Subscriber Data (IMSI, subscription data) to the new 3G-SGSN.

The new 3G-SGSN acknowledges with Insert Subscriber Data Ack.7. The HLR acknowledges the Update GPRS Location by sending Update GPRS

Location Acknowledge to the new 3G-SGSN.8. The new 3G-SGSN validates the UE’s presence in the new RA. If due to regional, national

or international restrictions the UE is not allowed to attach in the RA or if subscriptionchecking fails, then the new 3G-SGSN rejects the Routing Area Update Request with anappropriate cause. If all checks are successful, then the new 3G-SGSN responds to theUE with Routing Area Update Accept (new P-TMSI, new RAI, etc.).

9. The UE acknowledges the new P-TMSI with Routing Area Update Complete.10. When the location registration procedure is finished, the 3G-SGSN may release the signalling

connection towards the SRNS for the concerned UE. The SRNS will then release the RRCconnection if there is no signalling connection between 3G-MSC/VLR and SRNS for the UE.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

RA Update Version 1 Rev 0

RA UpdateOld

3G_SGSNUE HLRSRNS

New3G_SGSN

1. RRC connectionestablishment

1. RRC update required (old RAI, old P-TMSI)2. SGSN Context Required (old P-TMSI, old RAI)

2. SGSN Context Resp. (IMSI, Auth.triplets)

3. Security Functions

4. Update GPRS Location5. Cancel Location

6. Insert Subscriber Data

6. Insert Subscriber Data Ack

7. Update GPRS Location Ack8. RA upd Accept (new RAI, new P-TMSI

9. RA update complete

10. Release

10. RRC connection release

5. Cancel Location Ack


10-13

Version 1 Rev 0 SRNC Relocation

SRNC RelocationThis example shows SRNS relocation when the source RNC and target RNCare connected to different 3G-MSC.

The procedure is as follows:

1. The UTRAN makes the decision to perform the Serving RNC relocation procedure,including the decision of onto which RNC (Target RNC) the Serving RNC functionalityis to be relocated. The source SRNC sends SRNC Relocation required messages tothe MSC. This message includes parameters such as target RNC identifier and aninformation field that shall be passed transparently to the target RNC.

2. Upon reception of SRNC Relocation required message the Anchor MSC prepares itself for theswitch and determines from the received information that the SRNC relocation will (in this case)involve another MSC. The Anchor MSC will then send a Prepare SRNC Relocation Request tothe applicable non-anchor MSC, including the information received from the Source RNC.

3. The non-anchor MSC will send a SRNC Relocation Request message to the target RNC.This message includes information for building up the SRNC context, transparently sentfrom Source RNC (UE ID, No of connected CN nodes, UE capability information), anddirectives for setting up Iu user plane transport bearers. When Iu user plane transportbearers have been established, and target RNC has completed its preparation phase,SRNC Relocation Proceeding 1 message is sent to the non-anchor MSC.

4. The Prepare SRNC Relocation Response that is sent from non-anchor MSC to Anchor MSC willcontain the "SRNC Relocation Proceeding 1 received" command from the target RNC.

5. When the "SRNC Relocation Proceeding 1" command has been received in the AnchorMSC, the user plane transport bearers has been allocated between the target RNC andAnchor MSC and the Anchor MSC is ready for the SRNC move. Then the Anchor MSCindicates the completion of preparation phase at the CN side for the SRNC relocation bysending the SRNC relocation proceeding 2 message to the Source RNC.

6. When the source RNC has received the "SRNC Relocation Proceeding 2" message, thesource RNC sends a SRNC Relocation Commit message to the target RNC. The targetRNC executes switch for all bearers at the earliest suitable time instance.

7. Immediately after a successful switch at RNC, the target RNC (=SRNC) sends "SRNC RelocationComplete" message to the non-anchor MSC. This message is included by the non-anchor MSCin the "Complete SRNC relocation message" that is sent to the anchor MSC. Upon reception ofthis message, the Anchor-MSC switches from the old Iu transport bearers to the new ones.

8. After a successful switch at the Anchor MSC, a release indication is sent towards the SourceRNC. This will imply release of all UTRAN resources that were related to this UE.

9. When the target RNC is acting as SRNC, it will send New MM System Information to theUE indicating e.g. relevant Routing Area and Location Area. Additional RRC informationmay then also be sent to the UE, e.g. new RNTI identity.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

SRNC Relocation Version 1 Rev 0

SRNC RelocationUE Source

RNCTargetRNC

AnchorMSC

HLR Non-anchorMSC

1. SRNC Relocation Required

2. Prepare SRNC Relocation

3. SRNC Relocation Request

3. SRNC Relocation Proceeding

4. Prepare SRNC response

5. SRNC Reloc Proceed 2

6. SRNC RelocCommit

7. SRNC Reloc Complete

7. Complete SRNC Reloc

8. Release

9. New MM System Info

10. Routing Area Update

(a)

(b)


10-15




©MOTOROLA LTD.2002




©MOTOROLA LTD.2002




©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Glossary Version 1 Rev 0

Chapter 11

Glossary


11-1

Version 1 Rev 0 Glossary



©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Glossary of technical terms Version 1 Rev 0

Glossary of technical termsThis Glossary of technical terms contains standard Motorola acronyms, abbreviationsand numbers used throughout the documentation set.

A Interface - AUTO

3GPP Third Generation Partnership Project

8-PSK 8 Symbol Phase Shift Keying

A Interface Interface between MSC and BSS. The interface is based on theuse of one or more E1/T1 digital links. The channels on theselinks can be used for traffic or signalling.

A3 Authentication algorithm that produces SRES, using RAND andKi.

A38 A single algorithm performing the function of A3 and A8.

A5 Stream cipher algorithm, residing on an MS, that producesciphertext out of plaintext, using Kc.

A8 Ciphering key generating algorithm that produces Kc usingRAND and Ki.

AA Anonymous Access

AAL-2 ATM Adaptation Layer 2 (for real-time services) ( ITU-T I.363.2)

AAL-5 ATM-Adaptation Layer 5 (non-real time) ( ITU-T I.363.5)

A-Bit Acknowledgement Request Bit ( used in LLC-protocol LogicalLink Control)

AB See Access Burst.

Abis interface Interface between a remote BSC and BTS. Motorola offersa GSM standard and a unique Motorola Abis interface. TheMotorola interface reduces the amount of message traffic andthus the number of 2 Mbit/s lines required between BSC and BTS.

ABM Asynchronous Balanced Mode

ABR Answer Bid Ratio. The ABR is the ratio of successful calls to totalnumber of calls. As a measure of effective calls, it reflects theperformance of the total network

ac-dc PSM AC-DC Power Supply module.

ac Alternating Current. In electricity, AC occurs when chargecarriers in a conductor or semiconductor periodically reverse theirdirection of movement. Household utility current in most countriesis AC with a frequency of either 50 or 60 hertz (complete cyclesper second). The RF current in antennas and transmission linesis another example of AC. An AC waveform can be sinusoidal,square, or sawtooth-shaped. Some AC waveforms are irregularor complicated. Square or sawtooth waves are produced bycertain types of electronic oscillators, and by a low-end UPSwhen it is operating from its battery.

AC Access Class (C0 to C15).

AC Application Context.

ACC Automatic Congestion Control. A method by which congestedswitches automatically communicate their congestion level toother switches. (3GTS 22.011)


11-3

Version 1 Rev 0 Glossary of technical terms

Glossary of technical termsAccess Burst The Access Burst is used by the MS to access the BTS. It carries

RACH uplink from the MS to the BTS to start a call.

ACCH Associated Control CHannel. Control information associated withTCH or DCCH.

ACK, Ack ACKnowledgement.

ACM Accumulated Call meter. The ACM is a function contained withinthe SIM. It accumulates the total units (in the home currency) forboth the current call and all preceding calls. For security reasons,the SIM only allows the value of the ACM to be incremented,not decremented. Resetting of the ACM is only possible afterentering PIN2.

ACM Address Complete Message.

ACPIM AC Power Interface Module. Used in M-Cell6 indoor ac BTSequipment.

AC PSM AC Power Supply Module. Used in M-Cell6 BTS equipment.

ACSE Association Control Service Element. The ACSE is one of thethree Application Service Elements (ASE) which reside in theapplication layer of the OSI protocol and act as an interface to thelower layer protocols. It is used by applications to create a titlefor identification. See also ASI and ROSE.

ACU Antenna Combining Unit.

A/D Analogue to Digital (converter). See ADC.

ADC ADministration Centre.

ADC Analogue to Digital Converter. A device that converts a signalthat is a function of a continuous variable into a representativenumber sequence carrying equivalent information.

ADCCP Advanced Data Communications Control Protocol. A bit-orienteddata-link-layer (DL) protocol used to provide point-to-point andpoint-to-multipoint transmission of data frames that containerror-control information. Note: ADCCP closely resembleshigh-level data link control (HDLC).

ADM Asynchronous Disconnected Mode

ADM ADMinistration processor.

ADMIN ADMINistration.

ADN Abbreviated Dialling Number. Abbreviated dialling is a telephoneservice feature that (a) permits the user to dial fewer digits toaccess a network than are required under the nominal numberingplan, and (b) is limited to a subscriber-selected set of frequentlydialled numbers.

ADPCM Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation. Differentialpulse-code modulation (DPCM) in which the prediction algorithmis adjusted in accordance with specific characteristics of the inputsignal.

AE Application Entity. The system-independent application activitiesthat are made available as application services to the applicationagent.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsAEC Acoustic Echo Control. In a system, the reduction of the power

level of an echo or the elimination of an echo.

AEF Additional Elementary Functions.

AET Active Events Table. Alarms and events are sent to the EventsLog in the GUI. Different operators will have different subscriptionlists. All alarms and events are sent to the AET before they arere-routed to different subscription lists.

AFC Automatic Frequency Control. A device or circuit that maintainsthe frequency of an oscillator within the specified limits withrespect to a reference frequency.

AFN Absolute Frame Number.

AGC Automatic Gain Control. A process or means by which gain isautomatically adjusted in a specified manner as a function of aspecified parameter, such as received signal level.

AGCH Access Grant CHannel. A GSM common control channel used toassign MS to a SDCCH or a TCH.

AH Authentication Header ( RFC 2402)

Ai Action indicator.

AI Acquisition Indicator

AI Artificial Intelligence. A branch of computer science whose goalis to develop electronic devices that can operate with some of thecharacteristics of human intelligence. Among these propertiesare logical deduction and inference, creativity, the ability to makedecisions based on past experience or insufficient or conflictinginformation, and the ability to understand natural language.

AIB Alarm Interface Board.

AICH Acquisition Indicator Channel (UMTS Physical Channel)

AIO A class of processor.

Air interface The radio link between the BTS and the MS.

AL See Application Layer.

ALCAP Access Link Control Application Part ( ITU-T Q.2630.1 / Q.2630.2)

AM Acknowledged Mode operation ( UMTS-RLC)

AM Amplitude Modulation. Modulation in which the amplitude of acarrier wave is varied in accordance with some characteristicof the modulating signal.

AMA Automatic Message Accounting (processor). A service featurethat automatically records data regarding user-dialled calls.

AMD Acknowledged Mode Data (UMTS RLC PDU-type)

AMR Adaptive Multi-Rate. The capability of operating at gross bit-ratesof 11.4 kbit/s (half-rate) and 22.8 kbit/s (full-rate) over the airinterface.

AM/MP Cell broadcast mobile terminated message. A messagebroadcast to all MSs in a cell.


11-5


Glossary of technical termsANSI American National Standards Institute. ANSI is the primary

organisation for fostering the development of technologystandards in the United States. ANSI works with industry groupsand is the U.S. member of ISO and the IEC. Long establishedcomputer standards from ANSI include ASCII and SCSI.

Antenna A transmitter/receiver which converts electrical currents into RFand vice versa. In GSM systems, transmits and receives RFsignals between the BTS and MS.

AoC Advice of Charge.

AoCC Advice of Charge Charging supplementary service.

AoCI Advice of Charge Information supplementary service.

AOC Automatic Output Control.

AP Application Process.

AP-AICH CPCH Access Preamble Acquisition Indicator Channel (UMTSPhysical Channel)

API Access Preamble Acquisition Indicator

APN Access Point Name ( Reference to a GGSN)

Application Layer See OSI RM. The Application Layer is the highest of sevenhierarchical layers. It interfaces directly to, and performs commonapplication services for, the application processes. It also issuesrequests to the Presentation Layer. The common applicationservices provide semantic conversion between associatedapplication processes.

ARFCN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number. The GSM availablefrequency is divided in two bands. Each band is divided into200kHz slots called ARFCN. Each ARFCN is shared between8 mobiles, each using it in turn. Each mobile uses the ARFCNfor one TS (Timeslot) and then waits for its turn to come aroundagain. A mobile has use of the ARFCN once per the TDMAframe. The combination of a TS number and ARFCN is called aphysical channel.

ARQ Automatic Repeat-reQuest. Error control for data transmission inwhich the receiver detects transmission errors in a message andautomatically requests a retransmission from the transmitter.

ARP Address Resolution Protocol. A Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol that dynamically binds aNetwork Layer (NL) IP address to a Data Link Layer (DL) physicalhardware address, e.g., Ethernet address.(RFC 826)

AS Application Server

AS Access Stratum ( UMTS)

ASC Access Service Class

ASCE Association Control Service Element. An ASE which providesan AP with the means to establish and control an associationwith an AP in a remote NE. Maps directly onto the Presentationlayer (OMC).


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange. ASCII is

a standard developed by ANSI to define how computers writeand read characters. It is the most common format for text filesin computers and on the Internet. In an ASCII file, alphabetic,numeric, and special characters are represented with a 7-binarydigit binary number. 128 possible characters are defined. UNIXand DOS-based operating systems (except for Windows NT) useASCII for text files. Windows NT uses a newer code, Unicode.IBM’s System 390 servers use a proprietary 8-bit code calledextended binary-coded decimal interchange code. Conversionprograms allow different operating systems to change a file fromone code to another.

ASE Application Service Element (OMC). A coherent set of integratedfunctions to help accomplish application communication, e.g.,within an application entity (AE).

ASE Application Specific Entity (TCAP).

AS-ILCM Application Server - Incoming Leg Control Model

ASN.1 Abstract Syntax Notation One. A formal notation usedfor describing data transmitted by telecommunicationsprotocols, regardless of language implementation and physicalrepresentation of these data, whatever the application, whethercomplex or very simple.( ITU-T X.680 / X.681)

AS-OLCM Application Server - Outgoing Leg Control Model

ASP Alarm and Status Panel.

ASR Answer Seizure Ratio. The percentage of calls that arecompleted successfully.

ATB All Trunks Busy. An equipment condition in which all trunks(paths) in a given trunk group are busy.

AT-Command Attention-Command

Ater The interface between XCDR and BSC.

ATI Antenna Transceiver Interface.

ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode. A high-speed multiplexing andswitching method utilising fixed-length cells of 53 octets tosupport multiple types of traffic. ( ITU-T I.361)

ATT (flag) ATTach.

ATTS Automatic Trunk Testing Subsystem. Ensures the quality oftelephone lines by means of a series of tests. ATTS can beinitiated by either an operator command or by a command file,which can be activated at a predetermined time.

AU Access Unit.

AUC Authentication Centre. A GSM network entity which provides thefunctionality for verifying the identity of an MS when requested bythe system. Often a part of the HLR.

AUT(H) AUThentication.

AUTO AUTOmatic mode.


11-7


Glossary of technical termsB Interface - Byte

B Interface Interface between MSC and VLR.

BA BCCH Allocation. The radio frequency channels allocated in acell for BCCH transmission.

BAIC Barring of All Incoming Calls supplementary service.

BAOC Barring of All Outgoing Calls supplementary service.

Baud The unit in which the information carrying capacity or signallingrate of a communication channel is measured. One baud is onesymbol (state transition or level-transition) per second. Thiscoincides with bits per second only for two-level modulation withno framing or stop bits

BBBX Battery Backup Board.

BBH Base Band Hopping. Method of frequency hopping in which eachtransceiver at the base station is tuned to a different frequency,and the signal is switched to a different transceiver for each burst.

BCC Base station Colour Code. The BCC and the NCC are part of theBSIC. The BCC comprises three bits in the range 000 to 111.See also NCC and BSIC.

BCCH Broadcast Control CHannel. A GSM control channel used tobroadcast general information about a BTS site on a per cell orsector basis.

BCD Binary Coded Decimal. The representation of a decimal digit by aunique arrangement of no fewer than four binary digits.

BCF Base station Control Function. The GSM term for the digitalcontrol circuitry which controls the BTS. In Motorola cell sites thisis a normally a BCU which includes DRI modules and is locatedin the BTS cabinet.

B channel Bearer channel. Used in ISDN services to carry 64kbit/s of data,when used at full capacity.

BCH Broadcast Channel (UMTS Transport Channel)

BCIE Bearer Capability Information Element. Specific GSM parametersin the Setup message are mapped into a BCIE for signalling tothe network and within the PLMN. The BCIE is used to request abearer service (BS) from the network.

BCTP Bearer Control Tunneling Protocol ( ITU-T Q.1990)

BCU Base station Control Unit. A functional entity of the BSS whichprovides the base control function at a BTS site. The term nolonger applies to a type of shelf (see BSC and BSU).

BCUP Base Controller Unit Power.

BEC Backward Error Correction

BEG BEGin Message ( TCAP)

BEP Bit Error Probability.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsBER Bit Error Rate. The number of erroneous bits divided by the total

number of bits transmitted, received, or processed over somestipulated period. The BER is usually expressed as a coefficientand a power of 10; for example, 25 erroneous bits out of 100,000bits transmitted would be 25 out of 105 or 25 x 10-5.

BES Business Exchange Services.

BFI Bad Frame Indication. An indication of unsuccessfully decodedspeech frames. See FER.

BG Border Gateway

BGCF Breakout Gateway Control Function

BH Busy Hour. In a communications system, the sliding 60-minuteperiod during which occurs the maximum total traffic load in agiven 24-hour period.

BHCA Busy Hour Call Attempt. A statistic based on call attempts that aswitch processes during a BH. See also BH.

BI Barring of all Incoming call supplementary service.

BIB Backward Indicator Bit

BIB Balanced-line Interconnect Board. Provides interface to 12balanced (6-pair) 120 ohm (37-pin D-type connector) lines for 2Mbit/s circuits. See also T43.

BICC Bearer Independent Call Control ( ITU-T Q.1902.1 – Q.1902.6)

BIC-Roam Barring of all Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the HomePLMN Country supplementary service.

Bi-directional neighbour See Reciprocal neighbour..

BIM Balanced-line Interconnect Module.

Bin From BINary. An area in a data array used to store information.Also, a name for a directory that contain files stored in binaryformat.

BL BootLoad. Also known as download. For example, databasesand software can be downloaded to the NEs from the BSS.

BLER Block Error Rate

BLLNG BiLLiNG.

bit Binary digit. A character used to represent one of the two statesor digits (0 or 1) in the numeration system with a radix of two.Also, a unit of storage capacity.

bit/s Bits per second (bps). A measure of data transmission speed.The number of binary characters (1s or 0s) transmitted in onesecond. For example, an eight-bit parallel transmission link whichtransfers one character (eight bits) per second is operating at8 bps.

block A group of bits (binary digits) transmitted as a unit, over which aparity check procedure is applied for error control purposes.

Bm Full rate traffic channel. See also Full Rate.

BMC Broadcast / Multicast Control ( 3GTS 25.324)


11-9


Glossary of technical termsBN Bit Number. Number which identifies the position of a particular

bit period within a timeslot.

BPF Bandpass Filter. A filter that ideally passes all frequenciesbetween two non-zero finite limits and bars all frequencies notwithin the limits.

BPSM µBCU Power Supply Module.

BRI Basic Rate Interface. An ISDN multipurpose user interfaceallowing simultaneous voice and data services provided overtwo clear 64 kb/s channels (B channels) and one clear 16 kb/schannel (D channel). The interface is also referred to as 2B+D.

BS Base Station. See BSS.

BS Basic Service (group).

BS Bearer Service. A type of telecommunication service thatprovides the capability for the transmission of signals betweenuser-network interfaces. The PLMN connection type used tosupport a bearer service may be identical to that used to supportother types of telecommunication service.

BSC Base Station Controller. A network component in the GSM PLMNwhich has the digital control function of controlling all BTSs. TheBSC can be located within a single BTS cabinet (forming a BSS)but is more often located remotely and controls several BTSs(see BCF, BCU, and BSU).

BS_CV_MAX Maximum Countdown Value to be used by the mobile station (Countdown Procedure)

BSG Basic Service Group.

BSIC Base Transceiver Station Identity Code. Each cell has a BSIC. Itis a local colour code that allows a mobile station to distinguishbetween different neighbouring base stations. The BSIC is anoctet, consisting of three bits for the Network Colour Code (NCC)and three bits for the Base station Colour Code (BCC). Theremaining two bits are unused. See also NCC and BCC.

BSIC-NCELL BSIC of an adjacent cell.

BSP Base Site control Processor (at BSC).

BSN Backward Sequence Number. A field in a signal unit (SU) thatcontains the forward sequence number (FSN) of a correctlyreceived signal unit being acknowledged in the signal unit that isbeing returned to the sender. See also FSN and SU.

BSS Base Station System. The system of base station equipment(Transceivers, controllers and so on) which is viewed by theMSC through a single interface as defined by the GSM 08series of recommendations, as being the entity responsible forcommunicating with MSs in a certain area. The radio equipmentof a BSS may cover one or more cells. A BSS may consist of oneor more base stations. If an internal interface is implementedaccording to the GSM 08.5x series of recommendations, then theBSS consists of one BSC and several BTSs.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsBSSAP BSS Application Part (part of SS7) . Protocol for LAPD or

LAPB signalling links on the A-interface. Comprises DTAPand BSSMAP messages. Supports message communicationbetween the MSC and BSS.

BSSGP Base Station System GPRS Protocol

BSSC Base Station System Control cabinet. The cabinet which housesone or two BSU shelves at a BSC or one or two RXU shelves at aremote transcoder (RXCDR).

BSSMAP Base Station System Management Application Part (part of SS7).Call processing protocol for A-interface messages exchangedbetween the MSC and BSS. The BSS interprets these messages.

BSSOMAP BSS Operation and Maintenance Application Part (part of SS7).

BSU Base Station Unit shelf. The shelf which houses the digitalcontrol modules for the BTS (part of BTS cabinet) or BSC (partof BSSC cabinet).

BT British Telecom.

BT Bus Terminator. In order to avoid signal reflections on the bus,each bus segment has to be terminated at its physical beginningand at its end with the characteristic impedance.

BTC Bus Terminator Card.

BTF Base Transceiver Function.

BTP Base Transceiver Processor (at BTS). One of the six basic taskgroups within the GPROC.

BTS Base Transceiver Station. A network component in the GSMPLMN which serves one cell, and is controlled by a BSC. TheBTS contains one or more Transceivers (TRXs).

Burst A period of modulated carrier less than one timeslot. The physicalcontent of a timeslot.

BVCI BSSGP Virtual Connection Identifier

Byte A sequence of adjacent binary digits operated upon as a unit.Generally consists of eight bits, usually presented in parallel. Abyte is usually the smallest addressable unit of information in adata store or memory.

C - CW

C/R-Bit Command / Response Bit

C/T-Field logical Channel / Transport channel identification Field

C Conditional.

C Interface Interface between MSC and HLR/AUC.

C7 See SS7.

CA Cell Allocation. The radio frequency channels allocated to aparticular cell.

CA Central Authority. Software process that controls the BSS.


11-11


Glossary of technical termsCAB Cabinet.

CADM Country ADMinistration. The Motorola procedure used withinDataGen to create new country and network files in the DataGendatabase.

CAI Channel Assignment Indicator

CAI Charge Advice Information.

CAT Cell Analysis Tool. The CAT is part of the Motorola CellOptimization product. It is intended for engineering staff andOMC administrators. CAT provides information about GSMnetwork cell performance.

CB Cell Balancer. The CB process balances the cells configured forGPRS across PRPs. In the event of a PRP outage, this processsends message(s) indicating that GPRS service is unavailable tothe appropriate CRM(s) for the cells that could not be moved toan INS (IN Service) PRP.

CB Cell Broadcast. See CBSMS.

CB Circuit Breaker.

CBA Cell Broadcast Agent.

CBC Cell Broadcast Centre. The call processing centre for CBSMSmessages.

CBCH Cell Broadcast CHannel. The channel which is used to broadcastmessages to all MSs in a specific cell.

CBF Combining Bandpass Filter.

CBL Cell Broadcast Link. A bi-directional data link which allowscommunications between the BSS and the CBC.

CBM Circuit Breaker Module.

CBMI Cell Broadcast Message Identifier.

CBS Cell Broadcast Service. See CBSMS.

CBSMS Cell Broadcast Short Message Service. CBSMS allows a numberof unacknowledged general messages to be broadcast to all MSswithin a particular region. The content may include informationsuch as local traffic conditions, the weather, the phone number ofthe local taxi company, etc. The messages are sent from a CBCvia a BSC to a BTS and from there on a special cell broadcastchannel to the MSs. The CBC is considered as a node outsidethe PLMN and can be connected to several BSCs. However, aBSC is only connected to one CBC.

CBUS Clock Bus.

CC Connection Confirm. Part of SCCP network connectivity.

CC Country Code. A one to three digit number which specificallyidentifies a country of the world that an international call is beingrouted to (e.g., 1 = North America, 44 = United Kingdom).

CC Call Control. CC functions, such as number translations androuteing, matrix path control, and allocation of outgoing trunksare performed by the MSC.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsCCB Cavity Combining Block, a three way RF combiner. There are

two types of CCB, CCB (Output) and CCB (Extension). These,with up to two CCB Control cards, may comprise the TATI. Thesecond card may be used for redundancy.

CCBS Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber supplementary service.

CCCH Common Control CHannels. A class of GSM control channelsused to control paging and grant access. Includes AGCH, PCH,and RACH.

CCCH_GROUP Group of MSs in idle mode.

CCPCH Common Control Physical Channel (see also P-CCPCH andS-CCPCH)

CCD Common Channel Distributor.

CCDSP Channel Coding Digital Signal Processor.

CCF Conditional Call Forwarding. See CFC.

CCH Control CHannel. Control channels are channels which carrysystem management messages.

CCH Council for Communications Harmonization (referred to in GSMRecommendations).

CCITT Comité Consultatif International Télégraphique et Téléphonique.This term has been superseded. See ITU-TSS.

CCM Current Call Meter.

CCP Capability/Configuration Parameter.

CCPE Control Channel Protocol Entity.

CCS Hundred call-seconds. A single call lasting one hundred secondsis one CCS. Also, a measure of traffic load obtained by multiplyingthe number of calls per hour by the average holding time per callexpressed in seconds, and dividing by 100. Often used in practiceto mean hundred call seconds per hour with “per hour" implied;as such, it is a measure of traffic intensity. See also erlang.

CCTrCH Coded Composite Transport Channel (UMTS)

CCU Channel Codec Unit. The CCU performs the following functions:Channel coding functions, including FEC and interleaving, Radiochannel measurement functions, including received quality level,received signal level, and information related to timing advancemeasurements.

Cct Circuit.

CD/CA-ICH Collision Detection / Channel Assignment Indicator Channel(UMTS Physical Channel)

CDB Control Driver Board.

CDE Common Desktop Environment. Part of the SUN software(crontab - cron job file).

CDI Collision Detection Indicator


11-13


Glossary of technical termsCDMA Code-Division Multiple Access. CDMA is a digital cellular

technology that uses spread-spectrum techniques. Unlikecompeting systems, such as GSM, that use TDM, CDMA doesnot assign a specific frequency to each user. Instead, everychannel uses the full available spectrum. Individual conversationsare encoded with a pseudo-random digital sequence.

CDR Call Detail Record. A record of voice or data SVCs, whichincludes calling and called numbers, local and remote nodenames, data and timestamp, elapsed time, and call failure classfields. This is the information needed to bill the customer for callsand facility usage data for calls.

CD-ROM Compact Disk-Read Only Memory.

CDUR Chargeable DURation.

CEB Control Equalizer Board (BTS).

CED Called station identifier.

CEIR Central Equipment Identity Register.

Cell By GSM definition, a cell is an RF coverage area. At anomni-site, cell is synonymous with site; at a sectored site, cell issynonymous with sector. This differs from analogue systemswhere cell is taken to mean the same thing as site. (See below)

CEND End of charge point. The time at which the calling, or called, partystops charging by the termination of the call or by an equivalentprocedure invoked by the network or by failure of the radio path.

CEPT Conférence des administrations Européennes des Postes etTelecommunications.

CERM Circuit Error Rate Monitor. Identifies when discontinuity isdetected in a circuit. An alarm is generated and sent to theOMC-R when the error count exceeds an operator specifiedthreshold. The alarm identifies the RCI or CIC and the pathwhere the error is detected.

CF Conversion Facility.

CF Call Forwarding. A feature available to the mobile telephoneuser whereby, after initiation of the feature by an authorisedsubscriber, calls dialled to the mobile telephone of an authorisedsubscriber will automatically be routed to the desired number.See also CFC and CFU.

CF Control Function. CF performs the SGSN mobility managementfunctions and OA&M functions for the GSN module.

CFB Call Forwarding on mobile subscriber Busy supplementaryservice. Service automatically redirects incoming calls for phonebusy situations.

CFC Call Forwarding Conditional supplementary service. Serviceautomatically redirects incoming calls for busy, no reply, or notreachable situations. See also CFB, CFNRc, and CFNRy.

CFM Configuration Fault Management RSS process.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsCFNRc Call Forwarding on mobile subscriber Not Reachable

supplementary service. Service automatically redirects incomingcalls for not reachable situations.

CFNRy Call Forwarding on No Reply supplementary service. Serviceautomatically redirects incoming calls for no reply situations.

CFU Call Forwarding Unconditional supplementary service. Serviceautomatically redirects all incoming calls.

CG Charging Gateway.

CGF Charging Gateway Function.

Channel A means of one-way transmission. A defined sequence ofperiods (for example, timeslots) in a TDMA system; a definedfrequency band in an FDMA system; a defined sequence ofperiods and frequency bands in a frequency hopped system.

CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol ( RFC 1334)

CIM Coaxial Interconnect Module.

Channel Mode See Full Rate and Half Rate. These are the channel modesthat are currently used.

CHP CHarging Point.

CHV Card Holder Verification information.

CKSN Ciphering Key Sequence Number. The CKSN is a number whichis associated with the ciphering key, Kc. It is used to ensureauthentication consistency between the MS and the VLR.

CI Cell Identity. A block of code which identifies a cell within alocation area.

CI CUG Index.

C/I Carrier to Interference ratio.

CIC Circuit Identity Code. The unique identifier of the terrestrialportion of a circuit path. A CIC is either a 64 kbit/s or 16 kbit/sconnection depending on whether a site has local or remotetranscoding. A CIC with local transcoding occupies a completeE1/T1 timeslot. A 16 kbit/s CIC, at a site with remote transcoding,occupies a sub-channel of an E1/T1 timeslot.

CIC Call Instance Code ( BICC)

CID Channel Identity ( ATM)

CIDR Classless Inter-Domain Routing ( RFC 1519)

CIO Cell Individual Offset ( 3GTS 25.331)

CIR, C/I Carrier to Interference Ratio. Indicates the received signal powerlevel relative to the interference power level.

Ciphertext Unintelligible data produced through the use of encipherment.

CKSN Ciphering Key Sequence Number.

CLI Calling Line Identity. The identity of the caller. See also CLIPand CLIR.

CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation supplementary service.Allows the called party to identify the caller. See also CLIR.


11-15


Glossary of technical termsCLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction supplementary service.

Allows the caller to withhold their identity from the called party.See also CLIP.

CLK Clock.

CLKX Clock Extender half size board. The fibre optic link that distributesGCLK to boards in system (part of the BSS, etc).

CLM ConnectionLess Manager. Coordinates global control overthe BSS by handling of all connectionless messages (that is,messages that are not directly concerned with a connected call).This includes such messages as global resets, load limiting andcircuit blocking.

CLR CLeaR.

CM Configuration Management. Configuration management allowsthe operator to perform network configuration tasks, and tomaintain all details of the network configuration at the OMC.

CM Connection Management. See CLM.

CM Connectionless Manager. See CLM.

CMD CoMmanD.

CMM Channel Mode Modify. Message sent to an MS to request achannel mode change. When it has received the CMM message,the MS changes the mode to the indicated channel and replieswith a Channel Mode Modify Acknowledge message indicatingthe new channel mode.

CMIP Common Management Information Protocol. Protocol used forcommunication over the OML.

CMISE Common Management Information Service Element. An ASEwhich provides a means to transfer management information viaCMIP messages with another NE over an association establishedby ASCE using ROSE (OMC).

CMR Cellular Manual Revision. Documentation updates.

CNG CalliNg tone.

Codec Coder/Decoder. A speech coding unit that converts speech into adigital format for radio broadcast, and vice versa.

CODEX Manufacturer’s name for a type of multiplexer and packet switchcommonly installed at the Motorola OMC-R.

Coincident Cell A cell whose cell boundary follows the boundary of a co-locatedneighbour cell. The coincident cell has a different frequency type,but the same BSIC, as that of the neighbour cell.

COLI COnnected Line Identity. Identity of the connected line. See alsoCOLP and COLR.

Collocated Placed together; two or more items together in the same place.

Colour Code An 8-bit code assigned to a BTS to distinguish interfering signalsfrom another cell.

COLP COnnected Line Identification Presentation supplementaryservice. Allows the calling party to identify the line identity of theconnected party. See also COLR.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsCOLR COnnected Line Identification Restriction supplementary service.

Allows the connected party to withhold its line identity from thecalling party. See also COLP.

COM Code Object Manager (software).

COM COMplete.

COMB Combiner. The purpose of a combiner in the BSS is to combinetransmitter outputs from the RCUs onto an antenna.

COMM, Comms COMMunications.

CommHub Communications Hub. Provides Ethernet switching and IProuteing for the GSN complex local networking and GSN complexE1 interfaces to the public data network.

CommsLink Communications Link. See also 2 Mbit/s link.

Compact PCI See cPCI.

CON CONtinue Message ( TCAP)

CONF CONFerence circuit. Circuit used for multi-party conference calls.

CONFIG CONFIGuration Control Program.

Congestion Situation occurring when an element cannot receive all theservice it is requesting.

CONNACK CONNect ACKnowledgement. Part of the synchronizationprocess. After a connection has been established, the CONNACKmessage indicates that traffic channels are available.

CP Call Processing. The CP process in the BTS controls the MS toBSS to MS signalling link, MS originated and terminated callsand inter-BSS and inter-BTS handovers.

CPCH Common Packet Channel (UMTS Transport Channel) FDD only

cPCI Compact Peripheral Component Interconnect. A set of standardsthat define a common card cage, power supplies, and processorboards.

CPCS Common Part Convergence Sublayer

CPGM CCCH Paging Manager. The CPGM processes the pagingmessages sent from the SGSN to the BSC/BTS.

CPICH Common Pilot Channel (UMTS Physical Channel / see alsoP-CPICH and S-CPICH)

CPS Code and Puncturing Scheme.

CPU Central Processing Unit. The portion of a computer that controlsthe interpretation and execution of instructions. Also, the portionof a digital communications switch that executes programmedinstructions, performs arithmetic and logical operations onsignals, and controls input/output functions.

C/R Command/Response field bit.

CR Carriage Return (RETURN).


11-17


Glossary of technical termsCR Connection Request (Part of SCCP network connectivity). An

SCCP Connection Request message is sent from the BSS to theMSC to establish a connection. See also CREF.

CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check (3 bit). An error-detection scheme that(a) uses parity bits generated by polynomial encoding of digitalsignals, (b) appends those parity bits to the digital signal, and(c) uses decoding algorithms that detect errors in the receiveddigital signal.

CRE Call RE-establishment procedure. Procedure for re-establishinga call in the event of a radio link failure.

CREF Connection REFused (Part of SCCP network connectivity). Ina number of operating circumstances, a CREF message maybe sent from the MSC to the BSS in response to a ConnectionRequest (CR).

CRM Cell Resource Manager. The CRM allocates and activatestimeslots and subchannels on the available carriers.

CRM Cell Resource Machine.

CRM-LS/HS Cellular Radio Modem-Low Speed/High Speed. Low speedmodem used to interwork 300 to 2400 bit/s data services underV.22bis, V.23, or V.21 standards. High speed modem used tointerwork 1200 to 9600 bit/s data services under V.22bis, V.32,or V.29/V.27ter/V.21 standards.

CNRC Controlling RNC

CRO Motorola Controlled Roll Out Group. A CRO consists of acustomer site implementation of a new product, software release,or combination of products/releases.

CRT Cathode Ray Tube (video display terminal).

CS Coding Scheme

CS Circuit Switched.

CS-1 GPRS Coding Scheme-1 (9.05 kbit/s per TCH).




CSCF Call Session Control Function ( SIP)

CSD Circuit Switched Data

CSFP Code Storage Facility Processor (at BSC and BTS). A GPROCdevice which facilitates the propagating of new software instanceswith reduced system down time. See also IP.

CSICH CPCH Status Indicator Channel (UMTS Physical Channel)

CSP Central Statistics Process. The statistics process in the BSC.

CSPDN Circuit Switched Public Data Network. A publicly availablecommunications network using circuit switched digital datacircuits.

CT Call Transfer supplementary service.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsCT Channel Tester.

CT Channel Type.

CTCH Common Traffic Channel (Logical) PTM

CTP Call Trace Product (Tool). The CTP is designed to help operatorsof GSM900 and DCS1800 communication networks tune andoptimize their systems. CTP allows Call Trace data to beanalysed and decoded.

CTP Control Terminal Port.

CTR Common Technical Regulation.

CTS Clear to Send. A handshake signal used with communicationlinks, especially RS232 or CCITT Rec. V.24, to indicate (to atransmitter from a receiver) that transmission may proceed.Generated in response to a request to send signal. See also RTS.

CTU Compact Transceiver Unit (M-Cellhorizon radio).

CUG Closed User Group supplementary service. A CUG is usedto control who can receive and/or place calls, by creating aunique group. When a CUG is configured for an interface, onlythose subscribers that are members of the same CUG canreceive/place calls.

Cumulative value The total value for an entire statistical interval.

CV Countdown Value

CW Code Word

CW Call Waiting supplementary service. A subscriber feature whichallows an individual mobile telephone user currently engaged in acall to be alerted that another caller is trying to reach him. Theuser has a predetermined period of time in which to terminate theexisting conversation and respond to the second call.

cwnd Congestion window

D Interface - DYNET

D Interface Interface between VLR and HLR.

D/A Digital to Analogue (converter). See DAC.

DAB Distribution Alarm Board (in BTS6 cabinet).

DAC Digital to Analogue Converter. A device that converts an inputnumber sequence into a function of a continuous variable.

DACS Digital Access Cross-connect System. A data concentrator andorganizer for Tl / El based systems.

DAK Downlink Acknowledgement

DAN Digital ANnouncer (for recorded announcements on MSC).

DAS Data Acquisition System.

DAT Digital Audio Tape. Audio-recording and playback medium/formatthat maintains a signal quality equal to that of the CD-ROMmedium/format.


11-19


Glossary of technical termsDataGen Sysgen Builder System. A Motorola offline BSS binary object

configuration tool.

Data Link Layer See OSI RM. This layer responds to service requests from theNetwork Layer and issues service requests to the Physical Layer.It provides the functional and procedural means to transfer databetween network entities and to detect and possibly correcterrors that may occur in the Physical Layer.

dB Decibel. A unit stating the logarithmic ratio between two numericquantities. See also dBm.

DB DataBase.

DB Dummy Burst (see Dummy burst).

DBA DataBase Administration/Database Administrator.

dBm A dB referenced to 1 milliwatt; 0 dBm equals one milliwatt.

DBMS DataBase Management System.

dc Direct Current. DC is the unidirectional flow or movement ofelectric charge carriers, usually electrons. The intensity of thecurrent can vary with time, but the general direction of movementstays the same at all times. As an adjective, the term DC is usedin reference to voltage whose polarity never reverses.

DCB Diversity Control Board (part of DRCU).

DCCH Dedicated Control CHannel. A class of GSM control channelsused to set up calls and report measurements. Includes SDCCH,FACCH, and SACCH.

DCD Data Carrier Detect signal. Hardware signal defined by theRS-232-C specification that indicates that a device such as amodem is on-line and ready for transmission.

DCE Data Circuit terminating Equipment. The DCE performs functionssuch as signal conversion and coding, at the network end of theline between the DTE and the line.Also, The RS232 configuration designated for computers. DCEequipment can be connected to DTE equipment with a straightcable, but to other DCE equipment only with a null modem cable.

DCF Data Communications Function.

DCF Duplexed Combining bandpass Filter. (Used in Horizonmacro).

DCH Dedicated CHannel (Transport)

D channel Data channel. Used in ISDN to perform call signalling andconnection setup functions. In some circumstances, the channelcan also be used to carry user data.

DCN Data Communications Network. A DCN connects NetworkElements with internal mediation functions or mediation devicesto the Operations Systems.

DC PSM DC Power Supply Module.

DCS1800 Digital Cellular System at 1800 MHz. A cellular phone networkusing digital techniques similar to those used in GSM 900, butoperating on frequencies of 1710 - 1785 MHz (receive) and1805 - 1880 MHz (transmit).


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsDDF Dual-stage Duplexed combining Filter. (Used in Horizonmacro).

The DDF is an integrated combiner, filter and duplexer.

DDS DataGen Data Store. Store area for DataGen input and outputfiles.

DDS Data Drive Storage.

DDS Direct Digital Synthesis. A technology for generating highlyaccurate and frequency-agile (rapidly changeable frequency overa wide range), low-distortion output waveforms.

DEQB Diversity Equalizer Board.

DES Data Encryption Standard

DET DETach.

DFE Decision Feedback Equalizer. A receiver component/function.The DFE results in a very sharp Bit Error Rate (BER) thresholdby using error feedback.

DGT Data Gathering Tool. The DGT collects all the relevant datarelating to a specified problem and copies it to tape or file,together with a problem description. The file or tape is then sentto Motorola for analysis.

DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol ( RFC 2131)

DHP Digital Host Processor. A hard GPROC based device locatedat Horizonmicro2 BTS sites. It represents the MCU of a slaveHorizonmicro2 FRU. The MCU that the DHP represents isresponsible for providing DRI and carrier support.

DIA Drum Intercept Announcer.

Digit 4 Bit

DINO E1/HDSL Line termination module (part of Horizonmicro).

DINO T1 Line termination module (part of Horizonmicro).

DISC DISConnect.

Discon Discontinuous.

DIQ Diversity In phase and Quadrature phase.

DIR Device Interface Routine. Software routine used in the BSS.

DL Data Link (layer). See Data Link Layer.

DL See Downlink.

DLCI Data Link Connection Identifier. In frame-relay transmissionsystems, 13-bit field that defines the destination address of apacket. The address is local on a link-by-link basis.

DLD Data Link Discriminator.

DLNB Diversity Low Noise Block.

DLR Destination Local Reference

DLS DownLink Segmentator. The DLS segments LLC frames intoRLC data blocks to be transmitted over the air interface.

DLSP Data Link Service Process. Handles messages for an OMP anda shelf GPROC.


11-21


Glossary of technical termsDLSP Digital Link Signalling Processor.

Dm Control channel (ISDN terminology applied to mobile service).

DMA Deferred Maintenance Alarm. An alarm report level; animmediate or deferred response is required (see also PMA).

DMA Direct Memory Access. Transfer of data from a peripheral device,such as a hard disk drive, into memory without that data passingthrough the microprocessor. DMA transfers data into memory athigh speeds with no processor overhead.

DMR Digital Mobile Radio.

DMX Distributed Electronic Mobile Exchange (Motorola’s networkedEMX family).

DN Directory Number.

DNIC Data Network Identifier Code. In the CCITT International X.121format, the first four digits indicate the international data number,the next three digits are the data country code, and the final digitis the network code.

DNS Domain Name Service. A service that translates from logicaldomain or equipment names to IP addresses.

Downlink Physical link from the BTS towards the MS (BTS transmits, MSreceives).

DP Dial/Dialled Pulse. A dc pulse produced by an end instrument thatinterrupts a steady current at a sequence and rate determinedby the selected digit and the operating characteristics of theinstrument.

DPC Destination Point Code. A part of the label in a signallingmessage that uniquely identifies, in a signalling network, the(signalling) destination point of the message.

DPC Digital Processing and Control board.

DPCCH Dedicated Physical Control Channel (UMTS Physical Channel)

DPCH Dedicated Physical Channel (UMTS / Term to combine DPDCHand DPCCH)

DPDCH Dedicated Physical Data Channel (UMTS Physical Channel)

DPCM Pulse-code modulation (PCM) in which an analog signal issampled and the difference between the actual value of eachsample and its predicted value, derived from the previous sampleor samples, is quantified and converted, by encoding, to adigital signal. Note: There are several variations of differentialpulse-code modulation.

DPNSS Digital Private Network Signalling System (BT standard for PABXinterface).

DPP Dual Path Preselector. BTS module.

DPR, DPRAM Dual Port Random Access Memory.

DPROC Data PROCessor.

DPSM Digital Power Supply Module.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsDRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory. A type of semiconductor

memory in which the information is stored in capacitors on aintegrated circuit.

DRC Data Rate Converter board. Provides data and protocolconversion between PLMN and destination network for 8 circuits.Part of IWF.

DRCU Diversity Radio Channel Unit. Contains transceiver, digital controlcircuits, and power supply. Part of the BSS.

DRI Digital Radio Interface. Provides encoding/decoding andencryption/decryption for radio channels. Part of BSS.

DRIM Digital Radio Interface extended Memory. A DRI with extramemory.

DRIX DRI Extender half size board. Fibre optic link from DRI to BCU.Part of the BSS.

DRNC Drift Radio Network Controller

DRX, DRx Discontinuous reception (mechanism). A means of saving batterypower (for example in hand-portable units) by periodically andautomatically switching the MS receiver on and off.

DS-1 Digital transmission System 1 (or Digital Signal level 1). Termused to refer to the 1.44 Mbit/s (U.S.) or 2.108 Mbit/s (Europe)digital signal carried on a T1 facility.

DS-2 German term for 2 Mbit/s line (PCM interface).

DSCH Downlink Shared Channel (UMTS Transport Channel)

DSE Data Switching Exchange.

DSI Digital Speech Interpolation. A compression technique that relieson the pauses between speech bursts to provide additionalcompression. DSI enables users to gain an additional 2:1compression on the average on their line.

DSN Digital Switching Network

DSO 64 kbit/s timeslot on an E1/T1.

DSP Digital Signal Processor. A specialized, programmable computerprocessing unit that is able to perform high-speed mathematicalprocessing.

DSS1 Digital Subscriber Signalling No 1. N-ISDN user network interfacesignalling.

DSSI Diversity Signal Strength Indication.

DTAP Direct Transfer Application Part (Part of SS7). Call processingprotocol for A-Interface messages exchanged directly betweenthe MSC and the mobile unit without interpretation by the BSS.

DTCH Dedicated Traffic Channel (UMTS Logical Channel)

DTE Data Terminal Equipment. An end instrument that convertsuser information into signals for transmission or reconverts thereceived signals into user information.Also, the RS232 configuration designated for terminals. DTEequipment can be connected to DCE with a straight cable, but toother DTE equipment only with a null modem.


11-23


Glossary of technical termsDTF Digital Trunk Frame. A frame or electronic rack of digital trunk

interface equipment.

DT1 DaTa form 1 (Part of SCCP network connectivity).

DTI Digital Trunk Interface.

DTM Dual Transer Mode.

DTMF Dual Tone Multi-Frequency. Multifrequency signalling in whichspecified combinations of two voice band frequencies, one from agroup of four low frequencies and the other from a group of fourhigher frequencies, are used. The sounds a push button tonetelephone makes when it dials a number.

DTR Data Terminal Ready signal. Method of flow control (RS232Interface). A modem interface control signal sent from the DTEto the modem, usually to indicate to the modem that the DTE isready to transmit data.

DTRX Dual Transceiver Module. (Radio used in Horizonmicro(M-Cellarena) and Horizonmacro (M-Cellarenamacro)).

DTX, DTx Discontinuous Transmission (mechanism). A means of savingbattery power (for example in hand-portable units) and reducinginterference by automatically switching the transmitter off whenno speech or data are to be sent.

Dummy burst A period of carrier less than one timeslot whose modulation is adefined sequence that carries no useful information. A dummyburst fills a timeslot with an RF signal when no information isto be delivered to a channel.

DYNET DYnamic NETwork. Used to specify BTSs sharing dynamicresources.

E - EXEC

E See Erlang.

E1 Also known as CEPT1. The 2.048 Mbit/s rate used by EuropeanCEPT carrier to transmit 30 64 kbit/s digital channels for voiceor data calls, plus a 64 kbit/s signalling channel and a 64 kbit/schannel for framing and maintenance.

E Interface Interface between MSC and MSC.

EA External Alarm. See EAS. Typical external alarms are: Dooropen, High humidity, Low humidity, Fire, Intruder.

EAS External Alarm System. The EAS is responsible for the monitoringof all customer-defined environmental alarms at a site. Thecustomer defines the alarm string and the severity of the alarmsbased on the individual requirements of the site. Indications areprovided when the alarms are set or cleared.

Eb/No Energy per Bit/Noise floor, where Eb is the signal energy per bitand No is the noise energy per hertz of noise bandwidth.

EBCG Elementary Basic Service Group.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsEC Echo Canceller. Performs echo suppression for all voice circuits.

If cancellation does not take place, the PLMN subscriber hearsthe voice signal as an echo, due to the total round-trip delayintroduced by the GSM system (typically 180 ms).

ECB Provides echo cancelling for telephone trunks for 30 channels(EC).

ECID The Motorola European Cellular Infrastructure Division.

ECM Error Correction Mode. A facsimile mode, in which the sendingmachine will attempt to send a partial page up to four times.

Ec/No Ratio of energy per modulating bit to the noise spectral density.

ECSD Enhanced Circuit Switched Data ( HSCSD + EDGE)

ECT Event Counting Tool. The ECT provides information about thenumber and type of events and alarms generated throughout thenetwork. It extracts data from the event log files for specifieddates, allowing the user to generate reports on individual networkelements, groups of elements, or the whole network.

ECT Explicit Call Transfer supplementary service. ECT enables auser to connect two other parties with which he is engaged in atelephone call and leave the connection himself.

EDGE Enhanced Data-rates for Global Evolution.

EEL Electric Echo Loss.

EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory. AnEEPROM is a special type of PROM that can be erased byexposing it to an electrical charge. Like other types of PROM,EEPROM retains its contents even when the power is turned off.

EGPRS Enhanced GPRS.

EGSM900 Extended GSM900. EGSM900 provides the BSS with a furtherrange of frequencies for MS and BSS transmit. EGSM MSs canuse the extended frequency band as well as the primary band,while non-EGSM MSs cannot use the extended frequency band.A GSM900 cell can contain both GSM900 and EGSM900 carrierhardware. EGSM operates on the frequency range, 880 - 915MHz (receive) and 925 - 960 MHz (transmit).

EI Events Interface. Part of the OMC-R GUI.

EIA Electronic Industries Alliance.

EIR Equipment Identity Register. The EIR contains a centralizeddatabase for validating the IMEI. The register consists of lists ofIMEIs organised as follows: White List - IMEIs which are knownto have been assigned to valid MS equipment. Black List - IMEIswhich have been reported stolen or which are to be denied servicefor some other reason. Grey List - IMEIs which have problems(for example, faulty software). These are not, however, sufficientlysignificant to warrant a black listing.

EIRP Effective Isotropically Radiated Power. The arithmetic product ofthe power supplied to an antenna and its gain.

EIRP Equipment Identity Register Procedure.

EL Echo Loss.


11-25


Glossary of technical termsEM Event Management. An OMC-R application. It provides a

centralised facility for reporting network-wide generated eventsand alarms, and for monitoring the status of the Network.

EMC ElectroMagnetic Compatibility. The ability of systems, equipment,and devices that utilize the electromagnetic spectrum to operatein their intended operational environments without sufferingunacceptable degradation or causing unintentional degradationbecause of electromagnetic radiation or response.

EMF Electro Motive Force. The rate at which energy is drawn from asource that produces a flow of electricity in a circuit; expressedin volts.

EMI Electro Magnetic Interference. Any electromagnetic disturbancethat interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or limits theeffective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.

eMLPP enhanced Multi-Level Precedence and Pre-emption service. Thisservice has two parts: precedence and pre-emption. Precedenceinvolves assigning a priority level to a call in combination withfast call set-up. Pre-emption involves the seizing of resources,which are in use by a call of a lower precedence, by a higher levelprecedence call in the absence of idle resources. Pre-emptioncan also involve the disconnection of an on-going call of lowerprecedence to accept an incoming call of higher precedence.

EMMI Electrical Man Machine Interface.

EMX Electronic Mobile Exchange (Motorola’s MSC family).

en bloc Fr. - all at once (a CCITT #7 Digital Transmission scheme);En bloc sending means that digits are sent from one system toanother ~ (that is, all the digits for a given call are sent at the sametime as a group). ~ sending is the opposite of overlap sending.A system using ~ sending will wait until it has collected all thedigits for a given call before it attempts to send digits to the nextsystem. All the digits are then sent as a group.

END END Message ( TCAP)

EOP Enhanced One-Phase

EOT End of Tape.

EPCR EGPRS Packet Channel Request.

EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory. EPROM is a type ofmemory that retains its contents until it is exposed to ultravioletlight. The ultraviolet light clears its contents, making it possible tore-program the memory.

EPSM Enhanced Power Supply Module. Used in +27 V positive earthcabinets.

EQ50 Static model against which the performance of the equalizer istested to extremes. See also TU3, TU50, HT100 and RA250.

EQB Equalizer Board. Control circuit for equalization for 8 time slotseach with equalizing circuitry and a DSP.

EQCP Equalizer Control Processor.

EQDSP Equalizer Digitizer Signal Processor.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsEqualization The process by which attenuation and/or phase shift is rendered

essentially constant over a band of frequencies, even though thetransmission medium or the equipment has losses that vary withfrequency.

Equalizer An electrical network in which attenuation (or gain) and/orphase shift varies as a function of frequency. Used to provideequalization.

Erlang International (dimensionless) unit of traffic intensity defined asthe ratio of time a facility is occupied to the time it is availablefor occupancy. One erlang is equal to 36 CCS. In the US this isalso known as a traffic unit (TU).

ERP Ear Reference Point. Facility for assessing handset and headsetacoustic responses.

ERP Effective Radiated Power. The power supplied to an antennamultiplied by the antenna gain in a given direction.

ERR ERRor.

ESN Electronic Serial Number (North American Market)

ESP Encapsulating Security Payload ( RFC 2406)

ESP Electro-static Point. Connection point on the equipment for ananti-static wrist strap.

ESQL Embedded SQL (Structured Query Language). An RDBMSprogramming interface language.

E-TACS Extended TACS (analogue cellular system, extended).

Ethernet A standard protocol (IEEE 802.3) for a 10 Mbit/s baseband localarea network (LAN) bus using carrier-sense multiple accesswith collision detection (CSMA/CD) as the access method,implemented at the Physical Layer in the OSI RM, establishingthe physical characteristics of a CSMA/CD network.

ETR ETSI Technical Report.

ETS European Telecommunication Standard.

ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute.

ETX End of Transmission.

EXEC Executive Process.

F Interface - Full Rate

F Interface Interface between MSC and EIR.

FA Fax Adaptor. Device which complements Group 3 facsimileapparatus in order to be able to communicate over a GSMPLMN.

FA Full Allocation.

FA Functional Area.

FAC Final Assembly Code.


11-27


Glossary of technical termsFACCH Fast Associated Control Channel. A GSM dedicated control

channel which temporarily uses the TCH to perform high speedtransmissions, and carries control information after a call is setup. See also SDCCH.

FACCH/F Fast Associated Control Channel/Full rate. See also Full Rate.

FACCH/H Fast Associated Control Channel/Half rate. See also Half Rate.

FACH Forward Access Channel (UMTS Transport Channel)

FB See Frequency correction burst.

FBI Feedback Information UMTS

FBI Final Block Indicator

FBM Flow control Buffer Management. FBM is a functional unitresiding on the PRP. It controls buffer capacity for each celland each mobile so that the incoming data from the SGSNmatches the air throughput.

FC-AL Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop. A serial data transferarchitecture. FC-AL is designed for mass storage devices andother peripheral devices that require very high bandwidth.Using optical fibre to connect devices, FC-AL supportsfull-duplex data transfer rates of 100MBps.

FCCH Frequency Correction CHannel. A GSM broadcast controlchannel which carries information for frequency correction ofthe MS.

FCP Fault Collection Process. Part of the fault management processin the BTS.

FCS Frame Check Sequence. The extra characters added to aframe for error detection and correction.

FDD Frequency Division Duplex

FDDI Fiber Distributed Data Interconnect (optical Layer 2)

FDM Frequency Division Multiplex. A multiplexing technique thatuses different frequencies to combine multiple streams of datafor transmission over a communications medium. FDM assignsa discrete carrier frequency to each data stream and thencombines many modulated carrier frequencies for transmission.

FDMA Frequency Division Multiple Access. The use of frequencydivision to provide multiple and simultaneous transmissionsto a single transponder.

FDN Fixed Dialling Number. The fixed dialling feature limits diallingfrom the MS to a pre-determined list maintained on the SIMcard. It can be used to limit calling to certain areas, exchangesor full phone numbers.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsFDP Fault Diagnostic Procedure.

FEC Forward Error Correction. Correction of transmission errors bytransmitting additional information with the original bit stream.If an error is detected, the additional information is used torecreate the original information.

FEP Front End Processor. An OMC-R device. The FEP is a driverthat stores data in its own database about all of the sites in thesystem. All bursts from the sites are directed to the FEP. It canalso interrogate the sites and collect its data either manually orautomatically at pre-defined times.

FER Frame Erasure Ratio. The ratio of successfully decoded goodspeech frames against unsuccessfully decoded bad frames.

FFS, FS For Further Study.

FH See Frequency Hopping.

FHI Frequency Hopping Indicator.

FIB Forward Indicator Bit. Used in SS7 - Message Transfer Part.The forward indicator bit and backward indicator bit togetherwith the forward sequence number and backward sequencenumber are used in the basic error control method to performthe signal unit sequence control and acknowledgementfunctions.

FIFO Memory logic device in which the information placed in thememory in a given order is retrieved in that order.

FIR Finite Impulse Response (filter type).

FISU Fill In Signal Unit

FK Foreign Key. A database column attribute; the foreign keyindicates an index into another table.

FM Fault Management (at OMC).

FM Frequency Modulation. Modulation in which the instantaneousfrequency of a sine wave carrier is caused to depart fromthe centre frequency by an amount proportional to theinstantaneous value of the modulating signal.

FMC Fixed Mobile Convergence

FMIC Fault Management Initiated Clear. An alarm type. If an FMICalarm is received, the fault management software for thenetwork item clears the alarm when the problem is solved. Seealso Intermittent and OIC.

FMUX Fibre optic MUltipleXer module.

FN Frame Number. Identifies the position of a particular TDMAframe within a hyperframe.

FOA First Office Application. A full functional verification of newproduct(s) on a commercial system using accepted technologyand approved test plans.

FOX Fibre Optic eXtender board.

FPB First Partial Bitmap


11-29


Glossary of technical termsFR See Full Rate.

FR Frame Relay. An interface protocol for statisticallymultiplexed packet-switched data communications in which(a) variable-sized packets (frames) are used that completelyenclose the user packets they transport, and (b) transmissionrates are usually between 56 kb/s and 1.544 Mb/s (the T-1 rate).

Frame A set of consecutive Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) time slotscontaining samples from all channels of a group, where theposition of each sample is identified by reference to a framealignment signal. Also, an information or signal structure whichallows a receiver to identify uniquely an information channel.

Frame Alignment The state in which the frame of the receiving equipment issynchronized with respect to that of the received signal toaccomplish accurate data extraction.

FRMR Frame Reject

FRU Field Replaceable Unit. A board, module, etc. which can beeasily replaced in the field with a few simple tools.

Frequency Correction Period of RF carrier less than one timeslot whose modulationbit stream allows frequency correction to be performed easilywithin an MS burst.

Frequency Hopping The repeated switching of frequencies during radio transmissionaccording to a specified algorithm. Frequency hoppingimproves capacity and quality in a highly loaded GSM network.Multipath fading immunity can be increased by using differentfrequencies and interference coming from neighbour cellstransmitting the same or adjacent frequencies can be reduced.

FS Frequency Synchronization. All BSS frequencies and timingsignals are synchronized to a high stability reference oscillatorin the BSS. This oscillator can free run or be synchronized tothe recovered clock signal from a selected E1/T1 serial link.MSs lock to a reference contained in a synchronization bursttransmitted from the BTS site.

FSL Free Space Loss. The decrease in the strength of a radiosignal as it travels between a transmitter and receiver. TheFSL is a function of the frequency of the radio signal and thedistance the radio signal has travelled from the point source.

FSN Forward Sequence Number. See FIB.

FTAM File Transfer, Access, and Management. An ASE whichprovides a means to transfer information from file to file. (OMC).

ftn forwarded-to number.

FTP Fault Translation Process (in BTS).

FTP File Transfer Protocol. A client-server protocol which allowsa user on one computer to transfer files to and from anothercomputer over a TCP/IP network. Also the client program theuser executes to transfer files (RFC 959).

Full Rate Refers to the current capacity of a data channel on the GSMair interface, that is, 8 simultaneous calls per carrier. See alsoHR - Half Rate.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical terms

G Interface - GWY

G Interface Interface between VLR and VLR.

Gateway MSC An MSC that provides an entry point into the GSM PLMNfrom another network or service. A gateway MSC is also aninterrogating node for incoming PLMN calls.

GB, Gbyte Gigabyte. 230 bytes = 1,073,741,824 bytes = 1024 megabytes.

GBIC Gigabit Interface Converter Converter for connection to theGigabit Ethernet.

GBL Gb Link.

GBM Gb Manager.

GCC Generic Call Control

GCLK Generic Clock board. System clock source, one per site (partof BSS, BTS, BSC, IWF, RXCDR).

GCR Group Call Register. The register which holds informationabout VGCS or VBS calls.

GDP Generic DSP Processor board. Interchangeable with theXCDR board.

GDP E1 GDP board configured for E1 link usage.

GDP T1 GDP board configured for T1 link usage.

GDS GPRS Data Stream.

GEA GPRS Encryption Algorithm

GERAN GSM EDGE Radio Access Network

GGSN Gateway GPRS Support Node. The GGSN provides internetworking with external packet-switched networks.

GHz Giga-Hertz (109).

GID Group ID. A unique number used by the system to identify auser’s primary group.

GIP GPRS Initialization Process

GMB GSM Multiplexer Board (part of the BSC).

GMM GPRS Mobility Management.

GMR General Manual Revision.

GMSC Gateway Mobile-services Switching Centre. See GatewayMSC.

GMSC-S Gateway MSC Server

GMSK Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying. The modulation techniqueused in GSM.

GND GrouND.


11-31


Glossary of technical termsGOS Grade of Service. A traffic statistic defined as the percentage

of calls which have a Probability of Busy or Queueing Delay.An alternative criterion is a maximum time for a percentageof calls to wait in the busy queue before they are assigned avoice channel.

GPA GSM PLMN Area.

GPC General Protocol Converter.

G-PDU T-PDU + GTP-Header

GPROC Generic Processor board. GSM generic processor board: a68030 with 4 to 16 Mb RAM (part of BSS, BTS, BSC, IWF,RXCDR).

GPROC2 Generic Processor board. GSM generic processor board: a68040 with 32 Mb RAM (part of BSS, BTS, BSC, IWF, RXCDR).

{4354} GPROC3 Generic Processor board. GSM generic processor board:a 68060 with 128 Mb RAM (part of BSS, BTS, BSC, IWF,RXCDR).

GPRS General Packet Radio Service. A GSM data transmissiontechnique that does not set up a continuous channel from aportable terminal for the transmission and reception of data, buttransmits and receives data in packets. It makes very efficientuse of available radio spectrum, and users pay only for thevolume of data sent and received.

GPS Global Positioning by Satellite. A system for determiningposition on the Earth’s surface by comparing radio signals fromseveral satellites.

GR Gb Router.

GSA GSM Service Area. The area in which an MS can be reachedby a fixed subscriber, without the subscriber’s knowledge of thelocation of the MS. A GSA may include the areas served byseveral GSM PLMNs.

GSA GSM System Area. The group of GSM PLMN areas accessibleby GSM MSs.

GSD GSM Systems Division.

GSL GPRS Signalling Link.

GSM Groupe Spécial Mobile (the committee).

GSM Global System for Mobile communications (the system).

GSM900 See PGSM.

GSM MS GSM Mobile Station.

GSM PLMN GSM Public Land Mobile Network.

GSM RF GSM Radio Frequency.

GSN GPRS Support Node. The combined functions provided bythe SGSN and GGSN.

GSN Complex A GSN Complex consists of an ISS Cluster, GGSN and SGSNsconnected to a single CommHub.

GSR GSM Software Release.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsGT Global Title. A logical or virtual address used for routing SS7

messages using SCCP capabilities. To complete messagerouting, a GT must be translated to a SS7 point code andsubsystem number.

GTE Generic Table Editor. The Motorola procedure which allowsusers to display and edit MCDF input files.

GTM Gb Transmit Manager.

GTP GPRS Tunneling Protocol

GTS GBRS TBF Scheduler

Guard period Period at the beginning and end of timeslot during which MStransmission is attenuated.

GUI Graphical User Interface. A computer environment or programthat displays, or facilitates the display of, on-screen options.These options are usually in the form of icons (pictorialsymbols) or menus (lists of alphanumeric characters) by meansof which users may enter commands.

GUI client A computer used to display a GUI from an OMC-R GUIapplication which is being run on a GUI server.

GUI server A computer used to serve the OMC-R GUI application processrunning locally (on its processor) to other computers (GUIclients or other MMI processors).

GWM GateWay Manager.

GWY GateWaY (MSC/LR) interface to PSTN.

H Interface - Hyperframe

H Interface Interface between HLR and AUC.

H-M Human-Machine Terminals.

HAD, HAP HLR Authentication Distributor.

Half Rate Refers to a type of data channel that will double the currentGSM air interface capacity to 16 simultaneous calls per carrier(see also FR - Full Rate).

HANDO, Handover HANDOver. The action of switching a call in progress fromone radio channel to another radio channel. Handover allowsestablished calls to continue by switching them to anotherradio resource, as when an MS moves from one BTS area toanother. Handovers may take place between the followingGSM entities: timeslot, RF carrier, cell, BTS, BSS and MSC.

HCS Hierarchical Cell Structure

HCU Hybrid Combining Unit. (Used in Horizonmacro). Part ofthe DDF, the HDU allows the outputs of three radios to becombined into a single antenna.

HDLC High level Data Link Control. A link-level protocol used tofacilitate reliable point-to-point transmission of a data packet.Note: A subset of HDLC, LAP-B, is the layer-two protocol forCCITT Recommendation X.25.


11-33


Glossary of technical termsHDSL High bit-rate Digital Subscriber Line. HDSL is a data

transmission mechanism which supports duplex high speeddigital communication (at E1 rates) on one or more unshieldedtwisted pair lines.

HLC High Layer Compatibility. The HLC can carry informationdefining the higher layer characteristics of a teleservice activeon the terminal.

HLR Home Location Register. The LR where the current locationand all subscriber parameters of an MS are permanently stored.

HMAC Keyed Hashing for Message Authentication ( RFC 2104)

HMS Heat Management System. The system that providesenvironmental control of the components inside the ExCell,TopCell and M-Cell cabinets.

HO HandOver. See HANDO.

HPU Hand Portable Unit. A handset.

HOLD Call hold supplementary service. Call hold allows thesubscriber to place a call on hold in order to make another call.When the second call is completed, the subscriber can returnto the first call.

HPLMN Home PLMN.

HR See Half Rate.

HS HandSet.

HSCSD High Speed Circuit Switched Data

HSI/S High Speed Interface card.

HSM HLR Subscriber Management.

HSN Hopping Sequence Number. HSN is a index indicating thespecific hopping sequence (pattern) used in a given cell. Itranges from 0 to 63.

HT100 Hilly Terrain with the MS travelling at 100 kph. Dynamic modelagainst which the performance of a GSM receiver can bemeasured. See also TU3, TU50, RA250 and EQ50.

HTTP HyperText Transfer Protocol ( RFC 2616)

HU Home Units. The basic telecommunication unit as set by theHPLMN. This value is expressed in the currency of the homecountry.

HW Hardware.

Hybrid Combiner A combiner device which requires no software control and issufficiently broadband to be able to cover the GSM transmitterfrequency band. See also COMB.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsHybrid Transformer A circuit used in telephony to convert 2-wire operation to

4-wire operation and vice versa. For example, every land-linetelephone contains a hybrid to separate earpiece andmouthpiece audio and couple both into a 2-wire circuit thatconnects the phone to the exchange.

Hyperframe 2048 superframes. The longest recurrent time period of theframe structure.

I - IWU

I Information frames. Part of RLP.

I+S Information + Supervisory

IA Incoming Access supplementary service. An arrangementwhich allows a member of a CUG to receive calls from outsidethe CUG.

IA5 International Alphanumeric 5 character set.

IADU Integrated Antenna Distribution Unit. The IADU is theequivalent of the Receive Matrix used on BTSs that pre-datethe M-Cell range.

IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority

IAM Initial Address Message. A message sent in the forwarddirection that contains (a) address information, (b) the signalinginformation required to route and connect a call to the calledline, (c) service-class information, (d) information relating touser and network facilities, and (e) call-originator identity orcall-receiver identity.

IAS Internal Alarm System. The IAS is responsible for monitoringall cabinet alarms at a BSS.

IC Integrated Circuit. An electronic circuit that consists ofmany individual circuit elements, such as transistors,diodes, resistors, capacitors, inductors, and other active andpassive semiconductor devices, formed on a single chip ofsemiconducting material and mounted on a single piece ofsubstrate material.

IC Interlock Code. A code which uniquely identifies a CUG withina network.

IC(pref) Interlock Code of the preferential CUG.

ICANN Internet Corporation for Assigned Names and Numbers

ICB Incoming Calls Barred. An access restriction that prevents aCUG member from receiving calls from other members of thatgroup.

ICC Integrated Circuit(s) Card.

ICH Indicator Channel (UMTS Physical Channel / see also PICH,AICH, CD/CA-ICH)

ICM In-Call Modification. Function which allows the service mode(speech, facsimile, data) to be changed during a call.


11-35


Glossary of technical termsICMP Internet Control Message Protocol. An extension to the Internet

Protocol (IP) that allows for the generation of error messages,test packets, and informational messages related to IP. ThePING command, for example, uses ICMP to test an Internetconnection( RFC 792).

I-CSCF Interrogating Call Session Control Function ( SIP)

ID, Id IDentification/IDentity/IDentifier.

IDN Integrated Digital Network. A network that uses both digitaltransmission and digital switching.

IDS Interface Design Specification.

IDS Informix Dynamic Server. The OMC-R relational databasemanagement system.

IE Information Element. The part of a message that containsconfiguration or signalling information.

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission. An internationalstandards and conformity assessment body for electrical,electronic and related technologies.

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. A non-profit,technical professional association.

IEI Information Element Identifier. The identifier field of the IE.

IETF Internet Engineering Task Force (www.ietf.org)

I-ETS Interim European Telecommunication Standard.

IF Intermediate Frequency. A frequency to which a carrierfrequency is shifted as an intermediate step in transmissionor reception.

IFAM Initial and Final Address Message.

IHOSS Internet Hosted Octet Stream Service

IKE Internet Key Exchange ( RFC 2409)

IKMP Internet Key Management Protocol

ILCM Incoming Leg Control Model

IM InterModulation. The production, in a nonlinear element of asystem, of frequencies corresponding to the sum and differencefrequencies of the fundamentals and harmonics thereof thatare transmitted through the element.

IMACS Intelligent Monitor And Control System.

IMEI International Mobile station Equipment Identity. Electronicserial number that uniquely identifies the MS as a piece orassembly of equipment. The IMEI is sent by the MS along withrequest for service. See also IMEISV.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsIMEISV International Mobile station Equipment Identity and Software

Version number. The IMEISV is a 16 digit decimal numbercomposed of four elements:- a 6 digit Type Approval Code; - a2 digit Final Assembly Code; - a 6 digit Serial Number; and - a2 digit Software Version Number (SVN).The first three elements comprise the IMEI. When the networkrequests the IMEI from the MS, the SVN (if present) is also senttowards the network. See also IMEI and SVN.

IMM IMMediate assignment message. IMMs are sent from thenetwork to the MS to indicate that the MS must immediatelystart monitoring a specified channel.

IMPI IP Multimedia Private Identity

IMPU IP Multimedia Public Identity

IMS Internet Protocol Multimedia Core Network Subsystem ( Rel. 5onwards)

IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity. Published mobilenumber (prior to ISDN) that uniquely identifies the subscription.It can serve as a key to derive subscriber information such asdirectory number(s) from the HLR. See also MSISDN.

IMT-2000 International Mobile Telecommunications for the year 2000

IN Intelligent Network. A network that allows functionality tobe distributed flexibly at a variety of nodes on and off thenetwork and allows the architecture to be modified to controlthe services.

IN Interrogating Node. A switching node that interrogates an HLR,to route a call for an MS to the visited MSC.

INS IN Service.

INS Intelligent Network Service. A service provided using thecapabilities of an intelligent network. See also IN.

InterAlg Interference Algorithm.

Intermittent Intermittent alarms are transient and not usually associatedwith a serious fault condition. After the intermittent alarms aredisplayed in the Alarm window, the operator must handle andclear the alarm. The system will report every occurrence of anintermittent alarm unless it is throttled. See also FMIC and OIC.

Interworking The general term used to describe the inter-operation ofnetworks, services, supplementary services and so on. Seealso IWF.

Interval A recording period of time in which a statistic is pegged.

Interval expiry The end of an interval.

I/O Input/Output.

IOS Intelligent Optimization Service. Tool for improving the networkquality. The IOS generates reports based on performance datafrom the BTS and OMC-R.

IOV-I / IOV-UI Input Offset Variable for I+S and UI-Frames ( for ciphering inGPRS)


11-37


Glossary of technical termsIP Initialisation Process. The IP is primarily responsible for

bringing up the site from a reset, including code loadingthe site from a suitable code source. IP also provides theCSFP functionality, allowing two BSS code load version to beswapped very quickly, allowing the site to return to service assoon as possible.

IP Internet Protocol. A standard protocol designed for usein interconnected systems of packet-switched computercommunication networks. IP provides for transmitting blocksof data called datagrams from sources to destinations,where sources and destinations are hosts identified byfixed-length addresses. The internet protocol also provides forfragmentation and reassembly of long datagrams, if necessary,for transmission through small-packet networks ( RFC 791).See also TCP and TCP/IP.

IPBCP IP Bearer Control Protocol ( ITU-T Q.1970)

IPC Inter-Process Communication. Exchange of data between oneprocess and another, either within the same computer or overa network.

IPCP Internet Protocol Control Protocol ( RFC 1332)

IP, INP INtermodulation Products. Distortion. A type of spuriousemission.

IPR Intellectual PRoperty.

IPSM Integrated Power Supply Module (-48 V).

IPX Internetwork Packet EXchange A networking protocol used bythe Novell NetWare operating systems. Like UDP/IP, IPX is adatagram protocol used for connectionless communications.Higher-level protocols are used for additional error recoveryservices.

IR Incremental Redundancy (Hybrid Type II ARQ)

Iridium A communications system comprising a constellation of 66low-earth-orbiting (LEO) satellites forming a mobile wirelesssystem allowing subscribers to place and receive calls from anylocation in the world. The satellite constellation is connectedto existing terrestrial telephone systems through a number ofgateway ground-stations.

ISAKMP Internet Security Association and Key Management Protocol

ISAM Indexed Sequential Access Method. A method for managingthe way a computer accesses records and files stored on ahard disk. While storing data sequentially, ISAM provides directaccess to specific records through an index. This combinationresults in quick data access regardless of whether records arebeing accessed sequentially or randomly.

ISC International Switching Centre. The ISC routes calls to/fromother countries.

ISCP Interference Signal Code Power ( 3GTS 25.215 / 3GTS 25.102)


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsISDN Integrated Services Digital Network. A digital network using

common switches and digital transmission paths to establishconnections for various services such as telephony, data telex,and facsimile. See also B channel and D channel.

ISG Motorola Information Systems group (formerly CODEX).

ISO International Organisation for Standardization. ISO is aworld-wide federation of national standards bodies from some130 countries, one from each country.

ISP Internet Service Provider

ISQL An Interactive Structured Query Language client application forthe database server. See also IDS.

ISS Integrated Support Server. The ISS resides on a Sun Netrat 1125 and performs the CGF, DNS, NTP, and NFS functionsfor the GSN.

IST Integrated System Test.

ISUP ISDN User Part. An upper-layer application supported bysignalling system No. 7 for connection set up and tear down (ITU-T Q.761 – Q.765).

IT Inactivity Test (Part of SCCP network connectivity).

ITC Information Transfer Capability. A GSM Bearer CapabilityElement which is provided on the Dm channel to supportTerminal adaptation function to Interworking control procedures.

ITU International Telecommunication Union. An intergovernmentalorganization through which public and private organizationsdevelop telecommunications. It is responsible for adoptinginternational treaties, regulations and standards governingtelecommunications.

ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - TelecommunicationsStandardization Sector. The standardization functions wereformerly performed by CCITT, a group within the ITU.

Iub-FP Iub-Frame Protocol ( 3GTS 25.427 / 25.435)

Iu-FP Iu-Frame Protocol ( 3GTS 25.415)

Iur-FP Iur-Frame Protocol ( 3GTS 25.424, 3GTS 25.425, 25.426,25.435)

IWF InterWorking Function. A network functional entity whichprovides network interworking, service interworking,supplementary service interworking or signalling interworking.It may be a part of one or more logical or physical entities in aGSM PLMN.

IWMSC InterWorking MSC. MSC that is used to deliver data to/fromSGSN.

IWU InterWorking Unit. Unit where the digital to analogue (and visaversa) conversion takes place within the digital GSM network.


11-39



k - KW

k kilo (103).

k Windows size.

K Constraint length of the convolutional code.

KAIO Kernel Asynchronous Input/Output. Part of the OMC-Rrelational database management system.

kb, kbit kilo-bit.

kbit/s, kbps kilo-bits per second.

kbyte kilobyte. 210 bytes = 1024 bytes

Kc Ciphering key. A sequence of symbols that controls theoperation of encipherment and decipherment.

kHz kilo-Hertz.

Ki Individual subscriber authentication Key. Part of theauthentication process of the AUC.

KIO A class of processor.

KPI Key Performance Indicator.

KSW Kiloport SWitch board. TDM timeslot interchanger to connectcalls. Part of the BSS.

KSWX KSW Expander half size board. Fibre optic distribution of TDMbus. Part of the BSS.

kW kilo-Watt.

L1 - LV

L1 Layer 1 (of a communications protocol).


L2ML Layer 2 Management Link. L2ML is used for transferring layer2 management messages to TRX or BCF. One link per TRXand BCF.

L2R Layer 2 Relay function. A function of an MS and IWF thatadapts a user’s known layer 2 protocol LAPB onto RLP fortransmission between the MT and IWF.

L2R BOP L2R Bit Orientated Protocol.

L2R COP L2R Character Orientated Protocol.

L2TP Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol ( RFC 2661)


LA Link Adaptation.

LA Location Area. An area in which an MS may move freelywithout updating the location register. An LA may comprise oneor several base station areas.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsLAC Location Area Code. The LAC is part of the LAI. It is an

operator defined code identifying the location area.

LAI Location Area Identity. The information indicating the locationarea in which a cell is located. The LAI data on the SIM iscontinuously updated to reflect the current location of thesubscriber.

LAN Local Area Network. A data communications system that (a)lies within a limited spatial area, (b) has a specific user group,(c) has a specific topology, and (d) is not a public switchedtelecommunications network, but may be connected to one.

LANX LAN Extender half size board. Fibre optic distribution of LANto/from other cabinets. Part of BSS, etc.

LAPB Link Access Protocol Balanced. The balanced-mode, enhancedversion of HDLC. Used in X.25 packet-switching networks.

LAPD Link Access Protocol D-channel (Data). A protocol thatoperates at the data link layer (layer 2) of the OSI architecture.LAPD is used to convey information between layer 3 entitiesacross the frame relay network. The D-channel carriessignalling information for circuit switching.

LAPDm Link Access Protocol on the Dm channel. A link accessprocedure (layer 2) on the CCH for the digital mobilecommunications system.

Layer 1 See OSI-RM and Physical Layer.

Layer 2 See OSI-RM and Data Link Layer.

Layer 3 See OSI-RM and Network Layer.

Layer 4 See OSI-RM and Transport Layer.

Layer 5 See OSI-RM and Session Layer.

Layer 6 See OSI-RM and Presentation Layer.

Layer 7 See OSI-RM and Application Layer.

LC Inductor Capacitor. A type of filter.

LCF Link Control Function. LCF GPROC controls various links inand out of the BSC. Such links include MTL, XBL, OMF andRSL. See also LCP.

LCN Local Communications Network. A communication networkwithin a TMN that supports data communication functions(DCFs) normally at specified reference points q1 and q2. LCNsrange from the simple to the complex. LCN examples includepoint-to-point connections and networks based on star andbus topologies.

LCP Link Control Processor. An LCP is a GPROC or PCMCIAboard device which supplies the LCF. Once the LCF has beenequipped, and assuming GPROCs have been equipped,processors are allocated by the software.

LCS Location Services

LE Local Exchange.


11-41


Glossary of technical termsLED Light Emitting Diode. A type of diode that emits light when

current passes through it. Depending on the material used thecolour can be visible or infrared.

LF Line Feed. A code that moves the cursor on a display screendown one line. In the ASCII character set, a line feed has adecimal value of 10. On printers, a line feed advances thepaper one line.

LI Length Indicator. Delimits LLC PDUs within the RLC datablock, when an LLC PDU boundary occurs in the block.

LI Line Identity. The LI is made up of a number of informationunits: the subscriber’s national ISDN/MSISDN number; thecountry code; optionally, subaddress information. In a fullISDN environment, the line identity includes all of the addressinformation necessary to unambiguously identify a subscriber.The calling line identity is the line identity of the calling party.The connected line identity is the line identity of the connectedparty.

LLC Logical Link Control.

LLC Lower Layer Compatibility. The LLC can carry informationdefining the lower layer characteristics of the terminal.

Lm Traffic channel with capacity lower than a Bm.

LMP LAN Monitor Process. Each GPROC which is connected to aLAN has an LMP, which detects faults on the LAN. LAN alarmsare generated by the GPROC.

LMS Least Mean Squares. Parameters determined by minimizingthe sum of squares of the deviations.

LMSI Local Mobile Station Identity. A unique identity temporarilyallocated to visiting mobile subscribers in order to speed upthe search for subscriber data in the VLR, when the MSRNallocation is done on a per cell basis.

LMT Local Maintenance Terminal. Diagnostic tool, typically an IBMcompatible PC.

LNA Low Noise Amplifier. An amplifier with low noise characteristics.

LND Last Number Dialled.

Location area An area in which a mobile station may move freely withoutupdating the location register. A location area may compriseone or several base station areas.

LPC Linear Predictive Coding. A method of digitally encoding analogsignals. It uses a single-level or multi-level sampling system inwhich the value of the signal at each sample time is predictedto be a linear function of the past values of the quantified signal.

LPD Link Protocol Discriminator

LPLMN Local PLMN.

LQC Link Quality Control.

LR Location Register. The GSM functional unit where MS locationinformation is stored. The HLR and VLR are location registers.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsLSB Least Significant Bit

LSSU Link Stations Signalling Unit (Part of MTP transport system).

LSTR Listener Side Tone Rating. A rating, expressed in dB, basedon how a listener will perceive the background noise pickedup by the microphone.

LTA Long Term Average. The value required in a BTS’s GCLKfrequency register to produce a 16.384 MHz clock.

LTE Local Terminal Emulator.

LTP Long Term Predictive.

LTU Line Terminating Unit.

LU Local Units.

LU Location Update. A location update is initiated by the MS whenit detects that it has entered a new location area.

LV Length and Value.

M - MUX

M Mandatory.

M Mega (106).

M3UA MTP-3 User Adaptation Layer ( RFC 3332 / 3GPP 29.202(Annex A))

M-Cell Motorola Cell.

M&TS Maintenance and TroubleShooting. Functional area of NetworkManagement software which (1) collects and displays alarms,(2) collects and displays Software/Hardware errors, and (3)activates test diagnostics at the NEs (OMC).

MA Mobile Allocation. The radio frequency channels allocated toan MS for use in its frequency hopping sequence.

MAC Medium Access Control. MAC includes the functions relatedto the management of the common transmission resources.These include the packet data physical channels and theirradio link connections. Two Medium Access Control modes aresupported in GSR5, dynamic allocation and fixed allocation.(UMTS 3GTS 25.321) (E)GPRS 3GTS 04.60 / 3GTS 44.060)

MACN Mobile Allocation Channel Number. See also MA.

Macrocell A cell in which the base station antenna is generally mountedaway from buildings or above rooftop level.

MAF Mobile Additional Function.

MAH Mobile Access Hunting supplementary service. An automaticservice which searches for the first available mobile user out ofa defined group.

MAI Mobile Allocation Index.

MAIDT Mean Accumulated Intrinsic Down Time.


11-43


Glossary of technical termsMAINT MAINTenance.

MAIO Mobile Allocation Index Offset. The offset of the mobile hoppingsequence from the reference hopping sequence of the cell.

MAP Mobile Application Part (part of SS7 standard). Theinter-networking signalling between MSCs and LRs and EIRs.

MAPP Mobile Application Part Processor.

MASF Minimum Available Spreading Factor

Max [X, Y] The value shall be the maximum of X or Y, which ever is bigger

MB, Mbyte Megabyte. 220 bytes = 1,048,576 bytes = 1024 kilobytes.

Mbit/s Megabits per second.

MBZ Must Be Zero

MCAP Motorola Cellular Advanced Processor. The MCAP Bus is theinter-GPROC communications channel in a BSC. Each cardcage in a BSC needs at least one GPROC designated as anMCAP Server.

MCC Mobile Country Code. The first three digits of the IMSI, usedto identify the country.

MCDF Motorola Customer Data Format used by DataGen for simpledata entry and retrieval.

MCI Malicious Call Identification supplementary service. Thisfeature is supported by a malicious call trace function byprinting the report at the terminating MSC when the mobilesubscriber initiates a malicious call trace request.

MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme.

MCSC Motorola Customer Support Centre.

MCU Main Control Unit for M-Cell2/6. Also referred to as the MicroControl Unit in software.

MCUF Main Control Unit, with dual FMUX. (Used in M-Cellhorizon).

MCU-m Main Control Unit for M-Cellmicro sites (M-Cellm). Also referredto as the Micro Control Unit in software.

MCUm The software subtype representation of the Field ReplaceableUnit (FRU) for the MCU-m.

MD Mediation Device. The MD (which handles the Q3 interface)allows the OSI Processor to communicate between theNetwork Management Centre (NMC) and OMC-R for networkconfiguration, events and alarms.

MDL mobile Management entity - Data Link layer.

MD-X Message Digest Algorithm (MD-2, 4, 5 are defined) (MD-5RFC 1321)

ME Maintenance Entity (GSM Rec. 12.00).


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsME Mobile Equipment. Equipment intended to access a set of GSM

PLMN and/or DCS telecommunication services, but which doesnot contain subscriber related information. Services may beaccessed while the equipment, capable of surface movementwithin the GSM system area, is in motion or during halts atunspecified points.

MEF Maintenance Entity Function (GSM Rec. 12.00). A functionwhich possesses the capability to detect elementary anomaliesand convey them to the supervision process.

MF MultiFrame. In PCM systems, a set of consecutive frames inwhich the position of each frame can be identified by referenceto a multiframe alignment signal.

MF Multi-Frequency (tone signalling type). See DTMF.

MF MultiFunction block.

MEGACO Media Gateway Control Protocol ( ITU-T H.248 incl. Annex F –H and IETF RFC 3015)

MGCF Media Gateway Control Function

MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol ( RFC 2705)

MGMT, mgmt Management.

MGR Manager.

MGW Media Gateway

MHS Message Handling System. The family of services andprotocols that provides the functions for global electronic-mailtransfer among local mail systems.

MHS Mobile Handling Service.

MHz Mega-Hertz (106).

MI Maintenance Information.

MIB Management Information Base. A Motorola OMC-R database.There is a CM MIB and an EM MIB.

MIC Mobile Interface Controller.

Microcell A cell in which the base station antenna is generally mountedbelow rooftop level. Radio wave propagation is by diffractionand scattering around buildings, the main propagation is withinstreet canyons.

min minute(s).

MIN Mobile Identity Number (North American Market)

Min [X, Y] The value shall be the minimum of X or Y, which ever is smaller

µs micro-second (10-6).

µBCU Micro Base Control Unit. The µBCU is the Macro/Microcellimplementation of a BTS site controller.


11-45


Glossary of technical termsMIT Management Information Tree. A file on the Motorola OMC-R.

The MIT file effectively monitors data on every device andevery parameter of each device that is in the current versionsof software on the OMC-R. The data is stored as a text fileon the OMC-R. The MIT file also contains the hierarchicalrelationships between the network devices.

MLP MAC Logical Channel Priority

MM Man Machine. See MMI.

MM Mobility Management. MM functions include authorization,location updating, IMSI attach/detach, periodic registration, IDconfidentiality, paging, handover, etc.

MMCC Multimedia Call Control

MME Mobile Management Entity.

MMF Middle Man Funnel process.

MMI Man Machine Interface. The method by which the userinterfaces with the software to request a function or changeparameters. The MMI may run on a terminal at the OMC, oran LMT. The MMI is used to display alarm reports, retrievedevice status, take modules out of service and put modulesinto service.

MMI client A machine configured to use the OMC-R software from an MMIserver.

MMI processor MMI client/MMI server.

MMI server A computer which has its own local copy of the OMC-Rsoftware. It can run the OMC-R software for MMI clients tomount.

MML Man Machine Language. The tool of MMI.

MMS Multiple Serial Interface Link. (see also 2Mbit/s link)

MNC Mobile Network Code. The fourth, fifth and optionally sixthdigits of the IMSI, used to identify the network.

MNRG Mobile Not Reachable for GPRS flag

MNT MaiNTenance.

Mobis Motorola Signalling Link between the BSC and BTS.

MO Mobile Originated.

MOC Mobile Originating Call

MO/PP Mobile Originated Point-to-Point messages. Transmission ofa SMS from a mobile to a message handling system. Themaximum length of the message is 160 characters. Themessage can be sent whether or not the MS is engaged ina call.

MOMAP Motorola OMAP.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsMoU Memorandum of Understanding. Commercial term. An MoU

usually sets out the broad parameters of an understanding aswell as the general responsibilities and obligations of eachparty in a proposed venture. It has little legal significanceexcept to indicate the parties’ commitments and acts as an aidto interpreting the parties’ intentions. There are various typesof MOUs: compliance MOUs help ensure that all Motorolaunits comply with applicable laws and regulations; intellectualproperty MOUs deal with copyright, trademark, and patentrights; and business arrangement MOUs relate to the termsand conditions of a product or service transfer.

MPC Multi Personal Computer (was part of the OMC).

MPCC Multiparty Call Control

MPH (mobile) Management (entity) - PHysical (layer) [primitive].

MPROC Master Processor

MPTY MultiParTY (Multi ParTY) supplementary service. MPTYprovides a mobile subscriber with the ability to have amulti-connection call, i.e. a simultaneous communication withmore than one party.

MPX MultiPleXed.

MRC Micro Radio Control Unit.

MRFC Multimedia Resource Function Controller

MRFP Multimedia Resource Function Processor

MRN Mobile Roaming Number.

MRP Mouth Reference Point. Facility for assessing handset andheadset acoustic responses.

MRU Maximum Receive Unit ( PPP)

MRW Move Receiving Window

MS Mobile Station. The GSM subscriber unit. A subscriberhandset, either mobile or portable, or other subscriberequipment, such as facsimile machines, etc.

MSB Most Significant Bit

MSC Mobile-services Switching Centre, Mobile Switching Centre.The MSC handles the call set up procedures and controls thelocation registration and handover procedures for all exceptinter-BTS, inter-cell and intra-cell handovers. MSC controlledinter-BTS handovers can be set as an option at the switch.

MSCM Mobile Station Class Mark.

MSC-S MSC-Server

MSCU Mobile Station Control Unit.

msec millisecond (.001 second).

MSI Multiple Serial Interface board. Intelligent interface to two 2Mbit/s digital links. See 2 Mbit/s link and DS-2. Part of BSS.

MSIN Mobile Station Identification Number. The part of the IMSIidentifying the mobile station within its home network.


11-47


Glossary of technical termsMSISDN Mobile Station International ISDN Number. Published mobile

number (see also IMSI). Uniquely defines the mobile station asan ISDN terminal. It consists of three parts: the Country Code(CC), the National Destination Code (NDC) and the SubscriberNumber (SN).

MSS Maximum Segment Size ( TCP)

MSRN Mobile Station Roaming Number. A number assigned by theMSC to service and track a visiting subscriber.

MSU Message Signal Unit (Part of MTP transport system). A signalunit containing a service information octet and a signallinginformation field which is retransmitted by the signalling linkcontrol, if it is received in error.

MT Mobile Terminated. Describes a call or short message destinedfor an MS.

MT (0, 1, 2) Mobile Termination. The part of the MS which terminates theradio transmission to and from the network and adapts terminalequipment (TE) capabilities to those of the radio transmission.MT0 is mobile termination with no support for terminal, MT1is mobile termination with support for an S-type interface andMT2 is mobile termination with support for an R-type interface.

MTBE Mean Time Between Exceptions.

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures. An indicator of expected systemreliability calculated on a statistical basis from the known failurerates of various components of the system. MTBF is usuallyexpressed in hours.

MTC Mobile Terminating Call

MTL Message Transfer Link. The MTL is the 64 kbit/s PCM timeslotthat is used to convey the SS7 signalling information on the Ainterface between the MSC and the BSC.

MTM Mobile-To-Mobile (call).

MTP Message Transfer Part. The part of a common-channelsignaling system that transfers signal messages and performsassociated functions, such as error control and signaling linksecurity ( ITU-T Q.701 – Q.703).

MTP-3b Message Transfer Part level 3 / broadband ( ITU-T Q.2210)

MT/PP Mobile Terminated Point-to-Point messages. Transmission of ashort message from a message handling system to a mobile.The maximum length of the message is 160 characters. Themessage can be received whether or not the MS is engaged ina call.

MTTR Mean Time To Repair. The total corrective maintenance timedivided by the total number of corrective maintenance actionsduring a given period of time.

MTU Maximum Transmit Unit ( IP)

Multiframe Two types of multiframe are defined in the system: a 26-framemultiframe with a period of 120 ms and a 51-frame multiframewith a period of 3060/13 ms.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsMU Mark Up.

MUMS Multi User Mobile Station.

MUX Multiplexer. A device that combines multiple inputs into anaggregate signal to be transported via a single transmissionchannel.

NACK - nW

NACK, Nack No Acknowledgement

NAS Non-Access-Stratum ( UMTS)

NAT Network Address Translation ( RFC 1631)

N/W Network.

NB Normal Burst (see Normal burst).

NBAP NodeB Application Part ( 3GTS 25.433)

NBIN A parameter in the frequency hopping sequence generationalgorithm.

NBNS NetBios Name Service

NC Neighbour Cell

NCC Network Colour Code. The NCC and the BCC are part of theBSIC. The NCC comprises three bits in the range 000 to 111.It is the same as the PLMN Colour Code. See also NCC andBSIC.

NCELL Neighbouring (of current serving) Cell.

NCH Notification CHannel. Part of the downlink element of theCCCH reserved for voice group and/or voice broad-cast callsand notification messages.

NCP Network Control Protocol ( PPP)

NCRM Network Cell Reselection Manager.

ND No Duplicates. A database column attribute meaning thecolumn contains unique values (used only with indexedcolumns).

NDC National Destination Code. Part of the MSISDN. An NDC isallocated to each GSM PLMN.

NDUB Network Determined User Busy. An NDUB condition occurswhen a call is about to be offered and the maximum number oftotal calls for the channel has been reached. In practice, thetotal number of calls could be three: one for the basic call, onefor a held call and one for call waiting.

NE Network Element (Network Entity). A piece oftelecommunications equipment that provides support orservices to the user.

NEF Network Element Function block. A functional block thatcommunicates with a TMN for the purpose of being monitored,or controlled, or both.


11-49


Glossary of technical termsNET Norme Européennes de Telecommunications.

NetPlan An RF planning tool, NetPlan can import data from the OMCand use it to carry out a network frequency replan.

Network Layer See OSI RM. The Network Layer responds to service requestsfrom the Transport Layer and issues service requests to theData Link Layer. It provides the functional and proceduralmeans of transferring variable length data sequences froma source to a destination via one or more networks whilemaintaining the quality of service requested by the TransportLayer. The Network Layer performs network routing, flowcontrol, segmentation/desegmentation, and error controlfunctions.

NF Network Function.

NFS Network File System. A file system that is distributed over acomputer network. Also, a file system, on a single computer,that contains the low-level networking files for an entire network.

NHA Network Health Analyst. The NHA is an optional feature. Itdetects problems by monitoring network statistics and eventsvia the OMC-R. The NHA analyses the event history, statisticsand network configuration data to try to determine the cause ofthe detected problems.

NI Network Indicator

NIB Network Interface Board.

NIC Network Interface Card. A network interface device in the formof a circuit card that provides network access.

NIC Network Independent Clocking.

NIS Network Information Service. It allows centralised control ofnetwork information for example hostnames, IP addresses andpasswords.

N-ISDN Narrowband Integrated Services Digital Network: Servicesinclude basic rate interface (2B+D or BRI) and primary rateinterface (30B+D - Europe and 23B+D - North America or PRI).Supports narrowband speeds at/or below 1.5 Mbps.

NIU Network Interface Unit. A device that performs interfacefunctions, such as code conversion, protocol conversion, andbuffering, required for communications to and from a network.

NIU-m Network Interface Unit, micro. M-Cellmicro MSI.

NL See Network Layer.

NLK Network LinK processor(s).

Nm Newton metres.

NM Network Management (manager). NM is all activities whichcontrol, monitor and record the use and the performance ofresources of a telecommunications network in order to providetelecommunication services to customers/users at a certainlevel of quality.

NMASE Network Management Application Service Element.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsNMC Network Management Centre. The NMC node of the GSM

TMN provides global and centralised GSM PLMN monitoringand control, by being at the top of the TMN hierarchy and linkedto subordinate OMC nodes.

NMSI National Mobile Station Identification number, or, NationalMobile Subscriber Identity. The NMSI consists of the MNC andthe MSIN.

NMT Nordic Mobile Telephone system. NMT produced the world’sfirst automatic international mobile telephone system.

NN No Nulls. A database column attribute meaning the columnmust contain a value in all rows.

Normal burst A period of modulated carrier less than a timeslot.

NPB Next Partial Bitmap

NPI Number Plan Identifier.

N-PDU Network-Protocol Data Unit ( IP-Packet, X.25-Frame)

NRZ Non Return to Zero. A code in which ones are represented byone significant condition and zeros are represented by another,with no neutral or rest condition.

NS Network Service

NSAP Network Service Access Point. An NSAP is a registration madeby an application which specifies its desired listening criteria.The registration is limited to a particular CPU and port number.Criteria can include: DNICs, national numbers, subaddressranges, protocol-ids, and extended addresses.

NSAPI Network Service Access Point Identifier

NSE Network Service Entity

NSP Network Service Provider. A national or regional companythat owns or maintains a portion of the network and resellsconnectivity.

NSS Network Status Summary. A feature of the OMC-R MMI,which provides different network maps giving visual indicationof the network configuration and performance, and how thedifferent network management functions are implemented bythe OMC-R.

NST Network Service Test(er). A PCU process that periodically testsall alive NS-VCs on a PICP board.

NS-VC Network Service - Virtual Circuit.

NS-VCG Network Service – Virtual Connection Group

NS-VL Network Service – Virtual Link

NT Network Termination. Network equipment that providesfunctions necessary for network operation of ISDN accessprotocols.

NT Non Transparent.

NTAAB NTRAC Type Approvals Advisory Board. Committee engagedin harmonisation type approval of telecom terminals in Europe.


11-51


Glossary of technical termsNTP Network Time Protocol. A protocol built on top of TCP/IP that

assures accurate local timekeeping with reference to radio,atomic or other clocks located on the Internet. This protocol iscapable of synchronizing distributed clocks within millisecondsover long time periods.

Numbers # - The symbol used for number.2 Mbit/s link - As used inthis manual set, the term applies to the European 4-wire2.048 Mbit/s digital line or link which can carry 30 A-law PCMchannels or 120 16 kbit/s GSM channels.4GL - 4th GenerationLanguage. Closer to human languages than typical high-levelprogramming languages. most 4GLs are used to accessdatabases.

NUA Network User Access.

NUI Network User Identification.

NUP National User Part. (part of SS7).

NV NonVolatile.

NVRAM Non-Volatile Random Access Memory. Static random accessmemory which is made into non-volatile storage either byhaving a battery permanently connected, or, by saving itscontents to EEPROM before turning the power off andreloading it when power is restored.

nW Nano-Watt (10-9).

O - Overlap

O Optional.

OA Outgoing Access supplementary service. An arrangementwhich allows a member of a CUG to place calls outside theCUG.

OA&M Operation, Administration, & Management.

OAMP Operation, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning.

O&M Operations and Maintenance.

OASCU Off-Air-Call-Set-Up. The procedure in which atelecommunication connection is being established whilst theRF link between the MS and the BTS is not occupied.

OCB Outgoing Calls Barred within the CUG supplementary service.An access restriction that prevents a CUG member fromplacing calls to other members of that group.

Octet 8 bit

OCXO Oven Controlled Crystal Oscillator. High stability clock sourceused for frequency synchronization.

OD Optional for operators to implement for their aim.

OFL % OverFlow.

offline IDS shutdown state.

online IDS normal operating state.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsOIC Operator Initiated Clear. An alarm type. OIC alarms must be

cleared by the OMC-R operator after the fault condition thatcaused the alarm is resolved. See also FMIC and Intermittent.

OLCM Outgoing Leg Control Model

OLM Off_Line MIB. A Motorola DataGen database, used to modifyand carry out Radio Frequency planning on multiple BSSbinary files.

OLR Overall Loudness Rating.

OMAP Operations and Maintenance Application Part (part of SS7standard) (was OAMP).

OMC Operations and Maintenance Centre. The OMC node of theGSM TMN provides dynamic O&M monitoring and control ofthe PLMN nodes operating in the geographical area controlledby the specific OMC.

OMC-G Operations and Maintenance Centre - Gateway Part. (Iridium)

OMC-G Operations and Maintenance Centre - GPRS Part.

OMC-R Operations and Maintenance Centre - Radio Part.

OMC-S Operations and Maintenance Centre - Switch Part.

OMF Operations and Maintenance Function (at BSC).

OML Operations and Maintenance Link. The OML providescommunication between an OMC-R and a BSC or RXCDR fortransferring network management (O&M) data.

OMP Operation and Maintenance Processor. Part of the BSC.

OMS Operation and Maintenance System (BSC-OMC).

OMSS Operation and Maintenance SubSystem.

OOS Out Of Service. Identifies a physical state. The OOS stateindicates the physical device is out of service. This state isreserved for physical communication links. Also, identifies atelephony state. The OOS state is used by the BTS devicesoftware to indicate that the BTS is completely out of service.

OPC Originating Point Code. A part of the label in a signallingmessage that uniquely identifies, in a signalling network, the(signalling) origination point of the message.

OPWA One Pass With Advertising ( Term in RSVP)

ORAC Olympus Radio Architecture Chipset.

OS Operating System. The fundamental program running on acomputer which controls all operations.

OSA Open Service Access

OSI Open Systems Interconnection. The logical structure forcommunications networks standardized by the ISO. Thestandard enables any OSI-compliant system to communicateand exchange information with any other OSI-compliantsystem.


11-53


Glossary of technical termsOSI RM OSI Reference Model. An abstract description of the digital

communications between application processes running indistinct systems. The model employs a hierarchical structure ofseven layers. Each layer performs value-added service at therequest of the adjacent higher layer and, in turn, requests morebasic services from the adjacent lower layer:Layer 1 - PhysicalLayer, Layer 2 - Data Link Layer, Layer 3 - Network Layer,Layer 4 - Transport Layer, Layer 5 - Session Layer, Layer 6 -Presentation Layer, Layer 7 - Application Layer.

OSF Operation Systems Function block.

OSF/MOTIF Open Software Foundation Motif. The basis of the GUI usedfor the Motorola OMC-R MMI.

OSP Octet Stream Protocol

OSS Operator Services System.

OTDOA Observed Time Difference Of Arrival

Overlap Overlap sending means that digits are sent from one system toanother as soon as they are received by the sending system. Asystem using ~ will not wait until it has received all digits of acall before it starts to send the digits to the next system. Thisis the opposite of en bloc sending where all digits for a givencall are sent at one time. See en bloc.

OVSF Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factor

PA - PXPDN

P1, P2, P3 Puncturing Schemes 1, 2, and 3.

P/F Bit Polling/Final - Bit

PA Power Amplifier.

PAB Power Alarm Board. Part of the BSS.

PABX Private Automatic Branch eXchange. A private automatictelephone exchange that allows calls within the exchange andalso calls to and from the public telephone network.

PACCH Packet Associated Control Channel.

Packet A sequence of binary digits, including data and control signals,that is transmitted and switched as a composite whole.

Packet Switching The process of routing and transferring data by means ofaddressed packets so that a channel is occupied during thetransmission of the packet only, and upon completion of thetransmission the channel is made available for the transfer ofother traffic.

PAD Packet Assembler/Disassembler facility. A hardware devicethat allows a data terminal that is not set up for packet switchingto use a packet switching network. It assembles data intopackets for transmission, and disassembles the packets onarrival.

PAGCH Packet Access Grant Channel ((E)GPRS)


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsPaging The procedure by which a GSM PLMN fixed infrastructure

attempts to reach an MS within its location area, before anyother network-initiated procedure can take place.

PAP Password Authentication Protocol ( RFC 1334)

PATH CEPT 2 Mbit/s route through the BSS network.

PBCCH Packet Broadcast Control Channel ((E)GPRS)

PBUS Processor Bus.

PBX Private Branch eXchange. In the general use of the term, PBXis a synonym for PABX. However, a PBX operates with only amanual switchboard; a private automatic exchange (PAX) doesnot have a switchboard, a private automatic branch exchange(PABX) may or may not have a switchboard.

PC Personal Computer. A general-purpose single-usermicrocomputer designed to be operated by one person at atime.

pCA PCU Central Authority. One pCA software process is located atevery PCU. The CA is in control of the PCU. It is resident onthe master DPROC (MPROC) only, and maintains a list of thestatus of every device and every software process at the site.

PCCH Paging Control Channel (UMTS Logical Channel)

PCCCH Packet Common Control Channel.

P-CCPCH Primary Common Control Physical Channel (UMTS / used asbearer for the BCH TrCH)

PCH Paging CHannel. A common access RF channel providingpoint-to-multipoint unidirectional signaling downlink. Providessimultaneous transmission to all MSs over a wide paging area.

PCHN Paging Channel Network.

PCHN Physical Channel. The physical channel is the medium overwhich the information is carried. In the case of GSM radiocommunications this would be the Air Interface. Each RFcarrier consists of eight physical channels (or timeslots) usedfor MS communications. In the case of a terrestrial interfacethe physical channel would be cable. See also Physical Layer.

PCI Packet Control Interface.

PCI Peripheral Component Interconnect. A standard for connectingperipherals to a personal computer, PCI is a 64-bit bus, thoughit is usually implemented as a 32-bit bus.

PCM Pulse Code Modulation. Modulation in which a signal issampled, and the magnitude (with respect to a fixed reference)of each sample is quantized and converted by coding to adigital signal. Provides undistorted transmission, even in thepresence of noise. See also 2 Mbit/s link, which is the physicalbearer of PCM.

pCM PCU Configuration Management. pCM is a GWM process. Itdistributes all database changes performed at the BSC to thePCU boards.


11-55


Glossary of technical termsPCN Personal Communications Network. Any network supporting

PCS, but in particular DCS1800.

PCPCH Physical Common Packet Channel (UMTS Physical Channel)

P-CPICH Primary Common Pilot Channel (UMTS Physical Channel)

PCR Preventative Cyclic Retransmission. A form of error correctionsuitable for use on links with long transmission delays, suchas satellite links.

PCS The U.S. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) termused to describe a set of digital cellular technologies beingdeployed in the U.S. PCS works over GSM, CDMA (also calledIS-95), and North American TDMA (also called IS-136) airinterfaces.

PCS System Personal Communications Services System. In PCS, acollection of facilities that provides some combination ofpersonal mobility, terminal mobility, and service profilemanagement. Note: As used here, "facilities" includeshardware, software, and network components such astransmission facilities, switching facilities, signalling facilities,and databases.

PCS1900 A cellular phone network using the higher frequencyrange allocated in countries such as the USA. It operateson the frequency range, 1850 - 1910 MHz (receive) and1930 - 1990 MHz (transmit).

P-CSCF Proxy Call Session Control Function ( SIP)

PCU Packet Control Unit. A BSS component that provides GPRSwith packet scheduling over the air interface with the MS, andpacket segmentization and packetization across the FrameRelay link with the SGSN.

PCU Picocell Control unit. Part of M-Cellaccess.

pd Potential difference. Voltage.

PD Protocol Discriminator field. The first octet of the packet headerthat identifies the protocol used to transport the frame.

PD Public Data. See PDN.

PDB Power Distribution Board.

PDCH Packet Data Channel. PDCH carries a combination of PBCCHand PDTCH logical channels.

PDCP Packet Data Convergence Protocol ( 3GTS 25.323)

PDF Policy Decision Function

PDF Power Distribution Frame (MSC/LR).

PDN Public Data Network. A network established and operated bya telecommunications administration, or a recognized privateoperating agency, for the specific purpose of providing datatransmission services for the public.

PDP Packet Data Protocol.

PDSCH Physical Downlink Shared Channel (UMTS Physical Channel)


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsPDTCH Packet Data Traffic Channel ((E)GPRS)

PDU Power Distribution Unit. The PDU consists consisting of theAlarm Interface Board (AIB) and the Power Distribution Board(PDB).

PDU Protected Data Unit.

PDU Protocol Data Unit. A term used in TCP/IP to refer to a unit ofdata, headers, and trailers at any layer in a network.

PEDC Pan-European Digital Cellular network. The GSM network inEurope.

Peg A single incremental action modifying the value of a statistic.Also, A number indicating the use of a device or resource.Each time the device or resource is used the peg count isincremented.

PER Packed Encoding Rules ( ITU-T X.691)

Pegging Modifying a statistical value.

PFC Packet Flow Context

pFCP PCU Fault Collection Process. See pFTP.

pFTP PCU Fault Transaction Process. The pFTP resides on the PSPas part of the GWM Functional Unit process. All alarms at thePCU are reported to pFTP. All DPROCs and the MPROC havea local pFCP to handle Software Fault Management indications(SWFMs). The pFTP forwards alarms to the Agent at the BSCand generates messages to pCA for device transitions asneeded, based on faults reported.

PFI Packet Flow Identifier

PGSM Primary GSM. PGSM operates on the standard GSM frequencyrange, 890 - 915 MHz (receive) and 935 - 960 MHz (transmit).

PH Packet Handler. A packet handler assembles and disassemblespackets.

PH PHysical (layer). See Physical Layer.

PHI Packet Handler Interface.

Physical Layer See OSI-RM. The Physical Layer is the lowest of sevenhierarchical layers. It performs services requested by the DataLink Layer. The major functions and services of the layerare: (a) establishment and termination of a connection to acommunications medium; (b) participation in the process ofsharing communication resources among multiple users; and,(c) conversion between the representation of digital data inuser equipment and the corresponding signals transmitted overa communications channel.

PI Presentation Indicator. The PI forms part of the calling nameinformation. Depending on database settings, the PI mayprevent the called party from seeing the identity of the callingparty.

PIA Packet Immediate Assignment.


11-57


Glossary of technical termsPicocell A cell site where the base station antenna is mounted within

a building.

PICH Page Indicator Channel (UMTS Physical Channel)

PICP Packet Interface Control Processor. A PCU hardwarecomponent, the PICP is a DPROC board used for networkinterfacing functions such as SGSN and BSC.

PICS Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement. A statementmade by the supplier of an implementation or system claimedto conform to a given specification, stating which capabilitieshave been implemented.

PID Process IDentifier/Process ID.

PIM PCM Interface Module (MSC).

PIN Personal Identification Number. A password, typically fourdigits entered through a telephone keypad.

PIN Problem Identification Number.

PIX Parallel Interface Extender half size board. Customer alarminterface, part of the BSS. The PIX board provides a means ofwiring alarms external to the BSS, BSC, or BTS into the baseequipment.

PIXT or PIXIT Protocol Implementation eXtra information for Testing.A statement made by a supplier or implementor of animplementation under test (IUT) which contains informationabout the IUT and its testing environment which will enable atest laboratory to run an appropriate test suite against the IUT.

PK Primary Key. A database column attribute, the primary key is anot-null, non-duplicate index.

PL See Presentation Layer.

Plaintext Unciphered data.

PlaNET Frequency planning tool.

PLL Phase Lock Loop (refers to phase locking the GCLK in theBTS). PLL is a mechanism whereby timing information istransferred within a data stream and the receiver derives thesignal element timing by locking its local clock source to thereceived timing information.

PLMN Public Land Mobile Network. The mobile communicationsnetwork.

PM Performance Management. An OMC application. PM enablesthe user to produce reports specific to the performance of thenetwork.

PMA Prompt Maintenance Alarm. An alarm report level; immediateaction is necessary. See also DMA.

PMC PCI Mezzanine Card.

PMR Packet Management Report.

PMS Pseudo MMS.

PM-UI Performance Management User Interface.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsPMUX PCM MUltipleXer.

PN Permanent Nucleus group of the GSM committee.

PNCH Packet Notification Channel ((E)GPRS)

PNE Présentation des Normes Européennes. Presentation rulesof European Standards.

POI Point of Interconnection. A point at which the cellular networkis connected to the PSTN. A cellular system may have multiplePOIs.

POP Post Office Protocol ( RFC 1939)

POTS Plain Old Telephone Service. Basic telephone service withoutspecial features such as call waiting, call forwarding, etc.

pp, p-p Peak-to-peak.

PP Point-to-Point.

ppb Parts per billion.

PPB PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) to PCI Bridge board.The PPB allows an MPROC to be linked to a separate bus.The PPB and MPROC are paired boards.

PPCH Packet Paging Channel ((E)GPRS)

PPE Primitive Procedure Entity.

ppm Parts per million (x 10-6).

PPP Point-to-Point Protocol ( RFC 1661)

PRA PCPCH Resource Availability

PRACH Physical Random Access Channel UMTS Packet RandomAccess Channel ((E)GPRS)

Pref CUG Preferential CUG. A Pref CUG, which can be specified for eachbasic service group, is the nominated default CUG to be usedwhen no explicit CUG index is received by the network.

Presentation Layer See OSI RM. The Presentation Layer responds to servicerequests from the Application Layer and issues servicerequests to the Session Layer. It relieves the ApplicationLayer of concern regarding syntactical differences in datarepresentation within the end-user systems.

Primary Cell A cell which is already optimized in the network and has aco-located neighbour whose cell boundary follows the boundaryof the said cell. The primary cell has a preferred band equal tothe frequency type of the coincident cell.

PRM Packet Resource Manager. The PRM is a PRP process. Itperforms all RLC/MAC functions and realises UL/DL powercontrol and timing advance.

PROM Programmable Read Only Memory. A storage device that, afterbeing written to once, becomes a read-only memory.


11-59


Glossary of technical termsPRP Packet Resource Process(or). A PCU hardware component,

the PRP is a DPROC board which manages the packetresources at the PCU and is the processor where all of theradio related processing occurs. GPRS channels are routed toPRPs which perform the RLC/MAC processing, air interfacescheduling, and frame synchronization of the channels.

Ps Location probability. Location probability is a quality criterionfor cell coverage. Due to shadowing and fading a cell edge isdefined by adding margins so that the minimum service qualityis fulfilled with a certain probability.

PS Puncturing Scheme.

PSA Periodic Supervision of Accessibility. PSA is a faultmanagement function. It periodically sends messages toBSSs requesting information on their current state. Thisverifies whether the BSSs are operational or not. If a BSS failsto respond to a PSA request for its status, the OMC-R willgenerate an alarm for that BSS.

PSC Primary Synchronization Code

P-SCH Primary Synchronization Channel (physical)

PSD Power Spectral Density ( 3GTS 25.215 / 3GTS 25.102)

PSK Phase Shift Keying

PSI Packet System Information.

PSAP Presentation Services Access Point.

pSAP PCU System Audit Process. pSAP is a GWM process. Itperiodically monitors the soft devices to maintain the reliabilityof the system.

PSM Power Supply Module.

pSM PCU Switch Manager. The pSM resides on the PSP as part ofthe GWM Functional Unit process. The pSM maintains datapaths within the PCU and communicates with the BSC.

PSP PCU System Processor board. Part of GPRS.

PSPDN Packet Switched Public Data Network. See Packet Switchingand PDN.

PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network. The domestic landline telecommunications network. It is usually accessed bytelephones, key telephone systems, private branch exchangetrunks, and data arrangements.

PSU Power Supply Unit.

PSW Pure Sine Wave.

PT Protocol Type ( GTP or GTP’)

PTACH Packet Timing Advance Control Channel

PTCCH Packet Timing Advance Control Channel ((E)GPRS)

PTCCH/D Packet Timing Advance Control Channel / Downlink Direction((E)GPRS)


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsPTCCH/U Packet Timing Advance Control Channel / Uplink Direction

((E)GPRS)

PTM Point to Multipoint

P-TMSI Packet TMSI

PTO Public Telecommunications Operator.

PTP Point to Point

PTR Packet Timeslot Reconfiguration.

PUA Packet Uplink Assignment.

PUCT Price per Unit Currency Table. The PUCT is the value of theHome unit in a currency chosen by the subscriber. The PUCTis stored in the SIM. The value of the PUCT can be set bythe subscriber and may exceed the value published by theHPLMN. The PUCT value does not have any impact on thecharges raised by the HPLMN.

PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit. Also, in ATM terminology,Permanent Virtual Connection. A virtual circuit that ispermanently established, saving the time associated with circuitestablishment and tear-down. See also SVC.

PW Pass Word.

PWR Power.

PXPDN Private eXchange Public Data Network. See also PDN.

QA- Quiesent mode

QA Q (Interface) - Adapter. TMN interface adapter used tocommunicate with non-TMN compatible devices and objects.Used to connect MEs and SEs to TMN (GSM Rec. 12.00).

Q3 Interface between NMC and GSM network.

Q-adapter See QA.

QAF Q-Adapter Function.

QE Quality Estimate

QEI Quad European Interface. Interfaces four 2 Mbit/s circuits toTDM switch highway. See MSI.

QIC Quarter Inch Cartridge (Data storage format).

QoS Quality Of Service. An alarm category which indicates that afailure is degrading service.

Queue Data structure in which data or messages are temporarilystored until they are retrieved by a software process. Also aseries of calls waiting for service. See also FIFO.

Quiescent mode IDS intermediate state before shutdown.


11-61


Glossary of technical termsR - RXU

R Value of reduction of the MS transmitted RF power relativeto the maximum allowed output power of the highest powerclass of MS (A).

RA RAndom mode request information field.

RA Radio Access.

RA Routing Area.

RA250 Rural Area with the MS travelling at 250 kph. Dynamic modelagainst which the performance of a GSM receiver can bemeasured. See also TU3, TU50, HT100 and EQ50.

RAB Random Access Burst. Data sent on the RACH.

RAB Radio Access Bearer

RAC Routing Area Code

RACCH Random Access Control CHannel. A GSM common controlchannel used to originate a call or respond to a page.

RACH Random Access CHannel. The RACH is used by the mobilestation to request access to the network. See also RAB.

RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service ( RFC 2865)

RAI Routing Area Identification

Radio Frequency A term applied to the transmission of electromagneticallyradiated information from one point to another, usually using airor vacuum as the transmission medium. An electromagneticwave frequency intermediate between audio frequencies andinfrared frequencies used in radio and television transmission.

RAM Random Access Memory. A read/write, nonsequential-accessmemory in which information can be stored, retrieved andmodified. This type of memory is generally volatile (i.e., itscontents are lost if power is removed).

RANAP Radio Access Network Application Part ( 3GTS 25.413)

RAND RANDom number (used for authentication). The RAND is sentby the SGSN to the MS as part of the authentication process.

RAT Radio Access Technology

RATI Receive Antenna Transceiver Interface.

RAx Rate Adaptation.

RB Receive Block Bitmap ( EGPRS)

RBB Receive Block Bitmap ( GPRS)

RBDS Remote BSS Diagnostic System (a discontinued Motoroladiagnostic facility).


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsRBER Residual Bit Error Ratio. RBER is a ratio of the number of

bits in error to the total number of bits received, within errordetected speech frames defined as good. The measurementperiod over which the calculation is made is 480 ms. During thisperiod, 24 speech frames are decoded and a ratio calculated.By referring to a lookup table, the ratio is then converted to anRBER Quality number between 0 and 7.

RBTS Remote Base Transceiver Station. A BTS that is not co-locatedwith the BSC that controls it.

RCB Radio Control Board. Part of the DRCU.

RCI Radio Channel Identifier. The unique identifier of the radiochannel portion of the circuit path.

RCI Radio Channel Interface. The RCI changes the MS addressused in the RSS (channel number) to the address used inLayer 3 in the BSC CP.

RCP Radio Control Processor.

RCU Radio Channel Unit. Part of the BSS. Contains transceiver,digital control circuits, and power supply. Note: The RCU isnow obsolete, see DRCU.

RCVR Receiver.

RDB Requirements Database.

RDBMS Relational DataBase Management System (INFORMIX). Thedatabase management system for the OMC-R database.

RDI Restricted Digital Information.

RDIS Radio Digital Interface System.

RDM Reference Distribution Module. The RDM provides a stable3MHz reference signal to all transceivers. It is used for carrierand injection frequency synthesis.

RDN Relative Distinguished Name. A series of RDNs form a uniqueidentifier, the distinguished name, for a particular networkelement.

REC, Rec RECommendation.

Reciprocal neighbour Used to describe adjacent cells; each being designated asa neighbour of the other. Also known as bi-directional andtwo-way neighbour.

Registration The process of a MS registering its location with the MSC inorder to make or receive calls. This occurs whenever the MSfirst activates or moves into a new service area.

REJ REJect(ion).

REL RELease.

RELP Residual Excited Linear Predictive. A form of speech coding.RELP coders are usually used to give good quality speech atbit rates in the region of 9.6 kbit/s.

RELP-LTP RELP Long Term Prediction. A name for GSM full rate. SeeFull Rate.


11-63


Glossary of technical termsRemotely Tuned Combiner A combiner device which houses two processors (for

paired-redundancy) and several tuneable cavities. See alsoCOMB

resync Resynchronize/resynchronization.

REQ REQuest.

Reuse Pattern The minimum number of cells required in a pattern beforechannel frequencies are reused, to prevent interference.Varies between cell configuration type and channel type. Thepattern shows assignments of adjacent channels to minimizeinterference between cells and sectors within the pattern area.

Revgen A Motorola DataGen utility for producing an MMI script from abinary object database.

RF See Radio Frequency.

RFC, RFCH Radio Frequency Channel. A partition of the system RFspectrum allocation with a defined bandwidth and centrefrequency.

RFE Radio Front End (module).

RFE Receiver Front End (shelf).

RFEB Receiver Front End Board. Part of DRCU II.

RFI Radio Frequency Interference.

RFM Radio Frequency Module.

RFN Reduced TDMA Frame Number.

RFU Reserved for Future Use.

R-GSM Railways-GSM

RJ45 Registered Jack 45. An eight-wire connector used commonlyto connect computers onto a local-area networks (LAN),especially Ethernets.

RISC Reduced Instruction Set Computer. A type of microprocessorthat recognizes a relatively limited number of instruction types,allowing it to operate at relatively higher speeds.

RL Remote login. RL is a means by which the operator performsconfiguration management, fault management, and someperformance management procedures at the NEs. The RLsoftware manages the X.25 connection for remote login. Thecircuit is made by the OMC-R calling the NE.

RLC Release Complete. An SCCP message type used with RLSDto release a connection.

RLC Radio Link Control. Air interface transmission layer. The RLCfunction processes the transfer of PDUs from the LLC layer.(UMTS 3GTS 25.322) ((E)GPRS / 3GTS 04.60 / 3GTS 44.060)

RLM RF Link Manager.

RLP Radio Link Protocol. An ARQ protocol used to transfer userdata between an MT and IWF. See GSM 04.22. ( 3GTS 24.022)

RLR Receive Loudness Rating. See SLR.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsRLSD ReLeaSeD. An SCCP message type used with RLC to release

a connection.

RMS Root Mean Square (value). The most common mathematicalmethod of defining the effective voltage or current of an ACwave. For a sine wave, the rms value is 0.707 times the peakvalue.

RMSU Remote Mobile Switching Unit. An RMSU is a line concentrator.It may be inserted between the MSC and some of the BSSsites served by the MSC to reduce the number of terrestrialsignalling and traffic circuits required.

RNC Radio Network Controller

RNR Receive Not Ready

RNS Radio Network Subsystem

RNTABLE Table of 128 integers in the hopping sequence.

RNSAP Radio Network Subsystem Application Part ( 3GTS 25.423)

RNTI Radio Network Temporary Identifier

ROAM Reliability, Operability, Availability, Maintainability.

Roaming Situation where mobile station operates in a cellular systemother than the one from which service is subscribed.

ROM Read Only Memory. Computer memory that allows fastaccess to permanently stored data but prevents addition to ormodification of the data. ROM is inherently non-volatile storage- it retains its contents even when the power is switched off.

ROSE Remote Operations Service Element. An ASE which carries amessage between devices over an association established byASCE (a CCITT specification for O & M) (OMC).

Roundtrip Time period between transmit and receive instant of a timeslotin the BTS, propagation determined by the response behaviourof the MS and the MS to BTS delay distance.

RPE Regular Pulse Excited (codec). See RPE-LTP.

RPE-LTP Regular Pulse Excitation - Long Term Prediction. The GSMdigital speech coding scheme. GSM uses a simplified RPEcodec, with long-term prediction, operating at 13 kbits/s toprovide toll quality speech.

RPLMN Registered PLMN

RPOA Recognised Private Operating Agency. Privatetelecommunications operator recognised by the appropriatetelecommunications authority.

RPR Read Privilege Required. Part of the table structure of theOMC database schema. Access to the column is allowed onlyfor privileged accounts.

RR Radio Resource management. Part of the GSM managementlayer. The functions provided by RR include paging, ciphermode set, frequency redefinition, assignments, handover andmeasurement reports.

RR Receive Ready.


11-65


Glossary of technical termsRRBP Relative Reserved Block Period

RRC Radio Resource Control ( 3GTS 25.331)

RRSM Radio Resource State Machine. Translates messages throughCall Processing (CP). Activates and deactivates radio channelsas controlled by the CRM.

RRSM Radio Resource Switch Manager.

RS232 Recommended Standard 232. The interface between aterminal (DTE) and a modem (DCE) for the transfer of serialdata. Standard serial interface.

RSCP Received Signal Code Power ( 3GTS 25.215)

RSE Radio System Entity.

RSL Radio Signalling Link. RSL is used for signalling between theBSC and BTSs. The interface uses a 64 kbit/s timeslot witha LAPD protocol.

RSLF Radio System Link Function.

RSLP Radio System Link Processor.

RSS Radio SubSystem (replaced by BSS).

RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator. A parameter returned froma transceiver that gives a measure of the RF signal strengthbetween the MS and BTS, either uplink or downlink.

RSVP Resource Reservation Protocol ( RFC 2205)

RSZI Regional Subscription Zone Identity. The RSZI defines theregions in which roaming is allowed. The elements of the RSZIare:The Country Code (CC) which identifies the country inwhich the GSM PLMN is located,The National Destination Code(NDC) which identifies the GSM PLMN in that country,TheZone Code (ZC) which identifies a regional subscription zoneas a pattern of allowed and not allowed location areas uniquelywithin that PLMN.

RTC Remotely Tuneable Channel Combiner. RTCs are used tofine-tune the cavities to the right frequency. A poorly tunedcavity can cause power destined for the antenna to be reversed.

RTE Remote Terminal Emulator.

RTF Radio Transceiver Function. RTF is the function that supportsthe air interface channel and the DRI/Transceiver pair. Whenequipping a DRI at a remote BTS, one or more RTFs mustbe equipped.

RTF Receive Transmit Functions.

RTO Retransmission Time Out

RTP Real Timer Protocol ( RFC 1889)

RTS Request to Send. A handshaking signal used withcommunication links, especially RS232 or CCITT Rec. V.24 toindicate (from a transmitter to a receiver) that data is ready fortransmission. See also CTS.

RTT RoundTrip Time ( RFC 793)


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsRU Rack Unit.

Run level System processor operating mode.

Rx Receive(r).

RX Receive window buffer.

RXCDR Remote Transcoder. An RXCDR is used when the transcodingis performed at a site away from the BSC. This site would beat or near the MSC. This enables 4:1 multiplexing in which thetranscoded data for four logical channels is combined onto one64 kbit/s link, thus reducing the number of links required forinterconnection to the BSCs. See also XCDR.

RXF Receive Function (of the RTF).

RXLEV Received signal level. An indication of received signal levelbased on the RSSI. RXLEV is one of the two criteria forevaluating the reception quality (the basis for handover andpower control). See also RXQUAL. The MS reports RXLEVvalues related to the apparent received RF signal strength. It isnecessary for these levels to attain sufficient accuracy for thecorrect functioning of the system.

RXLEV-D Received signal level downlink.

RXLEV-U Received signal level uplink.

RXQUAL Received signal quality. An indication of the received signalquality based on the BER. RXQUAL is one of the two criteriafor evaluating the reception quality (the basis for handoverand power control). See also RXLEV. The MS measures thereceived signal quality, which is specified in terms of BERbefore channel decoding averaged over the reporting period oflength of one SACCH multiframe.

RXQUAL-D Received signal quality downlink.

RXQUAL-U Received signal quality uplink.

RXU Remote Transcoder Unit. The shelf which houses the remotetranscoder modules in a BSSC cabinet at a remote transcodersite.

S7- SYSGEN

S7 See SS7.

S/W SoftWare.

SABM Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode. A message whichestablishes the signalling link over the air interface.

SABME SABM Extended.

SABP Service Area Broadcast Protocol ( 3GTS 25.419)

SACCH Slow Associated Control CHannel. A GSM control channelused by the MS for conveying power control and timingadvance information in the downlink direction, and RSSI andlink quality reports in the uplink direction.


11-67


Glossary of technical termsSACCH/C4 Slow Associated Control CHannel/SDCCH/4.

SACCH/C8 Slow Associated Control CHannel/SDCCH/8.

SACCH/T Slow Associated Control CHannel/Traffic channel.

SACCH/TF Slow Associated Control CHannel/Traffic channel Full rate.

SACCH/TH Slow Associated Control CHannel/Traffic channel Half rate.

SAGE A brand of trunk test equipment.

SAP Service Access Point. In the reference model for OSI, SAPs ofa layer are defined as gates through which services are offeredto an adjacent higher layer.

SAP System Audits Process. SAP is on each GPROC in the BSS. Itmonitors the status of the BSS on a periodic (scheduled) andon-demand basis during normal mode. SAP detects faulty ordegrading hardware and software (through the use of audittests) and notifies the Alarms handling software of the condition.

SAPI Service Access Point Indicator (identifier). The OSI term for thecomponent of a network address which identifies the individualapplication on a host which is sending or receiving a packet.

SAR Segmentation And Reassembly (ATM-sublayer)

SAW Surface Acoustic Wave. SAW devices basically consist of aninput transducer to convert electrical signals to tiny acousticwaves, which then travel through the solid propagation mediumto the output transducer where they are reconverted toelectrical signals. SAW band pass filters are used for sortingsignals by frequency.

SB Synchronization Burst (see Synchronization burst).

SBUS Serial Bus. An SBUS is a logical device made up of thecommunication path between the GPROCs and LANX cardsin a cage.

SC Service Centre (used for Short Message Service).

SC Service Code.

SCCA System Change Control Administration. Software modulewhich allows full or partial software download to the NE (OMC).

SCCP Signalling Connection Control Part (part of SS7).

S-CCPCH Secondary Common Control Physical Channel (used as bearerfor the FACH and PCH TrCH’s / UMTS Physical Channel)

SCEG Speech Coding Experts Group (of GSM).

SCH Synchronization CHannel. A GSM broadcast control channelused to carry information for frame synchronization of MSs andidentification of base stations.

SCI Status Control Interface. A slave to the Status Control Manager.

SCIP Serial Communication Interface Processor.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsSCM Status Control Manager. Accepts messages from other

processors within the switch requesting status displays in theform of one or more lights on a hardware panel. The SCM mapsthe status display requests into specific commands to the statuscontrol interface processor to turn on and/or turn off lights.

SCN Sub-Channel Number. One of the parameters defining aparticular physical channel in a BS.

SCP Service Control Point (an intelligent network entity).

S-CPICH Secondary Common Pilot Channel (UMTS Physical Channel)

S-CSCF Serving Call Session Control Function ( SIP)

SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface. A processor-independentstandard for system-level interfacing between a computer andintelligent devices including hard disks, floppy disks, CD-ROM,printers, scanners, and many more. SCSI-1 can connect up toseven devices to a single SCSI adaptor (or host adaptor) onthe computer’s bus.

SCTP Stream Control Transmission Protocol ( RFC 2960)

SCU Slim Channel Unit.

SCU900 Slim Channel Unit for GSM900.

SDCCH Stand-alone Dedicated Control CHannel. A GSM controlchannel where the majority of call setup occurs. Used for MS toBTS communications before MS assigned to TCH. A SDCCHis used by a single MS for call setup, authentication, locationupdating and SMS point to point.

SDL Specification Description Language. A method for visuallydepicting the functionality of call processing, operations andmaintenance software.

SDM Sub-rate Data Multiplexor

SDMA Space Division Multiple Access

SDT SDL Development Tool. A software tool to model and validatereal-time, state-based product software designs.

SDU Service Data Unit. In layered systems, a set of data that is sentby a user of the services of a given layer, and is transmitted toa peer service user semantically unchanged.

SDR Special Drawing Rights. The SDR is the International MonetaryFund unit of account. It also serves as a basis for the unit ofaccount for a number of other international organizations andas a basis for private financial instruments. The SDR is basedon the values of the euro, U.S. dollar, Japanese yen and poundsterling.

SE Support Entity. See SEF.

Secondary Cell A cell which is not optimized in the network and has aco-located neighbour whose cell boundary follows the boundaryof the said cell. The secondary cell has a preferred band thesame as that of its own frequency type.


11-69


Glossary of technical termsSEF Support Entity Function. SEFs are functions not directly

involved in the telecommunication process. They include faultlocalisation, protection switching, etc. (GSM Rec.12.00).

Session Layer See OSI RM. The Session Layer responds to service requestsfrom the Presentation Layer and issues service requests tothe Transport Layer. It provides the mechanism for managingthe dialogue between end-user application processes. Itprovides for either duplex or half-duplex operation andestablishes checkpointing, adjournment, termination, andrestart procedures.

SF Spreading Factor

SFH Synthesizer Frequency Hopping. The principle of SFH is thatevery mobile transmits its time slots according to a sequence offrequencies that it derives from an algorithm. The frequencyhopping occurs between time slots and, therefore, a mobilestation transmits (or receives) on a fixed frequency during onetime slot. It must then hop before the time slot on the nextTDMA frame. Due to the time needed for monitoring otherbase stations the time allowed for hopping is approximately 1ms, according to the receiver implementation. The receive andtransmit frequencies are always duplex frequencies.

SFN System Frame Number

SG Security Gateway (IPsec / RFC 2401)

SGSN Serving GPRS Support Node. The SGSN provides the control,transmission, OAMP, and charging functions. It keeps track ofthe individual MS locations, and performs security functionsand access control. The SGSN is connected to the BSS via aFrame Relay network.

SGW Signaling Gateway (SS7 IP)

SHA Secure Hash Algorithm

SHCCH Shared Channel Control Channel (UMTS Logical Channel /TDD only)

SI Screening Indicator. The supplementary service (SS) screeningindicator is sent by the MS at the beginning of the radioconnection to allow the network to assess the capabilities of theMS and hence determine either whether a particular networkinitiated SS operation may be invoked or which version of anetwork initiated SS operation should be invoked. The SSscreening indicator is only relevant to network initiated SSoperation and is valid for the duration of a radio connection.

SI Service Interworking. Part of the IWF.

SI Supplementary Information.

SI System Information.

SIA Supplementary Information A.

SIB System Information Block


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsSID Silence Descriptor. The transmission of comfort noise

information to the RX side is achieved by means of a SIDframe. A SID frame is transmitted at the end of speech burstsand serves as an end of speech marker for the RX side. Inorder to update the comfort noise characteristics at the RXside, SID frames are transmitted at regular intervals also duringspeech pauses. This also serves the purpose of improving themeasurement of the radio link quality by the radio subsystem(RSS).

SIF Signal Information Field. The bits of a message signal unit thatcarry information for a certain user transaction; the SIF alwayscontains a label.

Signalling System No.7 See SS7.

SIM Subscriber Identity Module. Removable module which isinserted into a mobile equipment; it is considered as part ofthe MS. It contains security related information (IMSI, Ki, PIN),other subscriber related information and the algorithms A3 andA8.

SIMM Single Inline Memory module.

SIMM System Integrated Memory Module. A small plug-in circuitboard providing additional RAM for a computer.

SIO Service Information Octet. Eight bits contained in a messagesignal unit, comprising the service indicator and sub-servicefield. A value in the SIF of an SS7 signalling messagespecifying the User Part type.

SIP Session Initiation Protocol ( RFC 3261)

SIR Signal to Interference Ratio

SITE BSC, BTS or collocated BSC-BTS site.

SIX Serial Interface eXtender. Converts interface levels to TTLlevels. Used to extend 2 serial ports from GPROC to externaldevices (RS232, RS422, and fibre optics).

SK Secondary Key. A database column attribute, the secondarykey indicates an additional index and/or usage as a compositekey.

SL See Session Layer.

SL Signalling Link. The signalling links between the variousnetwork elements are: Remote BTS to BSC - Radio SignallingLink (RSL), BSC to MSC - Message Transfer Link (MTL),OMC(R) to BSS - Operations and Maintenance Link (OML),Remote XCDR to BSC - XCDR signalling Link (XBL), CBC toBSC - Cell Broadcast Link (CBL).

SLC Signaling Link Code

SLF Subscriber Locator Function

SLNK Serial Link. One of four communications paths between SCIPand peripheral equipment. The information on the link is sentserially in a bit-synchronous format.


11-71


Glossary of technical termsSLR Send Loudness Rating. The SLR, in the mobile to land

direction, and the Receive Loudness Rating (RLR) in the landto mobile direction, determine the audio signal levels for thecustomers speech. The loudness ratings are calculated fromthe send and receive sensitivity masks or frequency responses.

SLR Source Local Reference (SS7)

SLS Signaling Link Selection

SLTA Signalling Link Test Acknowledge. Message sent from theMSC to the BSC in response to an SLTM.

SLTM Signalling Link Test Message. During the process of bringingan MTL link into service, the BSC sends an SLTM message tothe MSC. The MSC responds with an SLTA message.

SM Switch Manager. The function of the SM is to connect a MSterrestrial trunk from the MSC (designated by the MSC), to theradio channel given to a MS by the cell resource manager inthe BSS software.

SM Summing Manager.

SM Session Management

SMAE System Management Application Entity (CCITT Q795, ISO9596). OSI terminology for a software Management InformationServer that manages a network.

SMASE System Management Application Service Element.

SMCB Short Message Cell Broadcast.

SME Short Message Entity. An entity that may send or receive ShortMessages. The SME may be located in a fixed network, anMS, or a SC. See also SMS.

SMG Special Mobile Group. To avoid confusion between the GSMsystem and the GSM committee with its wider responsibilities,the committee was renamed SMG in 1992.

SMP Motorola Software Maintenance Program. A Motorola programdesigned to ensure the highest quality of software with thehighest level of support.

SMS Short Message Service. SMS is a globally accepted wirelessservice that enables the transmission of alphanumericmessages between mobile subscribers and external systemssuch as electronic mail, paging, and voice-mail systems. Ittransfers the short messages, up to 160 characters, betweenSmts and MSs via an SMS-SC. See also SMS-SC, SMS/PPand Smt.

SMSCB Short Message Service Cell Broadcast. SMSCB is a service inwhich short messages may be broadcast from a PLMN to MSs.SMSCB messages come from different sources (e.g. trafficreports, weather reports). Messages are not acknowledged bythe MS. Reception of SMSCB messages by the MS is onlypossible in idle mode. The geographical area over which eachmessage is transmitted is selected by the PLMN operator, byagreement with the provider of the information.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsSMS-G-MSC SMS Gateway MSC (for Short Messages destined to Mobile

Station)

SMS-IW-MSC SMS Interworking MSC (for Short Messages coming fromMobile Station)

SMS-SC Short Message Service - Service Centre. SMS-SC is aninterworking unit between stationary networks and the GSMNetwork. It acts as a store and forward centre for shortmessages. See also SMS, SMS/PP and Smt.

SMS/PP Short Message Service/Point-to-Point. Two differentpoint-to-point services have been defined: Mobile Originated(MO) and Mobile Terminated (MT). A short message alwaysoriginates or terminates in the GSM network. This means thatshort messages can never be sent between two users bothlocated in stationary networks. See also SMS, SMS-SC andSmt.

Smt Short message terminal. See also SMS, SMS-SC andSMS/PP. There are different types of Smt interfaces, one beingthe Computer Access Interface which provides services forexternal computers communicating with SMS-SCs through theComputer Access Protocol.

SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol ( RFC 2821)

SN Subscriber Number.

SND Sequence Number Downlink ( GTP)

SND SeND.

SNDCP Subnetwork Dependent Convergence Protocol

SNDR SeNDeR.

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

SNN SNDCP N-PDU Number Flag

SN-PDU Segmented N-PDU (SN-PDU is the payload of SNDCP)

SNR Signal to Noise Ratio

SNR Serial NumbeR.

SNU Sequence Number Uplink ( GTP)

SOA Suppress Outgoing Access (CUG SS). An arrangement whichprevents a member of a CUG placing calls outside the CUG.

SOAP Simple Object Access Protocol (http://www.w3.org/TR/2000/NOTE-SOAP-20000508)

Software Instance A complete set of software and firmware objects including thedatabase object.

SP Service Provider. The organisation through which thesubscriber obtains GSM telecommunications services. Thismay be a network operator or possibly a separate body.

SP Signalling Point. A signalling point is a node within a SS7network.

SP Special Product.


11-73


Glossary of technical termsSP SPare.

SPARC Scalable Processor ArChitecture. a 32- and 64-bitmicroprocessor architecture from Sun Microsystems that isbased on the Reduced Instruction Set Computer (RISC).SPARC has become a widely-used architecture for hardwareused with UNIX-based operating systems.

SPC Signalling Point Code.

SPC Suppress Preferential CUG. Prohibits the use of the preferentialCUG, on a per call basis.

SPI Security Parameter Index ( RFC 2401)

SPI Signalling Point Inaccessible.

SPP Single Path Preselector.

SQE Signal Quality Error.

SQL Structured Query Language. The standard language forrelational database management systems as adopted by theAmerican National Standards Institute (ANSI X3.135-1989) andthe International Standards Organization (ISO 9075-1989).

SRB Signaling Radio Bearer

SRD Service Request Distributor.

SRES Signed RESponse (authentication). The SRES is calculated bythe MS, using the RAND, and sent to the SGSN to authenticatethe MS.

SRNC Serving RNC

SRTT Smoothed RoundTrip Time ( RFC 793)

SS Supplementary Service. A modification of, or a supplement to,a basic telecommunication service.

SS System Simulator.

SS7 ITU-TSS Common Channel Signalling System No. 7. Alsoknown as C7, S7 or SS#7. The standard defines the proceduresand protocol by which network elements in the PSTN exchangeinformation over a digital signalling network to effect wireless(cellular) and wireline call setup, routing and control.

SSA SubSystem-Allowed. SSA is used for SCCP subsystemmanagement. An SSA message is sent to concerneddestinations to inform those destinations that a subsystemwhich was formerly prohibited is now allowed. (see ITU-TRecommendation Q.712 para 1.15).

SSAP Site System Audits Processor.

SSC Supplementary Service Control string. When a subscriberselects a supplementary service control from the menu in aGSM network, the mobile station invokes the SSC by sendingthe network the appropriate functional signalling message.

SSCF/NNI Service Specific Coordination Function – Network NodeInterface Protocol ( ITU-T Q.2140)


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsSSCF/UNI Service Specific Coordination Function – User Network

Interface Protocol ( ITU-T Q.2130)

S-SCH Secondary Synchronization Channel (physical)

SSCOP Service Specific Connection Oriented Protocol ( ITU-T Q.2110)

SSCOPMCE Service Specific Connection Oriented Protocol in a Multi-link orConnectionless Environment ( ITU T Q.2111)

SSCS Service Specific Convergence Sublayer

SSDT Site Selection Diversity Transmission

SSF Subservice Field. The level 3 field containing the networkindicator and two spare bits.

SSM SCCP Switch Manager.

SSM Signalling State Machine.

SSN Start Sequence Number ( related to ARQ-Bitmap in GPRS/ EGPRS)

SSN Send Sequence Number ( GSM MM and CC-Protocols)

SSN SubSystem Number. In SS7, each signalling point (SP) maycontain a number of subsystems. Each subsystem has aunique ID, the SSN (e.g. 149 for SGSN and 6 for HLR).

SSP Service Switching Point. Intelligent Network Term for the Class4/5 Switch. The SSP has an open interface to the IN forswitching signalling, control and handoff.

SSP Subsystem-prohibited. SSP is used for SCCP subsystemmanagement. An SSP message is sent to concerneddestinations to inform SCCP Management at those destinationsof the failure of a subsystem.

SSS Switching SubSystem. The SSC comprises the MSC and theLRs.

SSSAR Service Specific Segmentation And Reassembly ( ITU-TI.366.1)

ssthresh Slow start threshold

STAN Statistical ANalysis (processor).

STAT STATistics.

stats Statistics.

STC Signaling Transport Converter on MTP-3 and MTP-3b ( ITU-TQ.2150.1) / Signaling Transport Converter on SSCOP andSSCOPMCE ( ITU-T Q.2150.2)

STC System Timing Controller. The STC provides the timingfunctions for the GPROC.

STMR Side Tone Masking rating. A rating, expressed in dB, based onhow a speaker will perceive his own voice when speaking.

STTD Space Time block coding based Transmission Diversity

SUERM Signal Unit Error Rate Monitor. A link error rate monitor.


11-75


Glossary of technical termsSTP Signalling Transfer Point. A node in the SS7 telephone network

that routes messages between exchanges and betweenexchanges and databases that hold subscriber and routinginformation.

SU Signal Unit. A group of bits forming a separately transferableentity used to convey information on a signalling link.

SUFI Super Field (RLC-Protocol)

SunOS Sun Microsystems UNIX Operating System. SunOS wasrenamed Solaris.

Superframe 51 traffic/associated control multiframes or 26broadcast/common control multiframes (period 6.12s).

Super user User account that can access all files, regardless of protectionsettings, and control all user accounts.

SURF Sectorized Universal Receiver Front-end (Used inHorizonmacro).

SVC Switch Virtual Circuit. A temporary virtual circuit that is set upand used only as long as data is being transmitted. Once thecommunication between the two hosts is complete, the SVCdisappears. See also PVC.

SVM SerVice Manager. The SVM provides overall managementauthority for all in-service service circuits.

SVN Software Version Number. The SVN allows the MEmanufacturer to identify different software versions of a giventype approved mobile. See also IMEI and IMEISV.

SW Software.

SWFM SoftWare Fault Management. Software faults are handledthrough a SWFM facility which routes those events to the OMCindependently through the FCP.

SYM SYstem information Manager. The SYM builds and sendsGPRS system information messages over the BCCH.

sync synchronize/synchronization.

Synchronization burst Period of RF carrier less than one timeslot whose modulationbit stream carries information for the MS to synchronize itsframe to that of the received signal.

Synthesizer hopping Synthesizer hopping is a method of frequency hopping inwhich the RCUs are re-tuned in real-time, from frequency tofrequency.

SYS SYStem.

SYSGEN SYStem GENeration. The Motorola procedure for loading aconfiguration database into a BTS.

T -TxBPF

T Timer.

T Transparent.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsT Type only.

T1 Digital WAN carrier facility that transmits DS-1-formatteddata at 1544 kbp/s through the telephone-switching network.companies. T1 lines are widely used for private networks aswell as interconnections between an organization’s PBX orLAN and the telco.

T43 Type 43 Interconnect Board. Provides interface to 12unbalanced (6-pair) 75 ohm (T43 coax connectors) lines for 2Mbit/s circuits (See BIB).

TA Terminal Adaptor. A physical entity in the MS providing terminaladaptation functions (see GSM 04.02).

TA See Timing Advance.

TAC Type Approval Code. Part of the IMEISV.

TACS Total Access Communication System. European analoguecellular system.

TAF Terminal Adaptation Function.( 3GTS 27.001)

TAI Timing Advance Index

TATI Transmit Antenna Transceiver Interface. The TATI consists ofRF combining equipments, either Hybrid or Cavity Combining.See CCB.

TAXI Transparent Asynchronous Transmitter/Receiver Interface(physical layer). A 100 Mbps ATM transmission standarddefined by the ATM Forum.

TB Transport Block

TBD To Be Determined.

TBF Temporary Block Flow. MAC modes support the provision ofTBFs allowing the point-to-point transfer of signalling and userdata between the network and an MS.

TBR Technical Basis for Regulation. An ETSI document containingtechnical requirements and procedures.

TBS Transport Block Set

TBUS TDM Bus. A TBUS is a logical device made up of the TDMbackplane of a cage, the KSW devices managing the TDMhighway of the cage, and local and remote KSWX devices (ifthey exist).

TC Transaction Capabilities. TC refers to a protocol structureabove the network layer interface (i.e., the SCCP serviceinterface) up to the application layer including commonapplication service elements but not the specific applicationservice elements using them. TC is structured as a Componentsub-layer above a Transaction sub-layer.

TCAP Transaction Capabilities Application Part. The layer of theSS7 protocol that is used to obtain Routing data for certainservices.( Q.771 – Q.773)

TCB TATI Control Board.


11-77


Glossary of technical termsTCH Traffic CHannel. GSM logical channels which carry either

encoded speech or user data.

TCH/F A full rate TCH. See also Full Rate.

TCH/F2.4 A full rate TCH at ? 2.4 kbit/s.

TCH/F4.8 A full rate TCH at 4.8 kbit/s.

TCH/F9.6 A full rate TCH at 9.6 kbit/s.

TCH/FD Traffic Channel / Fullrate Downlink

TCH/FS A full rate Speech TCH.

TCH/H A half rate TCH. See also Half Rate.

TCH/H2.4 A half rate TCH at ? 2.4 kbit/s.

TCH/H4.8 A half rate TCH at 4.8 kbit/s.

TCH/HS A half rate Speech TCH.

TCI Transceiver Control Interface.

TCP Transmission Control Protocol. TCP is one of the mainprotocols in TCP/IP networks. Whereas the IP protocol dealsonly with packets, TCP enables two hosts to establish aconnection and exchange streams of data. TCP guaranteesdelivery of data and also guarantees that packets will bedelivered in the same order in which they were sent. See alsoIP and TCP/IP.

TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Twointerrelated protocols that are part of the Internet protocol suite.TCP operates on the OSI Transport Layer and IP operates onthe OSI Network Layer. See also IP and TCP.

TCTF Target Channel Type Field

TC-TR Technical Commitee Technical Report.

TCTV Transport Channel Traffic Volume

TCU Transceiver Control Unit.

TDD Time Division Duplex

TDF Twin Duplexed Filter. Used in M-Cellhorizon.

TDM Time Division Multiplexing. A type of multiplexing that combinesdata streams by assigning each stream a different time slot in aset. TDM repeatedly transmits a fixed sequence of time slotsover a single transmission channel. Within T-Carrier systems,such as T-1 and T-3, TDM combines PCM streams created foreach conversation or data stream.

TDMA Time Division Multiple Access. A technology for deliveringdigital wireless service using TDM. TDMA works by dividinga radio frequency into time slots and then allocating slots tomultiple calls. In this way, a single frequency can supportmultiple, simultaneous data channels.

TDU TopCell Digital Unit. Part of the TopCell BTS hardware. A TDUis capable of supporting 6 TRUs for supporting up to 6 sectors.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsTE Terminal Equipment. Equipment that provides the functions

necessary for the operation of the access protocols by the user.

Tei Terminal endpoint identifier. A number that identifies a specificconnection endpoint within a service access point.

TEI Terminal Equipment Identity.

TEID Tunnel Endpoint Identifier ( GTP / 3GTS 29.060)

TEMP TEMPorary.

TEST TEST control processor.

TF Transport Format

TF Transmission Function. The TF provides layered protocolsoftware for handling payload information transfer and forproviding signalling communications between the controlfunction and external systems.

TFA TransFer Allowed. An SPC route management message usedto notify adjacent signalling points of an accessible route.

TFC Transport Format Combination

TFCI Transport Format Combination Identifier

TFCS Transport Format Combination Set

TFI Transport Format Indication (UMTS). Temporary Flow Identity((E)GPRS)

TFP TransFer Prohibited. An SPC route management messageused to notify adjacent signalling points of an inaccessibleroute.

TFS Transport Format Set

TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol. TFTP is a simple form of FTP. Ituses UDP and provides no security features. It is often used byservers to boot diskless workstations, X-terminals, and routers.

TGD Transmission Gap start Distance ( 3GTS 25.215)

TGL Transmission Gap Length ( 3GTS 25.215)

TGPRC Transmission Gap Pattern Repetition Count ( 3GTS 25.215)

TGSN Transmission Gap Starting Slot Number ( 3GTS 25.215)

THIG Topology Hiding Inter Network Gateway

TI Transaction Identifier.

TID Tunnel Identifier

Timeslot The multiplex subdivision in which voice and signalling bits aresent over the air. Each RF carrier is divided into 8 timeslots.See also ARFCN.

Timing advance A signal sent by the BTS to the MS. It enables the MS toadvance the timing of its transmission to the BTS so as tocompensate for propagation delay.

TL See Transport Layer.

TLLI Temporary Logical Link Identifier.


11-79


Glossary of technical termsTLS Transport Layer Security ( RFC 2246 / RFC 3546 / formerly

known as SSL or Secure Socket Layer)

TLV Type, Length and Value. An encoding element composed ofthree fields: a type identifier, a length indicator, and contentoctets.

TM Transparent Mode operation ( UMTS-RLC)

TM Transmission Modules

TM Traffic Manager.

TMD Transparent Mode Data (UMTS RLC PDU-type)

TMI TDM Modem Interface board. Provides analogue interfacefrom IWF to modems for 16 circuits. Part of IWF.

TMM Traffic Metering and Measuring. TMM provides system toolsto be used by traffic engineering and switch maintenancepersonnel to determine if the system is operating correctly.TMM reports are provided for trunk circuits, trunk groups,service circuits, call routing and miscellaneous system data.

TMN Telecommunications Management Network. The physicalentities required to implement the Network Managementfunctionality for the PLMN.Also, TMN was originated formally in 1988 under the ITU-TSas a strategic goal to create or identify standard interfacesthat would allow a network to be managed consistently acrossall network element suppliers. The concept has led to aseries of interrelated efforts at developing standard ways todefine and address network elements. TMN uses the OSIManagement Standards as its framework. TMN applies towireless communications and cable TV as well as to privateand public wired networks.

TMSI Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity. A unique identitytemporarily allocated by the MSC to a visiting mobile subscriberto process a call. May be changed between calls and evenduring a call, to preserve subscriber confidentiality.

TN Timeslot Number.

TOM Tunneling of Messages.

TON Type Of Number.

TPC Transmit Power Command

T-PDU Payload of a G-PDU which can be user data, i.e. possiblysegmented IP-frames, or GTP signaling information ( GTP)

TQI Temporary Queuing Identifier

Traffic channels Channels which carry user’s speech or data. See also TCH.

Traffic unit Equivalent to an erlang.

Training sequence Sequence of modulating bits employed to facilitate timingrecovery and channel equalization in the receiver.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsTransport Layer See OSI RM. The Transport Layer responds to service requests

from the Session Layer and issues service requests to theNetwork Layer. Its purpose is to provide transparent transferof data between end users, thus relieving the upper layersfrom any concern with providing reliable and cost-effectivedata transfer.

TRAU Transcoding Rate and Adaption Unit

TRS Timeslot Resource Shifter. The TRS determines whichtimeslots are active in a PRP board to perform a control of theGPRS traffic.

TRAU Transcoder Rate Adaption Unit. TRAU converts the encodedvoice and rate adapted data into 64 kbps data for the PSTN.

TrCH Transport Channel (UMTS)

TrGW Transition Gateway (IPv4 IPv6)

TRM Terrestrial Resource Management.

TRU TopCell Radio unit.

TRX Transceiver(s). A network component which can serve fullduplex communication on 8 full-rate traffic channels accordingto specification GSM 05.02. If Slow Frequency Hopping (SFH)is not used, then the TRX serves the communication on oneRF carrier.

TS Technical Specification.

TS TeleService. Any service provided by a telecommunicationprovider.

TS TimeSlot (see Timeslot).

TS1 Training Sequence 1.

TS2 Training Sequence 2.

TSA TimeSlot Acquisition.

TSA TimeSlot Assignment.

TSDA Transceiver Speech & Data Interface.

TSC Training Sequence Code. A training sequence is sent at thecentre of a burst to help the receiver identify and synchronizeto the burst. The training sequence is a set sequence of bitswhich is known by both the transmitter and receiver. There areeight different TSCs numbered 0 to 7. Nearby cells operatingwith the same RF carrier frequency use different TSCs to allowthe receiver to identify the correct signal.

TSI TimeSlot Interchange. The interchange of timeslots within aTDM stream.

TSDI Transceiver Speech and Data Interface.

TSM Transceiver Station Manager.

TSN TRAU SyNc.

TSTD Time Switched Transmit Diversity

TSW Timeslot SWitch.


11-81


Glossary of technical termsTTCN Tree and Tabular Combined Notation. TTCN is a programming

language endorsed by ISO that is used to write test suites fortelecommunications systems.

TTL Transistor to Transistor Logic. A common semiconductortechnology for building discrete digital logic integrated circuits.

TTL Time To Live ( IP-Header / RFC 791)

TTY TeleTYpe (refers to any terminal).

TU Traffic Unit.

TU3 Typical Urban with the MS travelling at 3 kph. Dynamic modelagainst which the performance of a GSM receiver can bemeasured. See also TU50, HT100, RA250 and EQ50.

TU50 Typical Urban with the MS travelling at 50 kph. Dynamic modelagainst which the performance of a GSM receiver can bemeasured. See also TU3, HT100, RA250 and EQ50.

TUP Telephone User Part. TUP was an earlier implementation ofSS7 and generally does not allow for data type applications.

TV Type and Value.

Two-way neighbour See Reciprocal neighbour.

Tx Transmit(ter).

TX Transmit window buffer.

TXF Transmit Function. See RTF.

TXPWR Transmit PoWeR. Tx power level in theMS_TXPWR_REQUEST and MS_TXPWR_CONFparameters.

TxBPF Transmit Bandpass Filter. See BPF.

U - UUS

UA Unnumbered Acknowledgment. A message sent from the MSto the BSS to acknowledge release of radio resources when acall is being cleared.(LAPD/LLC/RLP-Frame Type)

UA User Agent

UAC User Agent Client

UARFCN UMTS Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number

UAS User Agent Server

UCS2 Universal Coded Character Set 2. A codeset containing all ofthe characters commonly used in computer applications.

UDI Unrestricted Digital Information.

UDP User Datagram Protocol. UDP is a connectionless protocolthat, like TCP, runs on top of IP networks. Unlike TCP/IP,UDP/IP provides very few error recovery services, offeringinstead a direct way to send and receive datagrams over an IPnetwork. It is used primarily for broadcasting messages overa network.( RFC 768)


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsUDUB User Determined User Busy.

UE User Equipment

UFE Uplink Frame Error.

UHF Ultra High Frequency. The UHF range of the radio spectrum isthe band extending from 300 MHz to 3 GHz.

UI Unnumbered Information (Frame) ( LAPD) / UnconfirmedInformation ( LLC) / Frame Type

UIC Union International des Chemins de Fer. The UIC is theworldwide organisation for cooperation among railwaycompanies. Its activities encompass all fields related to thedevelopment of rail transport.

UICC Universal Integrated Circuit Card ( 3GTS 22.101 / Bearer cardof SIM / USIM)

UID User ID. Unique number used by the system to identify the user.

UL Upload (of software or database from an NE to a BSS).

UL UpLink.

ULC UpLink Concatenator. The ULC concatenates RLC data blocksinto LLC frames.

Um Air interface.

UM Unacknowledged Mode operation ( UMTS-RLC)

UMD Unacknowledged Mode Data (UMTS RLC PDU-type)

UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunication System. The Europeanimplementation of the 3G wireless phone system. UMTS, whichis part of IMT-2000, provides service in the 2GHz band andoffers global roaming and personalized features. Designed asan evolutionary system for GSM network operators, multimediadata rates up to 2 Mbps are expected.

UNIX A multiuser, multitasking operating system that is widely usedas the master control program in workstations and especiallyservers. UNIX was developed by AT&T and freely distributed togovernment and academic institutions, causing it to be portedto a wider variety of machine families than any other operatingsystem. As a result, UNIX became synonymous with opensystems.

UPCMI Uniform PCM Interface (13 bit). The UPCMI is introduced fordesign purposes in order to separate the speech transcoderimpairments from the basic audio impairments of the MS.

UPD Up to Date.

Uplink Physical link from the MS towards the BTS (MS transmits, BTSreceives).


11-83


Glossary of technical termsUPS Uninterruptable Power Supply. A device that is inserted

between a primary power source, such as a commercial utility,and the primary power input of equipment to be protected,e.g., a computer system, for the purpose of eliminating theeffects of transient anomalies or temporary outages. Backuppower is used when the electrical power fails or drops to anunacceptable voltage level.

UPU User Part Unavailable.

URA UTRAN Registration Area

URI Uniform Resource Identifier

URL Uniform Resource Locators ( RFC 1738)

USAT USIM Application Toolkit

USCH Uplink Shared Channel (UMTS Transport Channel TDD only

Useful part of burst That part of the burst used by the demodulator; differs fromthe full burst because of the bit shift of the I and Q parts of theGMSK signal.

USF Uplink State Flag.

USIM Universal Subscriber Identity Module [3GTS 31.102]

USSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data. The USSDmechanism allows the MS user and a PLMN operator definedapplication to communicate in a way which is transparent tothe MS and to intermediate network entities. The mechanismallows development of PLMN specific supplementary services.

UTRAN UMTS Radio Access Network

UUS User-to-User Signalling supplementary service. The UUSsupplementary service allows a mobile subscriber tosend/receive a limited amount of information to/from anotherPLMN or ISDN subscriber over the signalling channel inassociation with a call to the other subscriber.

UWC Universal Wireless Convergence (Merge IS-136 with GSM)

V - VTX host

V Value only.

VA Viterbi Algorithm (used in channel equalizers). An algorithm tocompute the optimal (most likely) state sequence in a modelgiven a sequence of observed outputs.

VAD Voice Activity Detection. A process used to identify presence orabsence of speech data bits. VAD is used with DTX.

VAP Videotex Access Point.

VBS Voice Broadcast Service. VBS allows the distribution of speech(or other signals which can be transmitted via the speechcodec), generated by a service subscriber, into a predefinedgeographical area to all or a group of service subscriberslocated in this area.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002


Glossary of technical termsVC See Virtual Circuit.

VCI Virtual Circuit Identifier ( ATM)

VCO Voltage Controlled Oscillator. An oscillator whose clockfrequency is determined by the magnitude of the voltagepresented at its input. The frequency changes when thevoltage changes.

VCXO Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator.

VDU Visual Display Unit. A device used for the real-time temporarydisplay of computer output data. Monitor.

VGCS Voice Group Call Service.

VHE Virtual Home Environment ( 3GTS 22.121, 3GTS 23.127)

Videotex The Videotex service is an interactive service, that by means ofproper access points and standardized procedures, providesthe access to data base information stored in host computersexternal to the PLMN, via public telecommunication networks.

Virtual Circuit A connection between two devices, that functions as thoughit is a direct connection, even though it may physically becircuitous. The term is used most frequently to describeconnections between two hosts in a packet-switching network.

VLR Visitor Location Register. A GSM network element whichprovides a temporary register for subscriber information for avisiting subscriber. Often a part of the MSC.

VLSI Very Large Scale Integration (in ICs). The process of placingbetween 100,000 and one million electronic components ona single chip.

VMSC Visited MSC. (Recommendation not to be used).

vocoder Abbreviation for voice-coder. A device that usually consists ofa speech analyzer, which converts analog speech waveformsinto narrowband digital signals, and a speech synthesizer,which converts the digital signals into artificial speech sounds.

VOX Voice Operated Transmission. An acoustoelectric transducerand a keying relay connected so that the keying relay isactuated when sound, or voice energy above a certainthreshold is sensed by the transducer. A vox is used toeliminate the need for push-to-talk operation of a transmitter byusing voice energy to turn on the transmitter

VPI Virtual Path Identifier ( ATM)

VPLMN Visited PLMN.

VSC Videotex Service Centre.

V(SD) Send state variable.

VSP Vehicular Speaker Phone.


11-85


Glossary of technical termsVSWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio. In a transmission line, the ratio

of maximum to minimum voltage in a standing wave pattern.Note: The VSWR is a measure of impedance mismatchbetween the transmission line and its load. The higher theVSWR, the greater the mismatch. The minimum VSWR, i.e.,that which corresponds to a perfect impedance match, is unity.

VTX host The components dedicated to Videotex service.

W - WWW

WAN Wide Area Network. A physical or logical network that providesdata communications to a larger number of independent usersthan are usually served by a LAN and is usually spread over alarger geographic area than that of a LAN. WANs may includephysical networks, such as ISDN networks, X.25 networks,and T1 networks.

WAP Wireless Application Protocol

WINS Windows Internet Name Service

W-LAN Wireless Local Area Network ( IEEE 802.11)

WPA Wrong Password Attempts (counter). Some supplementaryservices have the option of the subscriber using a password.If a password check is done with an incorrect password, theWPA is incremented by one. If a password check is passed,the WPA is set to zero. If the WPA exceeds the value three,the subscriber will have to register a new password with theservice provider.

WS Work Station. The remote device via which O&M personnelexecute input and output transactions for network managementpurposes.

WSF Work Station Function block.

WSN Window Size Number

WWW World Wide Web. An international, virtual-network-basedinformation service composed of Internet host computers thatprovide on-line information in a specific hypertext format. WWWservers provide hypertext metalanguage (HTML) formatteddocuments using the hypertext transfer protocol, HTTP.Information on the WWW is accessed with a hypertext browser.


©MOTOROLA LTD.2002



X - X Window

X.25 X.25, adopted as a standard by the CCITT, is a commonly usedprotocol for public packet-switched networks (PSPDNS). TheX.25 protocol allows computers on different public networks tocommunicate through an intermediary computer at the networklayer level. The protocol corresponds closely to the data-linkand physical-layer protocols defined in the OSI communicationmodel.

X.25 link A communications link which conforms to X.25 specificationsand uses X.25 protocol (NE to OMC links).

XBL Transcoder to BSS Link. The carrier communications linkbetween the Transcoder (XCDR) and the BSS.

XCB Transceiver Control Board. Part of the Transceiver.

XCDR Full-rate Transcoder. The XCDR is the digital signal processingequipment required to perform GSM-defined speech encodingand decoding. In terms of data transmission, the speechtranscoder interfaces the 64 kbit/s PCM in the land network tothe 13 kbit/s vocoder format used on the Air Interface. Seealso RXCDR.

XCDR board The circuit board required to perform speech transcoding atthe BSS or (R)XCDR). Also known as the MSI (XCDR) board.Interchangeable with the GDP board.

XFER Transfer.

XID eXchange IDentifier.

xterm X terminal window. A terminal emulator program for the XWindow System. A user can have many different invocationsof xterm running at once on the same display, each of whichprovides independent input and output for the process runningin it (normally a shell).

X Window A specification for device-independent windowing operationson bitmap display devices.

ZC

ZC Zone Code. Part of the RSZI. The ZC identifies a regionalsubscription zone as a pattern of allowed and not allowedlocation areas uniquely within a PLMN.


11-87




©MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Date post:	27-Oct-2014
Category:	Documents
Upload:	ankkool
View:	123 times
Download:	21 times

Umts Guide

Documents